W$A*\w'\' 1 \ 1H I/O nf 1 - a j Or*\ Vr^^ • J3 3^ i)R JRf tf-LIBRARYQ^ mYO/. m m <$* ' ^J N 2 ^ T V '" =o . ^C* N-.** ( i ***ar m % ~J* 4 Aj aJ^ GRAMMAR OF THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. BY MOSES STUART Associate Piofessor of Sacred Literature in the Theological Institution at Andover. THIRD EDITION. ANDOVER : KLAOG it GOULD, PUBLISHERS AND PRINTER*. Codman Press. 1848. DISTRICT OF MASSACHUSETTS, to wit : District Clerk's Office. lie it romembercd, that on the ninth day of September, A. D. 1828, in the fifty third year of the Independence of the United States of America, Moses Stuart, of the said district, has depos- ited in uil offloe the title of a book, the right whereof he claims as Author, in the words fol- lowing l" wit i — " A Grammar of the Hebrew Language. By Moses Stuart, Associate Professor of Sacreil Literature in the Theological Institution at Andover." — In conformity with the Act of the Congress of the United States, entitled, " An Act for the encouragement of Learning . by secur- ing the copiea of maps, charts and books, to the authors and proprietors of such copies, during the t imea I herein mentioned :" and also to an Act entitled, " An act supplementary to an Act, entitled. An Act f»r the encouragement of learning, by securing the copies of maps, charts and books, to the authors and proprietors of such copies during the times therein mentioned ; and extending the ben • fits thereof to the arts of designing, engraving and etching historical and other print-;." iohm w. davis. I c <;:'; <£**« Di f rUf v oj .Massachusetts. PREFACE. The present edition of my Hebrew Grammar has undergone alterations, both in respect to matter and manner, too numerous to be specified. The great features of the work remain, of course, substantially the same as before. But in the arrange- ment, and in the minute specifications, many variations from the preceding editions may be found. Several teachers in the department of Hebrew, for whose opinion I cherish great respect, have frequently expressed a wish to have a Hebrew Grammar compressed within narrower bounds than the former editions of this work. In compliance with their wishes, and in accordance with my own views, I undertook the task of compressing the body of the work. In order to execute this, nearly the whole of it has been written entirely over ; and some of it three, four, and a small part even seven and eight times over. It would be of no use to state the reasons for such a labour, any farther than to say, that want of due arrangement, or of explicitness, or of completeness in representation, whenev- er I discovered it, was deemed a sufficient reason for repeating my labour, until I became better satisfied. But after all, I have not accomplished all I could desire. The ideal of a more com- plete grammar seems to be before my mind ; but years of labour would be necessary to accomplish a plan, such as I have men- tally sketched out. The Syntax has been changed, as to its arrangement ; in particular, the first part of it has been arranged in a manner much more convenient, as well as appropriate. Bui abridgment of this part of the Grammar 1 found to be impossible, unless perspicuity and illustration should be so neglected, that it would be matter of just complaint and offence to the reader. The urgent duties of my station, and the pressing call for a new edition of this Grammar, have not left me leisure enough to 208833'!. U Pill. I L< I accomplish ;ill I could wish BJ to this compressed edition. A few additions and corrections I have inserted at the end of the book, choosing ratlin to i .;> I B my own lapsus, than to keep back any thing which might be of service to the student. Some smaller faults in the work, which every intelligent reader will spontaneously correct, I have not deemed it of any importance to OOte. 1 can truly aver, that no time and pains which I could be- stow have been spared, to make the printing as accurate as pos- sible. The labour of correcting the press, has been nearly equal to that of preparing for it. Those who have printed Hebrew, and perhaps those only, will give credit to such a declaration. In regard to the Sections, I have departed entirely from the preceding editions ; and this, in order to make the references to the Grammar less complex. Of course, 1 was obliged to give up the plan of regulating myself by the Sections in former edi- tions. Especially did the transpositions which I have made, in regard to the order of subjects, render this necessary. I regret it, that references to the Grammar in some of the Hebrew helps already printed, should thus be rendered useless in respect to the present edition. But in the future editions of such works, this evil can be easily remedied. For making so many changes in my work, I have no other apology, than that I felt under obligation to improve it. Those who choose to have a more imperfect grammar reprinted, in preference to changing for a new and better one, may not be sat- isfied with this apology ; but I trust the number of such is not great. In regard to the copiousness of the present grammar, it does not exceed the number of pages in the abridged edition of Ge- senius' Hebrew Grammar, which has now gone through nine edi- tions. That it contains much more than these abridged editions is true ; for these continually refer to the large Thesaurus by the same author. Experienced teachers, who have a thorough knowledge of the Hebrew, and who wish to communicate a radi- cal knowledge of it to their pupils, will never employ a skeleton grammar. The testimony of such scholars as J. D. Michaelis, \ ater, Geseoius, Hoffmann, and many others, against this prac- tice, is sufficient to render it very doubtful ; and the nature of the TREFACB. VII case decides altogether against it. Whoever uses a skeleton grammar merely, must either remain ignorant of more than one half of the grammatical phenomena of a language, or he must consume his time in filling up, by means of his teacher or of oth- er Grammars, the skeleton which he uses. How much loss of time, and how much perplexity and discouragement, this would occasion, it is not difficult to foresee. To avoid the evil, however, of obliging the learner to occupy himself too much, and for too long a time, with the dry details of grammar, before he comes to know any thing particular of the use of them, I have marked a great part of the passages in the present Grammar with brackets, which should be omitted as mat- ters of study, during the first time that the contents are passed over. These I have continued only as far as the declensions of nouns ; for I would advise the student, when he gets thus far, to begin the practice of reading and parsing in the Chrestomathy. Nor should 1 deem it best, on the first going over, to make him commit any thing more of the Paradigms, than the first one of the regular verb. Let all the rest be learned in the way of practice, gradually, and not by burdening the mind at once with abstract paradigms and all the minutiae of the language. I would refer teacher and learner to my Hebrew Chrestomathy, where, in the introductory remarks to the notes on Part I. and Part II., will be found a full explanation in regard to the method of learning, which I should think it adviseable for the student to pursue. To avoid all loss of time in searching for Paradigms, I have thrown them into a body at the end of the work ; which will greatly facilitate the labour of the student. The index at the close of the volume, I have made more full than before, in order to render easy the finding of any thing which the work contains. In regard to the Hebrew vowels and their changes, (the great stumbling block of teachers and learners), I have done my best to render the subject intelligible. To make it less complex is not practicable, unless the nature of the vowels themselves be changed. If the grammarian follows the nature of the language itself which he labours to explain, and builds on facts, he is not answerable for it, that there is complexness in his work. But \ 111 phi:i\i i ifti i ill] n i- true, that 1 1 •« - English vowel-system is fax more an- omalous mid difficult of acquisition, than die Hebrew. That I have made b new division of the vowels in respect to quantity will 111 >i be matter of offence to those, who can find the grounds of ii in the language itself, and who deem this to he higher authority than die customai v modes of grammarians. Less complex the whole division could not he made, without neglecting to distin- guish things that differ. I have omitted, in the present edition, the Historical Sketch of the Hebrew Language, which is prefixed to the former edi- tions, and also die Praxis at the end. 1 have done this for two reasons : first, in order to reduce the book itself to a more com- pri ->ed form, to accomplish which, the omission of all matter not strictly appropriate was necessary ; and secondly, because the Hebrew Chrestomathy (selection of easy Lessons), which is to be published without delay, will contain not only all that is valua- ble in the Praxis, but much more of a similar nature, and more complete in its kind ; and 1 hope, at some future day not far distant, to publish a history of the Hebrew language, in a form more enlarged, and better adapted to the present state of oriental knowledge, and to the wants of students, than that contained in the former editions of this Grammar. The labour which I have bestowed on the present edition, (which is more than the first edition cost me), may at least be regarded as furnishing some evidence, that my desire is strong to improve the work as much as lies in my power. Every work of this nature is of course merely progressive, even when the most strenuous efforts and the best intentions are directed to- ward it. That teachers and learners may find some progress, to- ward a more improved mode of representing the grammatical phenomena of the Hebrew language, and more convenience for use, in this edition, is sincerely hoped for by THE AUTHOR. tlldavei . Theol. Seminary. 10 Sept. 1896. PART I. ORTHOGRAPHY AND ORTHOEPY. I Repre- Formj tented by tf K i n T n ii bh,b dh,d h v z hh t y kh,k 1 m 3 . & S P "1 tt) n s ? ph,p ts q r s, sh th, t NO. I. Sounded ANCIENT HEBREW ALPHABET. v,b or & j th in j ( that, Q h v z hh t y kh,k 1 m n s u ts q r s, sh th, t Names in Hebrew. Represent- ed by ciV« tfaleph rr»3 Beth 5>rp5 Glmel n V~ Daleth NH He 11 Vav m ZayTn rpn Hheth o^q Tet i^ Yodh "ft Kaph tb5 Lamed h &rt Mem pa Nan ^ Samekh TI? 3? ay in «£> Pe ^2 Tsadhe ^ip Qopli ran Resh Shin in Tav i Names sounded as A vv-lei" Baith Gee-mel Daw'-leth Hay Vawv Za-yin Hhaith TaJt Yoadh Kaf Law'-medh Maim Noon Saw -mekh A-yin Pay Tsaw-dhey Qoaf Raish Sliccn Tawv Signification of names. OX. house. camel. door. hollow. hook. armour. travelling-scrip, serpent. hand. hollow hand. ox-goad. water. fish. prop. eye. mouth. screech-locust. ear. head. tooth. cross. ll. LATEB HEB. ALPHABET. III. ORIENTAL ALPHABETS. 1 iili'll Forma. N a a a a 1 i T n u -: *! d,B D E f' 2 N I.I. I. gh g (II. (1 h v z I.I. t y kh k 1 m i. s >' ph R ts a s a r n t (l h V z hh t y kh,-h k in i. s u ph,f P ts f l r s sh -I, t Kal£ph Beth ( illllcl Dalcth II. Vav Zajin Illietll Tot Yodh Kaph Lamedh Mem Nun Samekh ".IN II. Pc Tsadhe Qopli Resh Sin Shin Tav Anitiir alphabet . O J J r 5 j i 3 S\ riac alphabet. '•fill li 1 1 ir. 1 a 2 FV< ^ i 3" CI B o 1 X-X 5 J* J O p p VV cJb X A N 3 or % 2 7 NTT p 3 1 r. 1 T n o : 3 3 ? Z ? 1 m n NO. IV. TABLE OF THE VOWELS. I. Class ; A sound, corresponding vowel-letter, Altph. Names. *TO Q a mots Pattahh long Pattahh mcd. Pattahh short Sf^hol long Stgho! medial Seghol short Form. Sound. 8*2 12 ttfc = a in all 12 = a in father 12 = a m faring 1212 j = a in man }3 = « in /io/a/ DB 1= a in climate Rep. by a a a a e e e II. Class; E arid / sound, corresponding vowel-letter, Yodh. ITS Tseri Sfghol /o;?£ SeghoJ medial Sfighol s/ior/ pTn Hhireq long Hhireq mcd. Hhireq short IB B DB nn b a op. rq B EB cz/ in they ey in purvey cy in surveyor c in men 2 in machine i in chivalry i in win SVffl Hholem *-»*a*t ■•»> Qameta Hha- R?.n RE SphmediaJ s/io/7 p")VC3 Shureq V"1!2P Q'bbuts vicarious Qibbuts med. Qibbuts short III. Class; and 17 Bound, corresponding vowel-letter, Vav. \H 12 "Jbj= o in go 12 j = o in holiness 1212 = o in no/ 1/3 131X3= oo in moon 12 u12 '=00 in moon 12 = «c in rue uu j= u \ufull IV. [Half-vowels,] Sheva, simple and composite. nrd Sheva (simple) nrt yl'jn Hhateph Pattahh 5?i:o qan Hhateph Seghol yBj? CjulH Hhateph QamSte a n ri c in ftegin a in litany e in oegiYi o in ivortj 12 i: i. m itOU OM Tin: w.imi arf.t. li, mull i mi tin . Ylphabet. § 1. The ancient number qf letter* was only 22; which is clear hom the alphabetic Psalms, \i/.. Ps. 17. HI. 112. 119.146; also From alphabetic compositions in I'rov. 31: in seq. Lam. i — 1\. Hut in I'-. 25. .vi. I 15. one letter i- omitted; io 1'-. 37. K is repeated, ami 9 omitted. All the other Shemitish alphabets, (and the ancient Greek one ;il-<>), had originally the same number of letters. \ 'I'll.' praMnl si/uurr r< l'i he Hebrew letters, i* nol the dmmI ancient one ; a* is evident rr.ini tmeriptioni .m Hebrew eoint, itamped in tbe time of tbe Maccabees, winch have character* ■uofa ..- are designated in alphabet No. III. The present square letter i-. eridently derived from the Aramaean forma of letters, and probably originated mnm tun.' after the birth of Christ. This Kopp has recently shewn, in ■ satisfactory manner, in bis Bildir and SchrifUn dcr Var-.eii, II. pp. 09 teq., particularly pp. I ■ § 2. The usual arrangement of (he letters is fully settled by the Same alphabetic compositions, in the Hebrew Scriptures. Most of the arrangement seems to have been originally accidental ; yet not all. For example, the Liquid*, r , 73 , : , are ranged together. Za-yln {") shield, and Hheth (it) probably travelling-scrip, are associated. So Jrfddh ("*) Aand, and Kaph (a) hollow-hand; Mem (a) water, and Nun {l)fisk; also, i'a-yin (i') eye, Pe (z) mouth, t^Oph (p) ear, Resh (~\) head, and Shin (\c) tooth. In Lam. i — iv., v stands ranged after E; which shews that the arrangement was not uniform in all cases, at the time when this book was written. § 3. The age of the names of the letters, seems to mount higher than that of the Hebrew, or of any of the present Shemitish langua- ges. Some of the forms of these names are like the Aramaean, e. g. rP3 , ^"'7 _, DX>; two seem to be of appropriate Hebrew stamp, viz. V. I > V.k J b,lt R*& > $W\ j n\\ , v:r , yob , with it . and )*& (in stead of "p - ! 1 ), are manifestly exotics, derived from a kindred language which is now no more, but which, (as the more simple forms of the words shew), was probably older than the time of Moses. § 4. The significance if the names is, in most cases, (not all), suf- ficiently plain. The names are borrowed from natural objects ; but the resemblance of the letters to them, is not to be traced in many of the present 1 Hebrew letters, which differ much from the form of the corresponding ancient ones. The alphabet, No. I. col. 7, shews the most probable original significations. See an admirable exhibition of the very ancient forms of Shemitish letters, in Kopp's Bildcr und Schriften der forfeit, II. 157. § 5. The pronunciation of the names of the letters is given in No. I. col. U, as exactly a- the English alphabet will permit. The vowels in col. 5 of the same, are sounded as directed in the table of the vow- els, No. iv. REMARKS ON THE ALPHABET. 13 § 6. The later Hebrew alphabet, as it now appears in all our point- ed Hebrew books, consists of twenty nine letters, as given in No. II. Six of these, (as the alphabet shews), have two sounds each, but re- tain only the ancient single name ; one, ("^ Sin, pronounced Seen), is furnished with a point over its left tooth, {Skin has one over the right tooth, 'ij), and also with a different name, in order to distinguish it. The modern Arabians have twenty eight letters, six of which are distinguished merely by a diacritical point ; as is the case in the later Hebrew alphabet. Comp. the Arabic alphabet, in No. III. § 7. The final forms of five of the letters, appear in the short left hand column of them, in the alphabet No. II. They are doubtless sub- sequent to the original forms ; but when they were introduced is not known. When manuscripts were written continuously, (as they orig- inally were), i. e. without separating the words, these final letters aided very much in making the proper divisions. Why more of them were not invented for this purpose, it is difficult to say. The practice of employing the final forms at the end of words, is universal, so far as they go. Conceit or mistake has excepted only some two or three cases ; e. g. :?; (for ]ft) Job 38: 1. "2-)0b (for nsnab). Is. 9: G. Neh. 2: 13. § 8. The sounds nf the letters are given, according to the usage of the most enlightened Hebrew scholars of the present time. There i9 a difference of opinion among the learned, about some of the niceties of sound, in regard to several of them. But in respect to a language which has been dead for 2000 years, such questions can never be de- termined with satisfactory certainty. I add a few remarks on parti- cular letters, which are of the more difficult class. Aleph (a), all agree, was of a very light sound. It easily coales- ced with, or conformed to, other proximate sounds. I have chosen the Spiritus lenis of the Greeks to represent it. Practically, we do not sound it at all; at least, not perceptibly. In theory, it is a real conso- sonant ; and the Hebrews doubtless sounded it, so as to make it per- ceptible, in most cases. Beth (l), bh=v. So the modern Greeks found their ?. Gimel (}), gh, is given by g, in the alphabets. But the real sound is quite uncertain. The Arabians sound the same letter (3.) like our j ; just as in English, we sound g soft before c and i. I follow the general Visage, and sound it g haul. Daleth (l), dh—th in that ; a sound which much perplexes Euro- peans of the continent; but which is altogether easy and familiar to the English, and to the modern Greeks, who so sound their d\ I I HI. MARKS ON Tin: AT, I'M \KI I II.- (— ) i- ;i feeble h. V&v (■;) is a feeble o. The Arab soomk it like our w ; which i-; more probably like the Hebrew usage. I con- form to general European n-age. Hheth (h), /a ; and Irb^ , by —u.t.u. Bat thej translate z~ , by Ka/i; and 7~p , by ' lhc/t]\. The Arabians have two gradations of sound for this letter. Tet (u), is a hard, guttural kind of f, for which we have no due re- presentative, in English. The corresponding Greek letter, is >>. Kaph (r>), kh, a difficult sound. The Greeks have it in their /. The usual practice sounds it like l A, i. e. make^ a kind of guttural of it. Kh can be distinctly sounded by special effort ; but what is gain- ed by this, is not worth the trouble necessary to gain it. Common usage sounds ~2 , as be-haw. 1 would conform to this, as it is so much easier than to sound kh fully. Samekh (c), is sounded as the Greek a, of which it is the undoubt- ed prototype. It does not differ perceptibly from the letter to, Sim ; and the Hebrews have, in their orthography, written many words indifferently with either the one or the other, as C"^2 and "in:, to divide, etc. The sound of Ayin (y), is represented by ("), the double Spiritus asper of the Greeks, for want of a better representative. Grammarians have represented it by g, gh,hgh, sounded gutturally ; also by hh, hhh, and by the nasal gn, ng, ngn. The Arabians have two sounds for it ; the deeper one is scarcely attainable by any European. The ancient Hebrews appear to have had two also; e.g. the Sept. render rob? Jouooou, TitS Fu'^u ; but "'by '///./. p^O? ' .-/pidi,*. That it some- times had comparatively a feeble sound, is evident from its admitting of coalescence or contraction, as ;2 for ?yz : also from its commuta- tion with N; see in Hebrew Lexicon. Europeans generally neglect to sound it. Jerome calls it a vowel ; see above, in . 7tu*/./,'x, the ground of this. The vowel accompanying it, should have a strong impetus or effect of the voice in pronouncing it Tsadhe (^), ts hard. Qoph (p), a deep guttural A', pronounced with impetus. Resh (~i), the rolling r of the French, or the Greek (). Tav (n), t soft. § 9. Dilated letters are a mere expedient to make out the adjust- ment of a line ; for the Hebrews do not separate words at the end of lines. The usual ones are t< , n , ^ , a . n , i. e. N , rr , r, & , n . REMARKS ON THE ALPHABET. 15 [§ 10. Unusual letters are, (1.) Literae majusculae ; as IniDl j Ps. 80:16. (2.) Minusculae ; as CNIZrj- > Gen. 2: 4. (3.) Suspcnsae ; as *>_*», Ps. 80: 14. (4.) Invcrsae ; as^bcz, Numb. 10: 35. The Rabbins find mysteries in these ; the considerate critic will only find mistakes in copying.] § 1 1. Similar letters. These are numerous, in the Hebrew alpha- bet. The student should carefully note them, at the outset. They are as follows ; 1. Beth n S Kaph 8. Zayin T 1 Nun 2. Giniel 5 3 Nun 9. Iiheth n n He 3. Daletli — * "J Kaph 10. Hhcth n n Tav 4. Daleth _ 1 Resh 11. Mem 12 "J Tet 5. Vav i i Yodh 12, Mem D D Samekh (i. Vav i "J Nun 13. Tsadhe ySJ Ay in 7. Zayin T 1 Vav Explanations. (l.) 3) is distinguished from r>, by the right angle which its perpen- dicular side make* with the strokes at the top and bottom of the let- ter ; 3) is round at its corners instead of being angular. In some print- ed copies, 35 is distinguished from 2 only by the roundness of its cor- ner at the bottom. (2.) 1 is distinguished from 3, by having the stroke at the bottom united to the perpendicular only by a small point ; in 3, the bottom stroke is united without any variation of its magnitude. (.3.) *] final descends below the line; T does not. (4.) T is distinguished from ~\, by having a right angle at the top, at which part T is round or obtuse. (5.) 1 descends to the bottom of the line ; ■< does not. (6.) ] final falls below the line; 1 does not. (7.) The top of T is continued a little to the right of the perpendicular, while that of 1 is not ; the upright line of 7 is small at the top, where it in- clines to the right, while it is gibbous below ; which is not the case with 1 . (8.) T descends only to the line ; ] final falls below it. (9.) ii has no space between its left side and the top ; ti exhibits a small chasm. (10.) n has a small dotted circle at the bottom of the perpen- dicular stroke on the left hand ; h has not this mark, (ll.) 13 is open at the top; 72 at the bottom. (12.) is almost round; D final is a square or parallelogram. (13.) X is angular on the right side of it, and the bottom is parallel with the line; 2-' turns to the left only. Fi- nal y, in its falling stroke, either turns a little to the right, or de- scends perpendicularly. I<» CLAMINOATIOJI OP THE LETTERS (a) Gutturals n rt (6) Labials a i (c) Dentals t ((/) Linguals 1 U (e) Palatals 5 * N. li. Tin- lumei will Bnd il altogether the aaaiest method of making himiwir familiar « iih tin- dlitlnction between the Hebrew letters, ud with the respective sounds of the lettere, [at al»o of the rowels I to practi e writing them down, calling each aloud by its bum, and uttering ''"> round hi ii u often ai be writes h Lei I bin ptaot iee be pi i ieted in, until all the rowels and con- ■pnanti can be recognised with facility and pronounced readily; their distinctions definitely de- tcrlbed and drawn with the penal pleasure and their muni-- familiarly recalled. In tlni way the stndenl learns tu iwiti Hebrew letters and rowels, (which he should by all means, do); anil hi; fixes the names, forms, and sounds of all the written signs indelibly npon bis memory. [§ 12. Classification of the letters. This has been usually made, agreeably to the organs principally employed in pronouncing them, as follows ; viz. h 2> technically called s~~N a b Bjjwa 2 1 t (to) ^T^PI b 3 n n 3*P:2 3 P PV* Of these, the most important classes are the Gutturals and the La- bials. But ft is oftentimes not a Guttural ; and ^ is not unfrequently treated like one.] § 13. A much more important division than this, for practical pur- poses, is one which selects only those letters that are the subjects of some peculiarity. This is as follows ; viz. (a) Aspirates ; viz. 1, 3 , 1 , D, £} , n, technically called Bsg&dh-kieph&th, P£D 133. They are named Aspirates, because, when there is no point (Da- ghesh) in them, they are aspirated, i. e. associated with an ft-sound ; see alphabet No. II. When t hoy are destitute of this point or Paghesh, these letters are called, by the older gram- marians, mollcs, and raphatae ; with it, durac and dagessatae. (6) Quiescents ; viz. itf , T\ , 1 , \ technically named N e he- vl, ^irW. The reason of this is, that the sound of these letters being in itself somewhat feeble, it often coalesces with the vowel sound which precedes ; so that these letters are said to quiesce, i. e. to lose their separate, con- sonant sound, by falling into the preceding vowel. 0) Gutturals ; viz. K, il, ft, J>, or a-h a hha? , JTfrta, as stated above. Resh is sometimes to be added ; and Aleph sometimes excepted, as stated in § 12. (d) Liquids ; viz. ? , fi , 3 , "} , of which 1 is to be re- garded only as a kind of half-liquid. Technically, these may be called, limnar, "IjE 1 ? . The student should impress theso classes, particularly the three Jirst, deeply on his memory. §§ 14 17. VOWELS. 1? VOWELS. § 14. Originally, the Hebrew alphabet consisted only of conso- nants. Some learned men have maintained the contrary, and averred that fit , 1 , \ were originally designed to be vowels. But the fact, that these letters constitute essential parts of the triliteral roots in Hebrew, and that they are susceptible of forming syllables by union with every sort of vowel sound, proves, beyond all reasonable doubt, that they are essentially consonants. § 15. But as the sound of fit , "J, "^ was feeble, and often, in prac- tice, was made coalescent with the vowel which preceded them, it was natural, that in process of time they should come to be considered, in many cases, as representatives of the vowels with which they were customarily made to coalesce. Hence, in later Hebrew writings, we find fit , 1 , i , not (infrequently used in the room of vowels ; more rarely in the early writings. But the still later Chaldeo-Rabbinic He- brew employs these three letters very often, merely for the purposes of designating vowels. For these reasons, these three letters are called, by recent grammarians, vowel-letters, when they are spoken cf in re- ference to the usage now in question. The older grammarians called them, with like reference, Matres lec.tionis, i. e. authors or guides of [right] reading. In reference to another ground of classification, these same letters, (together with n), are called Ehcvi C'lnfit) or Quiescents, § 13. b. [The most ancient Hebrew MSS. consisted of only t lie lettors in the alphabet No. I., but iii a very different shape from the present one; see$ I. Note. When the diacritical signs, which dis- tinguish Hi.: later alphabet and increase the number of letters, together with all the vowel-points and accents, were first introduced, no historical documents satisfactorily shew. But it is now generally agreed, that the introduction was a gradual one ; and that, however early some few par- ticular things in the general system may have been commenced yet the whole system ofdiacritioa] si^'ns, vowel-points, and accents, was not completed, so as to exist in its present form, until several centuries after the birth of Christ ; pretty certainly not until after the fifth century. In regard to reading MSS). destitute of all this system of helps, there is no m rious difficulty ; at least none to any one who well understands the language. The <.tun- thing is habitually done, at the present, day, by the A ra hi a us, the Persians, and the Syrians, i'i their respective tongues ; and in I lei new, by the Jewish Rabbies, and all the learned in the Shemitish languages.] § 16. From what has just been said, the student will see why, in the Table No. IV. fit,!, and "> , are represented as vowel-lettere cor- responding to their respective classes of vowels. It is because these letters were occasionally employed, (fit more rarely), to designate more or less of the vowel-sounds, which are there associated with them. § 17. In the same Table, in column 2d, the letters x : rj vj , are used merely to exhibit to the learner the manner in which the ;$ 16 §§ 18 34. VOWMUi Ql H.ITV AND QI1AM I I I . Hebrew rowels are written, in respect to the alphabetic letter! with which t hoy are associated, i e. whether abo\ <\ below, or in them. § 18. The student nmsi riivesl himself, at the outset, of the habit of giving Engliih sounds, to the English representatives of the Hebrew vowels, and be very careful always to BOOnd these representatives as directed in the table. § 19. The ground of classification in the Table No. IV. is, that the vowels in these respective classes not only have a natural relation to each other, in respect to sound, but for the most part are often com- muted fur each other. Selibmi does commutation take place, without the limits of the respective classes. ____ Quality and Quantity of the Vowels. [§ 20. The division in respect to quantity, among 1 the older eram- marians, was as follows; viz. Long, Qamets, Tseri, Hhireq magnum, Hholem, Shureq ; Short, Pattahh, Seghol, Hhireq parvum, Qamets Hhateph, and QJbbuts. But all of these so called short vowels, are in fact often long, with the exception of Qamets Hhateph. Hence the student is greatly perplexed and misled, by such a division. A much better one is that proposed by the ancient Jewish grammarians, and lately adopted by the leading Hebrew grammarians in Germany; the basis of which is exhibited in Table IV. In like manner, the Arabic has only three classes of vowels. Ewald, in his recent Hebrew grammar (1827), lias attempted to reduce the vowels to tico clash- es, with much ingenuity, but not satisfactorily.] § 21. The vowels may be distributed into different classes, both in respect to quality and quantity. § 22. In regard to quality, they may be considered as pure or impure. The quality of vowels, in regard to the kind of sound which they represent, and the relations of those sounds to each other, is represented in the Talde No. IV. The ijuality of purity or impurity, remains to be considered here. § 23. A pure vowel is one, with which no con»onant sound coalesces. § 24. An impure vowel is one, with which a consonant sound coalesces E. g. in ~il~ dCt-bhar, both vowels are pure ; the first (t), because no consonant follows; the second ("O ), because, although a consonant follows, it preserve* its distinct sound, and does not coalesce with the vowel. On the contrary, in N2 ha, the N has no distinct sound, be- cause it coalesces with the Qamets ; and in sfTfi, (so written instead §§25 — 31. vowels: quality and quantity. 19 of *^3, § 111. § 112), the Qamets contains a coalescent Resh, which is suppressed in the writing 1 , by omitting- a Daghesh in the 1 ; in both which cases, Qamets is impure. And thus of all the other vowels, which admit a consonant to coalesce with them. § 25. In regard to quantity, vowels, considered merely in reference to their appearance, might be divided mXolong and short, but in reference to their actual quantity, (which is altogether the more important consideration), the gene- ral division of them is into long, short, and medial. This latter classification, (to which our principal regard will be had), cannot be made by inspec- tion, or according to the appearance merely of the vowels ; for, as will be seen in the sequel, the ap- pearance of some of them is often doubtful, or determines nothing in regard to quantity. § 26. The long vowels, (long in respect to real quanti- ty), may be divided into those long by nature, i. e. always long; and those long by position, i.e. long only when made so by being placed in a particular position. These may be named, (in regard to their appearance only), doubtful. § 27. Long by nature, i.e. always long, are Qamets, Tseri, long Hhireq, Hholem, Shurcq. § 28. Doubtful, i. e. long only in certain positions, (more commonly short elsewhere), are Pattahh, Seghol, and Qib- buts. In this respect, these vowels correspond with the doubtful Greek vowels, a, i, v. § 29. The vowels long by nature, are, by their rcspec^ tive qualities, divided into three classes, viz. (l.)Pure. (2.) Protracted impure. (3.) Daghesh'd impure. § 30. The pure long vowels are Qamets, Tseri, and Hholem. These are pure only when they have no consonant coalescing with them, i. e. do not contain either a Quiescent or a Daghesh'd letter, § 58. § 23 ; e. g. "D" dd-bhdr, ^ shen, tt3» skc-nd, ©"jj? qd-dhesh, rt2j3* y\q-tol. Long Hhireq and Shureq are always irnjnire. §31. The protracted impure vowels comprise all the vowels long by nature, whenever they are followed by a quiescent letter, expressed or Implied, which coalesces with them, § 53. 20 ■'>-• rowEu: oualiti lnd Qvjumrv, E g garnets, ai tartts fed ,• T«eri,ai in pa fefti, tv : :'■/» ,• Hhireq Ion?. :is in "Y»J mr ; llholiiii. ;.>• in ; : /... ;-~ qdt ; and Shureq, Sll in C ? '|~ <• denominated a protracted vowel^ > 56. Note 1. Appearance merely will nol determine whether a rowel h protracted^ or simply long; inasmuch as the quiescent letter, which protracts it, is often omitted in the writing ; e. ( z- t3P qam (impure) stands for ^n : '~5 jAl-le- ghesh and ■>2.'?.~*3 pi-le-gesli, STa^iS m5-rig-gim and O^-pH mo-ri- ghiin ; see § 64, respecting Yodh fulcrum. § 32. The Daghcsli'd impure long vowels are those that are made from short ones, and contain a coalescing consonant, which, in case it did not coalesce, would be ex- pressed by a Daghesb i'oi-te. E. g. *p2 bd-rlkh, SO written instead of V^2 hdr-rlkh : r~: m-lidl instead of r~: nlh-hdl ; — ~: iu-hhdn, instead of Z3n: mhh-hhdm , ~"]S bo-rdkh. instead of ^2 bur-rdkh. No instance of Shureq occurs. Comp. § 58. §111. § 112. Note. This class of vowels plainly differs from the protruded ones, §§ 33 — 35. vowels : quality and quantity. 21 § 31 ; inasmuch as they are not formed by the coalescence of a con- sonant with a long vowel ; hut are formed from short vowels, and made long by the coalescence of the Daghesh'd consonant, which is omitted. They seem, therefore, to be shorter than the protracted vowels; but they are evidently impure, according to § 21. The im- portance of distinguishing them, will be seen in the sequel. § 33. The vowels long by position (§ 28), retain the same form as when short ; and therefore, in respect to appearance, may he rightly named doubtful vowels. It is only from u knowledge of etymology, ami ofthe analogy of forms, that the student oan !.'■ eiiaMcil, ffor the most part), to determine when these vowels are loot;. Of these three vowels, Pattahh and Qibbuts (not vicarious), are made long only by the coalescence of an implied DagheshM letter; as V"3 bd-lul, for rrrs bdh-lul; j""n ru-hhats, for 'fP"^ ruhh-hhetts. For cases like ntt"?pb , rrnN; , where Pattahh and QJbbnts apparently have a quiescent N , see § lift with the notes, and also the Lexicon. Seghol may be made long, either by a Quiescent, as *a , N22 , TfO , ge, tse, me. ; or by the coalescence of a Daghesh'd letter, as JZl^^nri hc-hri-rim, n~D pe-hhd, TrlJJ Hc-khav, where the Gutturals n , H ex- clude the Daghesh forte which belongs to them. See § 58. § 111. § 112. § 54. § 34. The proper short vowels are Pattahh, Seghol, short Hhireq, Qamets Ilhateph, and Qihhuts (not vicari- ous), when they are pure, and stand in a mixed syllable.* E. g. b"5 ddl, 12 ben, !l3j?7a miq-ne, JVJDi-; hhokh-ma, "lt3J5?p miiq-tar. Note. Two of these cases may be rendered dubious by appearan- ces ; c. g. ""13 appears short, hut is in fact i. q. T'3 . So in tCDB , QJb- bnts appears short, but is i. q. tlttp , Qibbuts being vicarious. Hero, as in the dubious cases above, a knowledge of etymology and of anal- ogy is necessary, in order to judge. § 35. Pattahh, Seghol, Hhireq, and Qamets Ilhateph are medial, as to quantity, when they arc pure, and stand in a simple syllable.'!" Medial 1 choose to call the quantity of these vowels, insaebcasee and the Masorites have sanctioned the thing, if not the name. These vowels, under such circumstances, are not long ; for a pause accent prolongs them (§144), e.g. n"3 ba-ydh, rPX ba-yUh; *}'~'2 me-likh, * A mixed ayllable is one which '-nr coalesce. t Thru vowel sound is cm I led homogeneous, which is adapted to coalesce with the Quiescent* respectively ; that is called hfttr0g§tUOU8, which is not adapted to COOlfi 4 M I —."))). COALBICENCB OF YOWELf AMD QUIBBCKirri l. The following table exhibit! the coalescence of the respec- tive Qaiescents, with their homogeneous vowels. Aleph (N) quiesces in Q,;uiiots - Tscn Yodh 0) Vav 0) He (H) - Seghol 1 '•••) - Ilholem ( -) - Tscri ( ••) - Seghol ' :•••) - Hhireq :-) - Hholem H - Shureq 1 :i) - Qamets ( :*) - Tseri 1 :••) - Seghol ( :•••) - Hholem I :-) ) NI ba. ) B&TI resh. ') n]X2«n tlm-tse-n:i. "l-N"' vo-mer. ■pa ben. n^a ge. ]^ dm. ^ip qol. u^p qum. Thy ga-la. n^ gele. Lt - 1 A 1 1^3 go-Ie. n?3 ga-lo. Tn Knglish, wc havo a multitude of cases similar to these ; e. g. loic,show, etc. with ?r quiescent : say, day, etc. with ;/ quiescent. Almost every letter in our alphabet is, in some situations, quies- cent before or after some other letter. Note 1. There are some other cases, besides those presented in the Table, of which Quiescence has been affirmed by most grammari- ans ; e. g. ]Vi"J<-i ri-shon, DNnpr tiq-rath, TT^NS pu-ra, § 63. But N is otiant here, not quiescent; see § 118, with the Notes. Note 2. Although the Hholem is written over the T , as in i ; and the Shureq is written in it, as 1 ; yet, in both cases, the vowels usual- ly belong to the preceding consonant; e. g. in fclp, to the p; in C 7 p, to the p. Cases like "py 2d-von occur ; but they are easily distin- guished, because the letter preceding the *? has then a vowel of its own, independently of that connected with the 1. § 55. The sound of the Quiescents, in case of coalcs- mur, is not lost, but united with the preceding vowel ; so that it makes Ions; vowels more protracted, and short ones it renders long, §31. § 56. The Ektti (a~^) retain their proper consonant power, i. e. do not quiesce, (l) Always at the beginning of a syllable: as 1CN Ha- §§ 57, 58. OTIUM OF THE EHEVI, ETC. 2? mar, Dn hem, "ir'' yd-lddh, 1^1 ve-ledh. (2) Always whea they end a syllable, in case they have a simple Sheva under them, either express- ed or implied ; e. g. "CN* ycH-sur, *)?": neh-pdkh, 'W233 shd-ldv-tl, s ft hhdy, IP qdv. In the last cases, the Sheva is implied, i. e. ^~ =*" , and ")£ = ■))": , see § 52.. (3) Usually, when preceded by a heteroge- neous vowel ; e. g. in r iiii: \uwi.i.-. I". ;,'. yiw^n ta-M&rtff, instead ofyn-Jjn hdX-Ha-rttr; n 1 :^* .y<-x»- tner, instead of "IP'S*"! yi*-Mflr*»8r ,* rrtz ixi-inl, with Pattahh laag tod impure (^ 33), instead of rrr^ bdh-hel ; 't~z bi-hel with Hhireq laag and impure (§32), instead ofVns lnh-lnl ; Z~~x Hdrhhua with I'attahh long ami impure (§ 33), instead <>f c n ~.\ t&dhJi-hhvn ; z~: n&JUtatnwith Ilhircij Ipog and impure (§32), instead of £n: mhh-hhdm ; ~c;z &d-Mi (§32), instead of "\-i"2 bd'j-'jcr ; 07 :. nn-inn, instead of 0*8 mW-'Jlin ; *\~}Z b<-rtkh, instead of "pa bir-rikh, "|"V2 ba-r./,/,. etc. Comp. § 111. § 112. Note. In regard to this usage, it is plain, that an excluded Da- ghesh'd letter lengthens the quantity of the preceding vowel; for in some cases this is expressed hy using a vowel long by nature, instead of a short one, as *p3 for !Tn§ . When in other cases, theybrm of the short vowel remains, the quantity of it is changed, § 33. § 59. Some other letters occasionally omit Daghesh, with a similar eifect, for the most part, on the preceding vowel. E. g. "TT^i va-yfhi, instead of Tr* vay-yeM. But it is doubtful how such cases as "rip - ; (for THj:*) were read; i. e. whether they were pronounced yi-qehku or ylq-hhu. The probability is, that there was a variety of pronunciation ; for some of them are marked with a Me- theg (§ 85), as VPi (for Tri ); some with composite Sheva, as rthpb h)-q hha (for nrjjsb) ; both of which shew that the first syllable is to be read as a simple one, vd-y?hi, lu-q hha ; and so of others like them. But some words have neither of these marks, e. g. ^Hj^ (for 1 t\*P ) ; and in such cases, they are probably to be read, as ^Hp - ; ylq-hhv, etc. The omission of Daghesh, in all such instances, seems to have respect only to the niceties of pronunciation in regard to a few words, which the Punctators strove to express. It does not belong to the essential form of words. Orthography nf the Vowels. § 60. By inspecting the Table No. IV., it will be seen, that the two first classes of vowels arc all written under the consonants; of the third class, Qibhuts also is written under them; but Hholem is written over, and Shureq in them. Qamets, however, is written in the bosom of ixjinal Kaph; e. g. ~ kha. § 61. The proper place of a vowel is under the middle, or (as they are now printed) on the right side, of a consonant. Shureq is always written after the consonant to which it belongs, i.e. in the bosom of the following 1, Hholem is commonly written over the right top of the letter next following that to which it belongs, as £o t<~d. "rip qol ; §§ 62 — 64. ORTHOGRAPHY OF THE VOWELS. 29 but sometimes necessity prevents this, e.g. in UHp, where the type will not admit such a disposition of the Hholem. Hholem following K, is commonly written over its left side, as b~.i<; unless followed by 1, as br>>\\ § 62. The diacritical point over i3 and 13, often coincides with Hholem; in which case it serves the double purpose, of marking the vowel and of distinguishing the letter, (l) to, beginning a syllable, if followed by a consonant having a vowel of its own, reads, su ; e.g. tttiB so-ne. (2) T, following a consonant that has no vowel, contains a Hholem for that consonant, and also marks sh ; e.g. TIUjlS mu-skc. On the other hand, (3) © (with two points) beginning a syllable, is read sho; e.g. ~l£ I) sho-mir. (4) tfj (with two points) ending a syllable, is read, 6s ; e. g. ttis'V yir-pds. § 62. Vav 0), with a Hholem over it and a vowel under it, is join- ed, as a moveable consonant, with the vowel under it; e.g. rnb lo-ve, JTIST 1 ythu-va, the Hholem belonging to the preceding letter. § 63. Vowels in connexion with ilie Quiescents, exhibit various modes of orthography winch require explanation. As the Ehcvi or Quiescents drop their distinct consonant sound, in case of coalescence (§53), and the words with vowel-points are sounded in the same manner, whether the Quiescents are omitted or inserted ; so, in practice, they arc often omitted. Words in which the Quiescents are inserted, are said to be written fully ; those in which they are omitted, to be written defectively. In both cases, the pronunciation and quantity of the vowels remain the same ; as the following examples will shew. Written fully. Written defectively. Read. \-k\b73 T^E md-le-thi. T3 "O nlr. inp Vp qol. Cnaj^ C73J5 qd-mus. § 64. There are some cases, in which Vav and Yodh (particularly the former) are inserted, when they are not proper Quiescents, and have no influence on the sound or nature of the vowel. In all these cases, they are mere orthographic Fulcra. E. g. Tinb^ , the same as "PJr"] y'd-modh ; S'ob, the same as 230 so-bhibh ; "^n, the same as ■»Brl hhuq-qe ; comp. § 31. Notes 2. 3. In all probability, such forms have sprung from the practice of employing Vav and Yodh as vowel- letters, § 15. How to distinguish such cases, from those where 1 and ' :{0 § ♦>">, <». In order to pronounce these, lay the stress of the voice on the proper vowel, and just touch the Pattahh ; somewhat as in the English words, (rial, vial, etc. The furtive Pattahh is sounded before the final consonant. As it is merely a euphonic help, and belongs not to the essential form of the word ; so it falls away, as soon as the syllable in which it stands changes its po- sition ; c. g. rp-i ru"hh, plur. nini ru-hhbth. Note. Aleph never takes Pattahh furtive, 3'2 §§ 70 — 7M. B10HS8I HRTB. DAGHESH. § 70. Daghesh is a point in the bosom of a letter, Mid serves two purposes; (I) To double a letter; (2) To remove its aspiration. § 71. When Daghesh serves to double the letter in Which it is written, it is called Daghesh forte. W lien it only removes the aspiration, it is culled Daghesh lene. Note. There is a third kind of Daghesh, whirl) doubles a letter, bnt is designed merely to regulate some peculiar mode of pronouncing certain words, and belongs not to the general analogy of the language. It is called Daghesh euphonic. I. Daghesh forte. § 72. Distinction of Daghesh forte and Daghesh lene. The former is never written in the final letter of a word, unless followed by a vow- el ; nor in the first letter, (but Daghesh euphonic usually appears here) ; and it is always immediately preceded by a vowel-sound. This last circumstance separates it entirely from Daghesh lene ; which is preceded immediately by a silent Sheva, or by a vowel in the preceding word, with a disjunctive accent on that word ; see § 92 seq. § 73. Orthography of Daghesh forte. When the same letter is to be repeated, and the first one takes a silent Sheva, it is the usual practice to designate it by the point Daghesh forte ; e.g. r^p =b!JDP qit-l; 3 = M, 3 = A-, etc. See alphabet No. II Note I. Dagheshybrte also appears in the Aspirates, ;t~ often u in other letters But it i- « ;»-il > distioguished from Daghesh /ene ; for Daglx-li./'"N i> ;il w ;i v< preceded by a vowel belonging to the letter immediately before it; while such preceding letter has a silent She- va under it, in case the Daghesh is lene ; or if such preceding letter have a proper vowel, this vowel has a disjunctive accent upon it, § 92. Note 2. Daghesh forte in an Aspirate, not only doubles it, but also (by usage in pronunciation) removes the aspiration ; e.g. "'CN adp-pi, not Hdph-pi, although when written out in full, it would seem to be the latter, as ""BBS . § 79. General rules for the insertion of Daghesh lent. (l) In all Aspirates standing at the commencement of a chapter or verse. E.g. Gen. 1.1, rPtiStf^S , the Beth takes Daghesh lene ; so at the beginning of a verse, Gen. 3: 5, "'S fa, (not "'a khi), etc. (2) In other cases, after a silent Sheva, either express or implied. E. g. in rH^E, Tav has a Daghesh lene, after a silent Sheva ex- pressed ; in " l 3B !?5 , Pe has one after a Sheva implied under the r , § 52. (.3) After a disjunctive accent, even when a pure vowel, or one with a quiescent letter, precedes, an Aspi- rate takes a Daghesh lene. E.g. Ps. 1:3, y$3 ri^rrn , where the Kaph must be aspirated, were it not that the disjunctive accent, Rebhi"?, is on the preceding syllable rT . And so of all the other Disjunctives. See the accents, § 92 seq. § 80. On the contrary, the Aspirates reject Daghesh lene, when thev stand next after a vocal Sheva. or after a simple syllable, whether this be in the same word, or at the end of a preceding one which has no disjunctive ac- cent upon it. E.g. Gen. 1: 2, ^fin rtrj*rn . where the Tav in rTf^-'! follows a vocal Sheva (* y?) ; and in "Tin tho-hm (not lo-hu), the n follows a vowel with a quiescent letter, but that vowel is associated with a con- junctive accent ( s Merka), and therefore n remains aspirated. So after a composite Sheva; e.g. "isr Vbhudh (not 9*bodh\ because such Sheva is always vocal, § 46. a. Note. In cases where a mere Pattahh furtive precedes an Aspirate, §§ 81. 82. DAGHESH LENE. 3£> it takes Daghesh lene ; e. g. firjo? la-qu"hlit, so written instead of nt\p_\ , § 233. Note. §81. Exceptions. Etymology and special usage have made many exceptions to these general rules. [(l) An Aspirate, in the middle of a word, and derived by inflection from a word which excluded Daghesh lene, does not admit such a Daghesh. E. g. TE-n ridh-phu (not ISTn) because the ground-form is Spi , where the Fe, being immediately preceded by a Hholem, cannot take a Daghesh lene, § 80. So "ob'3 mal-khe, ground form C*2b?2 , in which 3 is preceded by a vowel; T 31^ ya-dz-bhii, ground form 3TJ£ , where 2, having a vowel before it, cannot receive Daghesh lene ; In- finitive mode *U2 btghddh, and with suffix i"^ bigh-dho, because, in the ground-form, 1 has a vowel before it. (2) Loose prefixes, (which in fact are separate words), do not change the state of aspiration in regard to the sec- ond letter of a word. E. g. 2n3 , with the preposition 2 prefixed, 2n33 Mkh-thabh (not 2n23) ; "P23, with 3, T233 kikh-pldr (not -PE33) ; rlSa , with *5, r-in.-ii llgh-bhul (not rns^b ), etc. Note 1. The Infinitive mode, with such a loose prefix, varies in its usage. E. g. from 120 , Infin. ISO , with prefix r , "l*B&*? Hs-podh ; and such is the common usage. But we find also, b?: , Infin. b"B3 , with prefix 2 , Vs«2 bin-phol ; with 3 , 2*333 kln-phdl ; but with ^ , Vcrr /in- Note 2. But when the prefix is closely united to, i. e. constitutes an essential part of, the word itself, then the general rule (§ 79. 2) is followed ; e. g. 1B0"] yu-podh (not isp")i Fut. of Kal, from the root 123 sd-phddh ; or, if you please, from the Infinitive form, 1ED sf- phbdh. So in Hiphil, l^Ston his-pil (not r^E/an), from 2ETIJ . In all such cases, the prefix is an essential formative part of the word. § 82. Particular exceptions to the general rules. I. licjci'l ll:i»lii'-ili lour-. (a) The suffix pronouns, Sr, 23, "|3 . (b) Generally, an Aspirate preceding the final syllable HI ; as m3*:^ , ITHS? , WIJ^ , etc. ; but not always, as rnann tar-buth. {c) The various forms of 152 ; e. g. T"n3, ^las, etc. If. Admit it contrary to the general ruing, (d) Some words beginning with two Aspirates, viz. 22, 23, 33 ; e. g. Jer. 3: 25, Wfjaha ttSawfa ; Ex. II : 17, liJiBS ^na3«l ; Is. 10: 9, IB^SS'lM «b; but in all such cases, manuscripts and edition-' 36 §§#{, H|. KAI'llL. MM'I'IU differ; some extending the rule, BO ;i- to begin with Daghesh lene, in most cases where a word commences with two Aspirates; others, scarcely observing 1 such a ride at all ; e. g. Michaelis 1 Hebrew Hible. (e) A few words which usage only has excepted from the general rule; e.g. "*fV9 from rr^, *%&") from [pDtfp . (/) An apparent exception is an Aspirate after rnrs* , which takes Daghesh lene. But the Hebrews read this word Tflfil ti"dd-ndy, which ends with a conso- nant y having a silent Sheva.] Rrmark. The detail of Daghosh lene, as to some few words and forms, is not regulated by any established usage ; the Masoni, the Rabbins, manuscripts, and editions, differing in respect to some particulars. But as nothing important in Grammar depends on the insertion or omission of Da- ghesh, in such cases, the student need not be perplexed, if ho occasionally meet with instances not conformed to the general principles. Mistakes in printing and transcribing have occasioned some of these anomalies ; and conceit has increased the number. RAPHE. § 83. Raphe (n£1 ) means soft. It is a small parallel stroke, of the same form as Pattahh, put over Aspirates, to show that they retain their aspiration; e. g. SlTUD kha- bhedha; and so it is directly the opposite of Daghesh lene. The printed editions of the Hebrew Scriptures have long ceased to use this sign, (which indeed is quite superfluous), with the excep- tion of a very few solitary cases; e. g. Judg. 16 : 16, 28. Num. 32: 42, in Van der Hooght. In ancient manuscripts, it was very common; and it was sometimes employed, moreover, to shew that Daghesh forte was omitted ; sometimes, that Mappiq did not belong to n ; and some- times, to note that iV and n, at the end of words, were quiescent. MAPPIQ. § 84. Mappiq ( fSE ) is a point in the bosom of a final H, (which is almost always quiescent), denoting that it is moveable. E- K- "* yah, (j"P would read yd) ; rins ga-bhah, (~na would read gd-bhd). Note. Mappiq is now used only in final n ; but in some Hebrew- manuscripts, it is found in the other Quiescents, denoting that they are moveable. §§ 85—87. AIETHEGII. 37 METHEGH. § 85. Methegh (SHE) is a small perpendicular mark (i ), preceding the tone-syllable more or less, according to the various purposes for which it is employed, and denoting a secondary or half-accent, analogous to that on the first syl- lable of our English words undertake, nomination, etc. The word Methegh, (fraenum, retinaculum), denotes, when technically employed, a holding; in or restraint of the voice, viz. in reading, decora simpcnsio vocis) ; which, of course, gives a kind of halftone or accent to the syllable. It does not, like the other accents, relate to the connexion of words with each other, but only to the manner of reading the syllable on which it is placed ; and is therefore of comparatively little importance to us. Note. The mark ( ), on the last or penult syllable of a verse, is always the accent Silluq (§ 93), not Methegh. [§ 86. Manuscripts and editions differ widely as to the frequency of using Methegh; the Spanish manuscripts exhibiting it very sparingly, the German ones very frequently. The Codex Cassel. scarcely has it at all. In regard to many cases, the Jewish grammarians themselves are not agreed about the use of it. Consequently there is much dis- crepancy, among our best Hebrew bibles, respecting it. § 87. The cases in which grammarians and critical ed- itors generally agree that Methegh ought to be employed, and in which, for the most part, it usually is employed, arc as follows, viz. (o) Uniformly employed, before all the composite Shevas, when they are preceded by a vowel, (and technically called in this case, -T^fitlQ mn-H"rikh) ; e.g. "TO**, (jbrTJ, lOSjn, tt$P.*, "l"r-N,etc. (6) Almost uni- formly the Methegh is retained, in such cases, after the composite Sheva has fallen away by inflection, etc. ; e. g. "fay, by inflection ITajf, pre- serving the Methegh, (or this case may be ranked with e below), (c) After a long vowel, next before the tone syllable, and followed by Sheva vocal; e.g. nrrtt, "n^n, "W-pn, rrnrin, ^Ira* with Qibbuts vicarious, (rf) The verbs rrn and FPfJ , when they take formative or other prefixes with a short vowel, employ Metheg after such vow- el; e.g. rrirr, rrVrib , n;yn imp. with i, Gen. 12:2, n^trj, etc.; nearly without exception, in good editions. In principle, tli is may be classed with h below, (e) Very generally, on the second syllable be- fore the tone, where it is a simple one ; as DlfiJH, jnav • if) But if this be a mixed syllable, then on the third before the tone, provided it be simple ; e. g. "VrtMl , JTjaVrjJJI . {g) After a short rowel made long by position (§ 33), before a letter which excludes a Daghesh ;{,S § 87. METHEGH. forte ; as OSJrin , B^ha , rtsya^ , *)~}?,'} 5 nibina , etc ; but this is sometimes neglected , as *]£ n ~ ; and commonly so, in regard to Hhircq, as I'iel D" , r~: , etc. without Methegh. The qualifying terms, ofaieet uniformly, eery generally, will of course adrertise the siudcnt, thai in' li nut toezpeel uniformity in the cam ranged andei them. On the other hand, there is great diversity of opinion and practice about the following cases, in which Methegh is sometimes employed ; viz. (/i) Occasionally, but not uniformly, after a short vowel in a mixed syllable, (not made by Daghesh forte), especially after Pattahh and short Hhireq, Methegh is placed, sometimes on the first, and some- times on the second syllable before the tone; e. g. on the first, as K-inp, rih-\'j> , !»5^rr , tafg-JTb , s 5ao Is. 10 : 34, H"|a Ps. 76 : 12, ^n37'] , 1 'b255q ! i; with other short vowels, rt7.ni {d above), nan" , J-n'J'C shomra, "iinp qdrbhan'ih.-\~ dbrbhan, *iHl39 Vmndhkha, etc.; on the second, as 'nriJPRSJn, Ijp-iBn'"!, t3^t"£n», etc. The cases with other vowels than Pattahh or short Hhireq, are rare, (i) On the first syllable of a polysyllabic word, when this syllable ends with a Da- ghesh'd letter ; e. g. !=p\-2, a (3rTti«i , a^njJH , -ntStt ,etc. ; espe- cially when the first letter is Vav conversive, Mem prefix, or rr article. {j) Very seldom, after a vocal Sheva under the first letter; as nNl , Ittto, -O" ; more rarely still, even before Sheva initial, as nsp , Est. 9: 7 — 9, ten times. In these cases it is called Methegh itiilial ; the older Jewish grammarians named it N*?a , mugitus ; a name afterwards extended to Methegh generally. In respect to the use of Methegh before a Maqqcph ; (/) The general principle is the same as if the two words joined by the Maqqeph were one, (they being read as one); so that the above rules generally apply; e.g. ■'a-^JWD, c; Vj-riN")" 1 , h; v,2S>-'>3 , e ; y- iNrj- 1 — !P3 , e, etc. But (m), in many cases, long mon- osyllables before Maqqeph take a Methegh, (often otherwise), although a tone syllable follows immediately; e. g. bNTTn . r"T- k \ ; "r~; and ev- en when it does not, and the monosyllable is a mixed one; as -z-l* D"1N , etc., contrary to e. Short vowels before Maqqeph commonly reject Methegh ; as rP^—ii* , etc. Such are the numerous and very indefinite, (not to say, contradictory), principles for the use of Methegh. No wonder, that no two editions or manuscripts agree in regard to it. Some of the very words employed here as examples, are differently marked in different editions. Note. 1. The conjunction n u, and, does not usually receive Me- thegh. Note. 2. Several Metheghs may appear on the same word, if ttV §§ 88, 89. MAQQKPH. 3& different rules for writing it should require them ; e. g. ErpN^N^ , for the Methegh on £ , see e ahove ; for that on 2§, see a. Note. 3. Instead of Metheg, the conjunctive accents, (especially Munahh, Qadma, and Merka, § 93), are frequently used, when a word has a distinctive accent upon it ; e.g. D" 1 "!;^?:':: 1 ] with Munahh under £, instead of D-Hanob 5 ! with Methegh ; and so in very many cases.] MAQQEPH. § 88. Maqqeph, (v)£ft , somewhat like our hyphen), connects two words together, and makes them as one, in respect to Jnterpunction and reading. E. g. L3?5bt8n~rrtt , is-npriN: . Usually, either the former or latter word, in cases of this nature, is short ; as in the examples pro- duced. § 89. The word before Maqqeph throws off its tonic accent ; and a long vowel in its final syllabic, is for the most part shortened, if pure. E.g. y"-;N!T"bi', where b§ has no accent, Gen. 1: 15. For the reason why the long vowels before Maqqeph (which removes the tone) are shortened, see § 36. § 120. a. But here, the punctators are not uniform, for we have "t^-Sb llbh-Davidh, (not Ti" - ^), and with- out Methegh too, in 1 Sam. 24: 6; but .alsotfA^-n:: lebh-Sish, 2 K. 12: 5 ; and thus in other cases. Note 1. Maqqeph sometimes appears between several words in succession, as Vr-"iCN"r2~nN . Mostly, it is employed only between words closely connected in sense, e. g. between prepositions and their nouns, words in regimen, etc. ; but its use is not confined to these, and is very arbitrary in many cases, about which manuscripts and editions, and also Jewish grammarians and critics, disagree. In some few ca- ses it stands after a polysyllabic word ; as Mi-^V.^ri" , Gen. 6 : 9. Note 2. Maqqeph might itself well be called a conjunctive accent, sui generis, as it in most cases plainly supplies the place of a usual Conjunctive. E.g. the famous Jewish critics, Ben Asher and Ben Naphthali, disagree, in a multitude of cases, whether a Maqqeph or a Conjunctive is to be put on certain words. It differs from other Con- junctives only in this, viz. that it usually causes the preceding long mu- table vowel to be shortened. In like manner, Pesiq, inserted between words, is reckoned a disjunctive accent. 40 § 00. hulks for EtBADIlta Mr.niu.w . RULES FOR READING HEBREW. § 90. The principal difficulty is, to know where to begin and end a syllable. The following rules may aid the beginner. 1. Every syllable must begin with a moveable letter. Note. Vav with Shureq ( r .) in the beginning of words is the only exception, and is sounded u =oo in English. In ~i£N $.o-mur, ~\t2V 3?d- mddh, etc. the N and 3> are moveable, although we do not sound them, because we know not what sound to give them. 2. No syllable can have more than two moveable letters before its vowel; and none admits more than one after its vowel, except a final syllable, which may have two. 3. Every vowel stands in a simple syllable, when followed by a letter which has a vowel belonging to it. 4. Every short vowel makes a mixed syllable, and is followed by a simple Sheva expressed or implied, or by a Daghesh forte; e. g. "T."^2 bar-zel, in which the first syllable has a Sheva expressed; the se- cond, a Sheva implied. So Tar hm-medh = 1t)»!? . 5. Every long vowel makes a mixed syllable, when followed by a simple Sheva expressed or implied, or by an implied Daghesh forte, provided such vowel be in a tone-syllable. E. g. Sp qam ; !"t3«Dp* y"iq-(dl-nd, where the Hholem is in a mixed tone-syllable ; fTB^ yarn- md=TVfc'C'* ; DN Heth, where Sheva is implied under the n. 6. A long vowel, not in a tone-syllable, makes a simple syllable, though followed by a Sheva; e. g. n'rUp T qd-ttld, CHa's bo-ghidhlm ; but not always before a Maqqeph, as Tn-z'r libh-Dd-zidh. 7. Every vowel followed by a real Quiescent makes a simple syl- lable, provided the letter next after the Quiescent have a vowel be- longing to it, or the quiescent stands at the end of a word. E. g. in rpvbio re-shlth, a~\ is a simple syllable, because the 'w which comes next after it has a vowel of its own ; in f02 bd-rd, fit"» is a final sim- pie syllable. 8. Every vowel followed by a real quiescent makes a mixed syl- lable, if the next succeeding moveable letter is destitute of a vowel. E. g. in nM'tt*} ri-shlth, rPC is a mixed syllable. But such syllables must always be tone-syllables ; excepting the very few cases where quiescent 1 is irregularly used in short syllables, § 31. Note 3. 9. Every medial vowel stands in a simple syllable, § 35. 10. Every composite Sheva, and every simple Sheva vocal, stands, of course, at the beginning of a syllable, § 46. <§> 90. READING OF THE HEBREW. 41 Heading of the Ifebrcw. (1) Gen. 1: 1. n T :;c02 bfre-shith, 3 with Daghesh lene, 79.*1 ; with a Sheva under it, 15. and with a Sheva vocal, 46. — Nl re, with a pro- tracted vowel, 31, and an Aleph quiescent, 54 (n). — ftMB shuh, with a Yodh quiescent in Hhireq, 51 ("') ; n without any Sheva expressed, having one implied, 52 ; also without a Daghesh lene, 80. — n v i." is a mixed syllable, 90. 8. (2) WIS 6d-rd, 3 with Daghesh lene, 79. 2. ; 3 in a simple syllable, 90. 3. — N~! rd, vowel protracted, 31, N quiescent, 54. (3) DTtVN n c lo-hiin, N with composite Sheva, 49, which is movea- ble, 4G. a. — b Id, simple syllable, 90. 3, the Hholem is attached to the Lamedh,and is not put over the n , 61, because the fashion of the types will not allow it, Gl. — CTJ him, with Yodh Quiescent, 54, and Hhireq protracted, 31, and in a mixed syllable, 90. 8. (4) nN , Heth, 90. 5. C^Jri hdsh-shd-ma-yxm ; '&~ hash, the sylla- ble taking in the sh which is made by the Daghesh forte in the ttj, 71 and 73, also 90. 4. 'ii slid, 90. 3. — "Q ma, with Pattahh pure and me- dial, 35, also with accent on it, 100. b, and in a simple syllable, 90. 9. — D* yim, with short Hhireq, 141 and 100. a, mixed short syllable, 90. 4. (5) nCO victh, Vav moveable, 5G. 1. nN as above in No. 4. (G) 7~!Nn hd-Hd-rets, n 90. 3; N 90. 3, and with N moveable, 56. 1. — y~\ rets, with short Seghol, 34, and in a mixed syllable, 90. 4. (7) Verse 2. y~>Nrp vfhd-Hd-rels, ") vf, in No. 5. (8) nrvrt hd^yf-ihd, fi with Qamets long, 66. a. — "; y, Yodh moveable, 56. 1. :tn thd, n without Daghesh lene, 80, and followed by n quiescent, 54. (n). (9) nftn ihd-hu, n without Daghesh lene, 80. — 1ft hu, with ft moveable, 56. 1, and with T quiescent, 54. (")). (10) irv-i va-bho-hfi, 1 vd, 56. 1, simple syllable, 90. 3.-3 bho, 3 without Daghesh lene, 80, simple syllable, 90. 3. (11) "pm , -jfhhu-shckh, "1 vf, 56. 1. ttjn hhu, where the point over the right tooth of the Shin stands as well for the vowel Hholem as to mark sh, 62. 2; read as a simple syllable hho, 90. 3. — f$ shtkh, short Seghol and mixed syllable, see in No. 6 ; with a Sheva in the Goal Kaph, 52. 1. (12) ^5 "dl, 90. 4. " , :s pine, Pe with Daghesh lene, 79. 2; Sheva vocal, 46. d. — *Z ni, 54. (-*). (13) 2inn thfhom, n without Daghesh lene, 80. — ni" hhdm,90 8. * Note. Tn this exemplification, the first niunlier in any reference itanda Rn i Motion ($) in I h«.' GbUHMI ; nt!i«r rufuronces following, this stand lor the subdit iniono under that section- 4v! 92, !>:{. a< M r.Nis. (14) nni vtrn"hlt, 1 v* in No. 5. rp*l ru"hh, with Pattahh fur- tive, 09. (15) ffWbM H'lo-him, No. 3. nsrntt mfrd-hhe-phfth, -> with Pat- tahh long 1 , 33. — n /i/tc, with Seghol medial, 35, and accented, § 100. (16) "'?C~V? Veil pfni; No. 12. D , "3»j hdm-mu-ylm, the Daghesh forte in Mem attaches to the first syllable; /td/«, 90. 4. D*73 md-yim, see in No. 4. (17) Verse 3. Vdy-yo-mir tt'lo-him pehi, Nor, with N moveable, 56. 1, (although we do not sound it), vd-yf-hi tfor, (in cd, the Pattahh has a Daghesh implied in it, and is to he regarded as long, 59). (18) Verse 4. 6TV1 vdy-ydr, with N otiant at the end, 57. a. H'lo-hlm cth hd-Hor ki-tobh, vdy-ydbh-del H lo-hlin bin hd-Hor ii-bhen (w, 90. I. Note), hd-hhb-shikh (n /jd, 59). (19) Verse 5. Vdy-ylq-rd H r lo-him la-Hor yom, vtld-hho-shekh (r Id, 59) qd-rd lay-Id (""H /«y, 66. a), vd-ythi (vd in No. 17) ye-rlbh vd-ythi bho-qer yom He-hhddh (Ne, 58). ACCENTS. § 92. The other small marks of various forms accom- panying the Hebrew text, are accents* They are divid- ed into two great classes ; viz. such as separate words, or parts of sentences, from each other, which are called disjunctives; and such as serve to shew that words are to be closely connected, either in the reading, or in the sense, which are called conjunctives. [§ 93. The following table exhibits the forms, names, and classifica- tion of the accents. Some of them are used both in poetry and prose ; and such have no mark prefixed. Some are peculiar to prose, and these have (t) prefixed. Others are peculiar to poetry ; and these have (*) prefixed. Poetry means (according to the accentuators) only the books of Job, Psalms, and Proverbs, called technically HEN, these being the three initials of the Hebrew names of these books. I. Disjunctives. (1.) Pause-Accents; or, Disjunctives of the first class. 1. {%■ — ) Silluq, plfcO, i.e. stop, pause. In connexion with the two large points that always follow it, it is named, p^D * Usually called tonic accentSj in order to distinguish them from Methegh which is called th» "uphonic accent. § 93. accents. 43 p=10s tpDS , pause at the end of a verse. Elsewhere, this same mark stands for Methegh, § 85. Note. 2. ( — ) Athnahh, H;nN , i.e. respiration. *3. ( — ') Merka Mahpakh, "jEn^ N3"ifc , a composite accent, see Nos. 23. 25. (2.) Occasional Pause-Accents ; or, Disjunctives of the second Class. t4. ( — ) Tiphhha, n'"QFi (posterius), i. e. palm of the hand, from the shape. It is also named Nrtin retardation, and (when next before Silluq and Athnahh), Nb'KE strong. In poetry, it is merely a Conjunctive ; see No. 30. *5. ( — ) Tiphhha (anterius) ; praepositive, § 95. a. |6. (' — ) Zaqeph Qaton, yup r *l£t , i. e. elevator minor, i t7. ( ,; — ) Zaqeph Gadhol, M*13 ?)j?T , i. e. elevator major. f8. ( "• — ) Segholta, NPirAD , i. e. cluster of grapes, postpositive, § 95. a. (3.) Lesser Disjunctives ; or, Disjunctives of the third Class. |9. ( : — ) Tebhir, -P3PI , i. e. interruption. 10. (' — ) Rebhi a , Ipn"; , i. e. resting upon, or lying over. *11. ( ' — ) Rebhi' 1 Geresh, a composite accent, with the Geresh prae- positive, comp. Nos. 10, 15,; also § 95. a. |12. (' — ) Pashta, N13CS , i.e. expansion (of the voice); postpositive, § 95. a.' ' 13. ( "— - ) Zarqa, N|~*1T , i.e. dispersion; postpositive. In poetry, (when not postpositive), it is a mere Conjunctive ; see no. 31 ; also § 95. a. tl4. ( — , ) Ye.thibh, STT , i. e. sitting ; praepositive. Called also, ^CID trtpltt tuba anterior, and Vc/.lJ'g *"lD - ii tuba inferior. § 95. a, *15. ( c — ) Geresh, X~\i , i.e. expulsion. Also called D~\p. shield. 'icy * >S (Arabic / yjj r 'S clypeus), and nVtn retention (J/>i cohi- buit). J |16. ( — ) Garshayim, 0*vy")5 , i.e. double Geresh. Also called rrd-jU , "pO^p , dual and plural of 0"}U shield. |17. ( — ) Telisha Gedhola, nlpia rV^Vn , i. e. evulsio major; also NDHPi ; praepositive, § 95. a. tl8. ( v —) Qarne Phara, n~j2 ":nj5 , i.e. the two horns of a heifer, (from the shape). 19. ( — ) Pazer, ^TB, i. e. disperser. Also \>\~i\ SJ1 N §§ 93— 8S. ton 20. ( f ) Prsic/. ~~zz , i. c. r.c^alinn. AI*o NjTCE reparation. Al- wiiv- preceded by a Conjunctive, on th«- word after which it is placed. II. CoN.II NCTIVF.S. 21. ( j — *' — ) Munahh, M315B , i. e. joined. Also *y&* *iE ; r ft/on rec^rr, and *)".'"' "1B« '"'' f ' amhiilans. In poetry hoth .mperiue and inferius. On an ultimate syllable, and followed hy Athnahh, Zarqa, or Zaqeph Qaton, it is railed "1 ?~ , ///'/?/, i. e. ascent. When placed at the besrinnin appears plainly to have been the original design of the accent-. \iz. to guide the recitativo. Now as this was regulated, more or less, l>y the tones of words, and by the sense of a passage ; so the accentuation very often, (and more usually), accords with these objects; while in a multitude of cases it has no direct reference to them. For an exhibition in musical notes, of the recilaiim power of the accents, see Jablonskii Praef. ad Bib. Heb. $ '24, and Bartoloccii Bibliotheca Rabbin. I V. p. 431. vj 98. The proper place of an accent, (neither praeposilive nor postpositive), is over, or under, the left side of the letter next pre- ceding the vowel in a syllable. The imperfection of types sometimes preveuts the printed books from following this rule.] R--nark. The student should gradually niako himself acquainted with the accents, so as to distinguish, and to name them. The Conjunctives often show wiiat words should lie connected, in sense; the Disjunctives, which should be separated. They serve, therefore, as an index of the commentary, which the Accentuators made upon the Hebrew text. In a very great number of ca- ses, the pause-accents, (and sometimes all the others), affect the forms of words, by their influence on tho vowels ; so that the student should by no means supersede so much attention to them, as will enable him readily to distinguish their nature and office, so far as they have an influence on the tone, or interpunction, or on the vowel-system. One must often be in the dark on these sub- jects, who is not familiar in some degree with the power of the accents. Tone-Syllable. § 99. The general rule is, that the tone is on the last syllable* To this there are many exceptions. InSyriac and Arabic, the penult is more generally accented. Note. Technically an Oxytone, (i. e. a word with the tone on the ultimate), is called yVr^ Milrd" {from below) ; a word with the tone on the penult, is called b^^ Mib'el, (from above). § 100. Exceptions. Several classes of words are penacutcd ; (a) All Segholate forms, i. e. those which have a fur- tive vowel in their final syllable, § 359. [This vowel is almost universally, Seghol, Pattahh, or short Hhireq, §34. In a few cases, Shureq and Hhireq with Yodh appear to be furtive, and consequently employed as short vowels. E.g. in 'irtr and ir>z, which stand for inn and iftz ; ^B , for "'-is , § 120. b. In pro- per names ending with ^n*; , the penult syllable is accented, as Jirrs"^ Miariah; so also in ^nnUJ^ ? as the 1 is quasi furtive, § 120. 6.] * Words with the tone on the ultimate, are not in this grammar marked with the accent, ex- eept for sprcial purposes. The reader will understand, therefore, that a word without a tone-ac- cent noted, is after this to lie regarded as having the tone on the ultimate, the Syuta-x excepted. § 100. TONE-SYLLABLE. 47 (b) All duals are pcnacutcd ; and plurals of the same form with dun Is. E. g. dual, 0"!:^~\ •; plurals like the dual, D?5b , b*h'2 ; in all which cases the final Hhireq is short. [(c) Apocopated futures in verbs ~P, which take a fur- tive vowel; as 7^, § 283. 3. y.] (d) All the forms of regular verbs, which receive for- mative suffixes beginning with a consonant ; excepting those which have DF1 and ]T), § 194. § 197. Exceptions to this rule may be found, but they are either the result of error in copyists of printers, or the accent has been moved from its proper place by some of the causes described in $101. (e) In Hiphil of regular verbs, all the persons are pcn- acutcd, which have Yodh characteristic between the two last radicals. The other persons follow the rule in d. (f) In Kal, Niphal, Hiphil, and Hophal of verbs J?, the tone rests on the penult in all the persons which have formative suffixes beginning with a voice/, i. e. in all the persons where n_, 1, or " l _ is added to the root. But sometimes the tone is Milra ; as 13*1 , Imper. ""In. Such ex- ceptions are limited chiefly to Kal. Note. In all the persons of these verhs which have formative suf- fixes beginning with a consonant, (excepting the suffixes CDFi and "jP), the tone rests on the epenthetic 1 or \_ § 259, which is inserted be- tween the verb and the formative suffix. To this rule there are a few exceptions ; as ViiV'T , etc. where the tone is on the ultimate. Poel, Poal, and Ilithpocl of these vorbs aro regularly accented ; i. o. they have their tone liko the corresponding conjugations in a regular verb. (g) In Kal, Niphal, and Hiphil of verbs 12, the tone rests on the penult, in those persons which have forma- tive suffixes beginning with a vowel, i. e. the suff. !"!_ , "1 , n _ . In a few cases, the tone here is on the last syllable ; as loft}, Imp. ■"qilUJ. This is very rare, except in Kal. Comp. above under/*. Note. As in the case f Note, above, all the persons of these verbs which have an epenthetic i or ■ , _ , § 268. c, before formative suffixes beginning with a consonant, (excepting the suffixes SP and ]Pi), have the tone on the epenthetic syllable, i. e. on the penult. All the other parts of the verbs IV are regularly accented, viz. Hophal, Polel, Polal, Hithpolel, and those persons in Kal which have formative suffixes beginning with consonants and not preceded by an I- § 100. TONE SYLLABLE. epenthetic syllable (i or * , _) ; EM rpp_ , etc. So participle! of these verbs, in the fern, and plural, an regularly accented. Comp. under jC (/<,) The paragogic endings, n and n_, when Buffixed to verbs, affect the tone in the si mo nuuinc r U tlic /o/- mative suffixes n_, t, and V . Of course they draw down the tone upon the ultimate, in all cases except such as are noted above, under e,f, and g, where it is penucute with these paragogics. E.g. Milra, ~~\'2l for "1ST, Imp. I'iel of T3T; 1-iH for rj , Imp. of yv . JV/i/e/, nB'bfiJ for JON , 1 pers. Fut. of 22C ; !"P3-|3 for En 3 , from 6»^ ; rPa/Tps for o^p: , from Dip. Note. n_ and n_ paragogic are rarely added to any persons, ex- cept those which end with a radical letter of the verb; and this most- ly in the Fut. tense. In the Fraeter, only the 3d pers. feminine, in a very few cases, receives a paragogic n_. or n_ , (all other apparent cases of paragoge in the Praeter being quite doubtful) ; and this 3d pers. feminine retains, like a paragogic noun, the accent on the pe~ nult, contrary to h above. E.g. rrnN2^~ , Josh. 6 . 17; nru\:£: , 2 Sam. 1: 26, with Pattahh under N, where we might expect Qamets. (i) Nouns, pronouns, adverbs, and (in a few cases) par- ticiples, are penacutcd, when they have H_ or !"i_ ,, jxtra- govic or local, E. g. rra* 1 , mart , !"T3U? , FT^sfs masc. In a few instances, the ac- cent in these cases is found on the ultimate. Note. Yodh paragogic always draws down the accent upon itself. 0) Verbs, nouns, etc. are JMilel with the following suffix-pronouns; viz, *%~ r "0-., 'O-.j ^H-, liTI__ , ^r»_, HL-, Hi , ^ll, *ial, KiL. IBl, and some others; also with Tj__, D_, ]_, shortened from ^_, ft_, ]_: which latter suffixes are Milra. The suffix-pronoun ^, preceded by a Sheva vocal, is Milra; pre- ceded by a vowel, Milel ; e. g. 1")^-, but Vl-?" . (k) JVun epenthetic always makes tile tone penult : e.g. "OlD 1 , nDnp . i?Vta paragogic always brings it to the final syllable ; as VMOT , but with Nun, l^lTQE] . (/) Pause accents, (and in a few cases, other accents), occasion the tone to stand upon the penult, when its regular place would be on the ultimate; and vice versa. E. g. laro , W»3 ; rirro , n'aw . § 101. SHIFTING OF THE TONE-SYLLABLE. 40 Shifting of the tone-syllable. § 101. The rules, in §99. § 100, constitute the regular, usual prin- ciples of accentuation. But the lone-syllable is often shifted from its natural place ; e. g. (a) Vav, prefixed to the Praetcr of verbs, makes the word Milra. E. g. "tf&vi , "•n^in ; pfcsN , p^sst) ; Hiph. ttTa^ri , nyasrji . So too in verbs 9S and 19, § \00.f g. also in h. Exceptions, (l) Always; the first per. plur. of verbs ; as WjaJJV. (2) Generally ; verbs whose third radical is a Quiescent; as HN'VI , n^Sl , nuil- (3) Verbs with a pause-accent on the penult, (4) When a tone-syllable immediately follows, the tone is then commonly (not always) thrown back; as "151 "^Hr'^] • Note. Besides these exceptions, there are other occasional instances of exception to t lie rule iu a above, which either want of consistency, or inaccuracy in transcribers, has occasioned. (b) Vav conversive, prefixed to the Future, commonly (not always) makes the word Mild. E. g. ifes? 1 , *T2N*1 • In such cases, the verb must end with a radical letter, and its penult syllable be simple; otherwise the change in question is excluded. Note 1. Apocopated verbs, with a furtive final vowel, are all ac- cented on the penult, in the Future. See § 283. 2. y. Note 2. Futures with Vav conversive remain Milra, (a) In the first pers. sing. ; ashnfrl. {b) In verbs Nr ; as N"V*1. (c) With a pause-accent on the final syllable. (c) The particle ;?>* (not) before the Future, usually (not always) makes it Mild. E. g. MDin~!jN do not reprove, FjDin-rN you must not add, with the tone on the penult. But here practice is not uniform, as the accent is sometimes on the ultimate. Verbs nb, preceded by *N , commonly suffer both apocope and retraction of the accent. («i) A word regularly Milra, if immediately followed by a tone-syllable, more usually becomes Milel E.g. il "'P. i ir;, regularly accented "^ft; liN FW\, but alone, H3 3 . But as the penult syllable is often not adapted to receive an accent, and as the change of tone would, in some cases, have a ten- dency to obscure the sense in reading, the usage in cpiestion is often neglected. 60 §§ 102 104. CRITICAL MARKS AND MASORHTIf NOTES. (e) The Inij). and Fut apocopated, wiili an Optative, hortative sense, commonly (not always) throw back the ac- cent. E. g. "1EV3!"T keep thyself, for ~\hv7-[ ; H*}^, hi him see, for rN-" ; Pl^.n for nc-iri . The Future always does this, when it has a furtive rowel.] Critical marks, and Masoretic notes. [§ 102. In the common editions of the Bihle with Masoretic notes, etc. a small circle over any word, e.g. NxV", shews that the margin is to be consulted, either for a different reading, (as Gen. 8 : 17, N^lr: in the case above), or for literae majores vel minores, Piska, puncta extraordinaria, etc. The mark ( ) over words in Van der Hooght, etc. refers to a marginal note. § 103. Qiri and Ktlhibh. There are a considerable number of marginal readings (about 1000), in our common Hebrew Bibles, most of which are quite ancient. Some of them correct grammatical anom- alies, some are euphemisms, and some propose a different word. They are probably the result of an ancient recension of Hebrew manu- scripts. The marginal word is called V "}P, Q. fri i which means, read ; i. e. this word is read, instead of the word in the text to which it re- lates, and which is called STlS , Ktthibh, i. e. written or text. The vow- el-points under the Kethibh belong to the Qeri, which is printed with- out points. If a word is omitted in the text, the vowel-points stand in the place with a small circle over them, while the letters belonging to them are printed in the margin; as Judg. 20: 13. This is called S^nS tUb"] " , ")Pi read but not written. If a word is superfluous in the text, it is left unpointed ; as Ezek. 48: 16. This is called "nj: JC - ] -Tp , written but not read. § 104. Literae majores et minores distinguish themselves, § 10. Piskd {aptis) means separation, i. e. a space left in the text in the middle of a verse ; as in Gen. 35 : 22. Puncta extraordinaria are marked thus, HnbiE » i . See Gen. 18 : 9. 33: 4, where the points over the letters are extraordinaria. The Rabbins regard these, as designating some mysterious significations of the words over which they are placed. Probably the original design of them was, to denote that the reading was suspi- cious. The number of words over which they are found is only fifteen. For a full account of all the marginal and other notes in the Masoretic editions of the Hebrew Bible, see the preface to Van Her Hooght's Hebrew Bible, §j, -23—45.] PART II. CHANGES AND PECULIARITIES OF CON SONANTS AND VOWELS. Changes of Consonants. [§ 105. It is a principle, occasionally developed in the Hebrew language, that letters of the same organ are easily commuted. E. g. 13 , ^3 , P)3 , all mean back ; and the like in a number of cases, in the dif- ferent classes of letters mentioned in § 12. But changes of this na- ture belong to lexicography, as they do not affect the grammatical forms of words. § 106. The changes which affect the consonants, may be ranked under assimilation, casting away, addition, and transposition. § 107. Assimilation. Several consonants are occasionally assimilated ; viz. (1.) In the first syllable of words ; viz. (a) Nun, most frequently of all ; e. g. Wa for ttTM from this, uia? for 3)S3^ . This is very com- mon in verbs "]B , § 252, but not universal. (6) Lamedh, rarely ; pro- bably in the article bn in all cases, § 163, as D^fett^J for U"h'D bfl, etc. Also in the verb nj3b ; as Fut. rTj£1, for ri£b^ . (c) Resh, very seldom; in 1123N , as ^Vr/J instead of Wf] "VPN , who will be; N03 for ND"p , which is the form of the word in Syriac and Arabic, {d) Tav, in the praeformative nrt (in Hitbpael), often assimilates itself to the first radical of the verb'; e. g. ISt-jrl for "mnrt , etc. ; see § 187. b. 2. 3. (e) Mem, only in a few foreign words ; as Vsb for fBS^ , in Greek kafiTxadtg. (f) Yodh, in some verbs *D, § 251. (2.) In the last syllable of words. In all the cases under No. 1, the assimilation, as we have seen, is indicated by a Daghesh forte in the following letter. But assimilation occasionally happens, at the end of words, where a Daghesh forte cannot be written, § 72. This takes place, in cases where a furtive vowel would stand in the final syllabic of the word in its full form ; e. g. nn for n:r : , RN for Fl^H , ra for na's. , etc. So also, nb for ri"$, nftN for rrj?$K , nijttra for nijTJtt* » , rnii>;a for nnhtua . aS 10S — 110. CHANGES OP CONSONANTS. Remark. All langaagei bav< ■> practical tendency toward shortening word", and ' imitating aome of the letters. I . g. in Greek <.i //. hut ■iiiii.. ; and so at the end ol p/ords, A£ot/( forWirj (Gen. MAvto;), JUijpr/f for Ji'-i,ii,>- (Gen. /i /),'",'> "".')• In l>atiu, illustris for inhtttria, etc. § 108. Consonants cast away or dropped. Instances of (his nature occur ; viz. («) .ft f/te beginning of words, by aphaeresis, when a Sheva is un- der the letter. E. g. (l) Meph ; as 13rT*a for torY*3 n . and so not unfre- quently. (2) Yodh ; as 1r for ~\\* , bl3 for ^W* . (3) Me m M n-/? for npbB . (4) Mm ; as ]n for ]r>3 . It is doubtful, whether any let- ter which has a proper vowel, suffers aphaeresis. It seems to he lim- ited to cases where Sheva is used under it. (6) In the middle of words, by Syncope. This happens, when a Sheva precedes the letter dropped. In case of syncope, the vowel of the letter syncopated, takes the place of this Sheva. E. g. sfra for P)V.N73, D^-jp for D\X-ip; IKfel for "irjVrP , ^h\ for "fcrarV: ; "^ for ■>1S , ""3 for '13 ; s»ba for ^*?a ; b3 for t?3 , etc Syncope of N is pret- ty frequent ; of r? , very common; of 1 and a , more seldom, except in verbs n; ; of 3>, very rare. (c) .ft 5g instead of QJ?«, ^3 instead of ?p3_ , etc. But n and n commonly take Pattahh long before them ; as br.3 instead ofbrtS; D^hN instead ofD^ntt. [Note. In a great number of cases, Pattahh long is the compensa- tive vowel ; almost always before t\ and n , when the A sound is re- quired. In other cases, Daghesh'd Hbireq, i. e. Hhireq including a quiescent Daghesh'd letter, is sometimes adopted, instead of Tscri ; e. g. "liga (not "iSja) instead of *\ys BW-tferj so Y*N2 (not yiiz) for y-N; ; also Qibbuts long and impure instead of Hholem, as TTttr.z (not FlEin;) instead of FtJOna . It follows, that the student must not always expect a vowel long in appearance, before the Gutturals ; because _ and _ long, are frequently used instead of _ and _ . The use of long _ (instead of Hholem), is unfrequent.] § 113. The Gutturals are prone to take the A sound before them; particularly in a final syllable. E. g. yiyti (Imp.) instead of 3?»«>, 'J-y\ instead of "l\ ■ Often too in a penult syllable ; as ^y\ instead of "153. , H^fT instead ofifcrP. Note I. In almost all cases, where the. Jinal syllable has a Guttu- ral at the end, and has also a mutable vowel, that vowel is exchanged for Pattahh; as Kal Imp. 5>»"JJ instead of ?'2'^; Piel, ";:C instead of $13$ , etc. Note 2. In case the Jinal syllable with a Guttural has a long vow- el, which must be retained, Pattahh furtive is put before the Guttu- ral ; as SfttaJfl i rtlM , etc. See § 69. Note 3. Resh never takes a Pattahh furtive. §§ 114 — 117. PECULIARITIES of QUiEsr r \tv § 1 14. Instead of simple Sheva vocal, the Gutturals take a composite Shcva. E. g. n'-N' , "]tr\ , ^il ; see § 49. Note. Sheva simple stands un- der the Gutturals, at the end of a mixed syllable, after a short vowel, and when a silent Sheva is required, § 50 ; as ,, P.:fV , iaftij . Peculiarities of Quiesccnts. In treating of the vowels, it was necessary to notice the quiescent and otiant power of the letters NnT, {Ehevi) $ 53 — 57, so far as might serve to illustrate the nature of the vowel sounds, in which the Ehevi quiesce. Some more particular notice of the various phases and powers of these letters, is proper here. §115. General principle which regulates quiescence. The letters tf, 1, \ (Evi) quiesce, when a homogeneous vowel precedes them (§ 53), and, according to the analogy of other consonants, they would stand at the end of a mixed syllabic, and take a simple Sheva silent, express or im- plied, § 56. 2. E. g. 8t2£» instead of N v £tt=tf£7:, STflWa instead of rtWST'a , DD" 1 ? instead of 2D 7"; , a^in instead of asftn . Note. If the preceding vowel be naturally heterogeneous, still, in very many cases, it does not exclude quiescence. But a peculiar ex- pedient is adopted to effect this ; see §117.1. Comp. with this, § 56. 3. Such is the general rule for cases of quiescence, (subject however to many exceptions). But quiescence is not limited to this case only ; for, § 116. Quiescence sometimes happens, when the Evi would (by analogy) have a voxcel ; specially when they would take a furtive one ; § 119. c. 2. § 120. c. E. g. Dip instead of DijD , Dip instead of D-Tlj? , SlKSaa instead of nS$s?B3 , Ufttl instead of Sip, nira instead of nVr-3 , rfttfU instead of rpiiii ; and so often, when the .vowel preceding the furtive one is ho- mogeneous. But usage only can enable the learner to distinguish such cases. § 117. The general rule demands that the preceding vowel should be homogeneous, as a condition of quiescence ; but quiescence is often effected, (in cases when such preceding vowel would be naturally he- terogeneous), in two different ways ; for, § 118. PECULIARITIES OF QUIESCENT*. (1) The vowel may conform to the Quiescent, in or- der to become homogeneous. E. g. for 3 v 2;in , (which would be the regular analogous form), is substituted S^Unn, i. e. the heterogeneous short Hhireq in the sylla- ble in, conforms to, or becomes homogeneous with, the Vav in in. So nbi" for nbw , rf£s for nPb-J , etc. (2) The Quiescent may conform to the vowel. E. g. DNp for Dip , JlVa for i>a , nbu; for ibt , etc. Practice only can tcacli the Student, when the cases which coine within these rules take place. § 118. The letters &*, 1, \ having a vowel of their own, and being preceded by a consonant with Sheva, sometimes remit their vowel to the place of the preceding Shei a, and become otiant. E. g. a-'-^N-j for D^Jf] , llttSK-l for 'pui'Wn , "Ifita for *\Ha , n-;NS for rnNS; »ia for'jiia , t3=ip for Dip , ''y for" 1 ]?, T3 for *r£; Ti^% for nn\V, fia'W for n»>V, ]inn^3 for ji-in;: , 1>a (with Yodh omitted) for l^a, etc. [Note 1. This has been named Syriasm ; but improperly, since it appears so very often in Hebrew, (taking all the cases together), as to shew that it is a property of the dialect, and not the result of er- ror in Syraizing transcribers. Usage only can determine the cases, in which it is admitted. Note 2. Such cases, also, have been represented by all the gram- marians as quiescence, in respect to N* . That they are not so, but cas- es of otium, is plain from the following examples; viz. rKnpr (instead of niopb) ; but with a sing, suffix, intfnpb, with a piural one, DpnM*jpb . So Fiaabza (instead of nofcrft), constr. state npNr^3 , with suffix ^npN^73 . Aleph, then, has no effect on the mutability or quantity of the vowel which precedes it, in such cases ; consequently it is otiant. Instances of Vav and Yodh do not occur in the same way as those above of Aleph; but such cases as "'a for "^a, is for ^13? • iVjt for 'Pba?, v ran for "^ban, etc. shew that Vav and Yodh do become as completely otiant as Aleph, and on the like principles. For etymolo- gy's sake, Yodh and Vav are retained in such words as !~r:\Nt (for ns-N), £03 (for N13) ; and in these cases, they have the appearance of being quiescent, but are in fact otiant, as the above examples shew. The principle is an extensive one in regard to Vav and 1 '<«//<. in verbs n? , which are properly Vr and *r. It will account for a great part of the abridged forms of these verbs ; see § 281. In other classes of words, such otium of Yodh and Vav is far more seldom than that of Aleph. §§ 119, 120. PECULIARITIES OF QIMXi vi-.. Note 3. N, 1, "*, being otiant, ire frequently omitted in writing; e. g. pfea for P)%fi*a , brr for b:^^ , ' , ; N3 for Btia = Ria , !|b« for ""r^ ; 13 for " |, ]3, nba"; for I"*?**, etc. ; see § 57. § 03. § 119. Peculiarities of Au.rn. These are so many, that they need an explicit and separate statement. (a) Aleph is sometimes, (I) A Guttural ; as in f|DH£ . (2) A Qui- escent ; as in liOfii 1 , N^O • (3) It is sometimes treated as a common consonant ; as n'~3 , plur. B^fit^S , rTttiMa bbH-sha. Usage only can de- termine all the respective cases of these different powers. (6) Aleph at the end of a word has no guttural power (comp. § G9), but is either quiescent, otiant, or employed like other consonants ; e. g. quiescent, as in N-i72 ; otiant, as in MTStai"! , N~r* , see § 57. b. a. ; or it retains a common consonant power, e.g. in Segholates, asN:3 , plur. b^ttbS ; N3D , with suffix BM3D , sobh-adm. (c) Aleph in the middle of a word, (l) Like other Gutturals, it takes a composite Sheva where they take one. But in some cases, it drops such Sheva, and quiesces in the preceding vowel, lengthening it ; e. g. Saab instead of ""iSNb , ta^rfbNb instead of cnVs: , rniM instead of STlfiM , attN for SHftHJ, etc. comp. § 152. c. 2. These may be called cases of contraction. In I-prTr , the points are not appropriate ; for the Jews read, ,, :"!Nr=" , :'~Nb , as the Pattahh is long. The word, however, is sui generis in respect iofonn. (2) But where the other Gutturals take a Sheva silent (§ 114. Note), Aleph usually becomes quiescent; e. g. iTlfiCfctt , but with another Guttural, as "'nrUDip. (3) Aleph penult, in words that would regularly be Segholates, and where 8 would then have a furtive vowel, more usually (not always) rejects such vowel, and quiesces in the preceding vowel (if homogeneous), and lengthens it; e.g. SJ&H for cqp, ONS03 for rX^":: ; see § 116. (4) Immediately before a vowel, it sometimes remits that vowel to the preceding letter with a Sheva, and becomes otiant; see § 118. ((/) Aleph at the beginning of a word. {\) If it have a proper vow- el, it is regular. (2) If it have a composite Sheva, in some few ca- ses, (after the manner of the Syriac), it employs a long vowel instead of it; e. g. "jl^N instead of "pax, C31?0N for (3^*08, T-r'"** for *^brtN. This happens only at the beginning of words. § 120. Peculiarities of Vav and Yodm. (a) At the end of syllables and words, Vav and Yodh, in case they would regularly have a silent Sheva, and are preceded by homogeneous vowels, uniformly quicscc, § 115. (6) They quiesce at the end of words, also, when they would be preceded by a silent Sheva, or analogically would be preceded by a furtive vowel; e.g. ""is instead of,?"1B, \~? for TTP, ^ns in- §§ 121 124. PECULIARITIES OF QUIESCENTS. 57 stead of lrb, IfflTIT for ir;mr with Paltahh furtive. To this prin- ciple there are one or two exceptions in respect to Vav ; e. g. liij?. . With it, the case is different; e.g. N'Jn (instead of NUn) with N otiant ; on the other hand, N73 , with N moveable, like the other con- sonants. (c) Vav and Yodh penult, which would regularly take a furtive vowel, reject it, and quiesce in a preceding homogeneous vowel ; e. g. nibs instead of nVri , FiWi instead of n^n , rP13*0 instead of n*ri;r ; comp. § 119. c. 3. § 121. Pfxuuarities of He. (a) .^ the beginning and in the middle of words, it is always a moveable consonant. Apparent exceptions are^ some compound proper names, (as "ilSfTlS with quiescent ri), which" depend only on the transcriber, (b) He, at the end of words, is near- ly always quiescent ; as SiV3 ga-lo, § 54. When moveable, it is mark- ed with Mappiq ; as nas ga-bhah, § 84. (c) It will bear a furtive vowel before it without quiescence ; e. g. Mpz , n"^^_ , fiOa , etc. and must in such cases be considered as moveable; comp. N in § 119. 6, in Nb.3 ;, etc. {d) He is frequently made otiant, at the end of a word, by a Daghesh forte euphonic; e.g. —~-?V2=r\V2 , 3it:~M75 mdt-ldbh, " l ~)2 T\'Zj'J VO-sep-pirl. But this belongs merely to modes of reading. § 122. The Quiescents are sometimes commuted ; which naturally re- sults from the fact, that the same vowels are homogeneous with differ- ents. (J) At til ie end oi f wc »rds. E. &■ N_ is put for rt -» as ^^HFr for rrlnnp N- — • '— . } - itijia — »m n! — •"*- t - Kafcp — ~-^* N_ — n_, - tf3 — -t !"J— — *-> - mi/j5tt — H^p;: rr_ — *-» . - rrn.2 — N~!?. '■)_ — N_, - cni — u;n < -' T_ — rr_ , - »&» — rito* i_ — «-,, - D*l — din i — *-:i - r^") — ■jri'N-) (2) Sometimes in the middle of words; as E3*I$SX forta^ai:. u=pp. for ta^p , 3?h for a;in, etc: § 123. Quiescents are frequently omitted in writing words, §63. § 124. The Quiescents frequently suffer apocope. («) In verbs nr, in the Fut. and Imper., and when they have suf- fixes ; §283. 3. y. §313. (b) In nouns with suffixes or increase, derived from the same class of verbs ; § 378. b.] 58 §§ 196 — 1-7. CHANGES OF TIIF. vow i i | 8 125. The Quiescents, (with a yowel preceding them), are often employed 1>\ way of paratroge. (a) Jlleph is somelimrs paragogic, after the syllables, "'- , i , T ; e.g. N' , J3a= ,, p)3 , Kta-J=i}in , N^rrj—^'r- they go. This last form is a usual one in Araliic. (fc) Also n_, n_, n_; e.g. tfcj?J$, rfctsj;*; ]-, r$n; *iip%, (c) More seldom 1 ; e. g. pronoun suffix D_ , parag. itt— ; so in the noun n*rj, parag. irpft . (rf) Rarely \_ , as D^Ja , WJMa ; but For/// is often inserted be- tween two words, united to form a proper name; as "*q\ man, b$t God, united bJO-OJ Gabriel, i. e. man of God. Note. Several pronouns nre of I he same form and sound as some of these paragogie letters. In »uch cases, the connexion of the word with the context must determine whether such doubtful forms are pronouns or paragogie tetters. CHANGES OF THE VOWELS. § 126. The changes, which words in the Hebrew (as in other lan- guages) undergo, in order to designate their various relations and sig- nifications, are effected partly by a change in the vowels, and partly by a change in the consonants. The laws which regulate the vowel- changes, are the subject of our present consideration. § 127. Vowf.ls mutable axd immutable. The general principle is, that pure Vowels are mutable; impure ones im- mutable. See § 20. scq. [Exceptions, (l) Long impure vowels are sometimes exchanged for each other ; as 0^272, plur. C'O'liQ . (2) hong impure ones, for long pure ones ; as Imp 2d pers. masc. D^p, 2d pers. plur. fern, TiZ^/p with Hholem pure; Niph. Fut. 3d masc. sing DIE* with Hholem impure and protracted, 3d plur. fern, nrr^r. with Hholem pure and muta- ble; Hiph. Imp. 2d pers. plur. masc. ^bj5n , plur. fern, fistcpfl with Tseri pure. (3) Long impure vowels for short ones ; as plia , const, b^2 gedhul ; "?::", constr. np3ft. ( 1) Long impure rowels for Shevas ; e. g. rib a , fern. -r':.'i . It*will of course be understood that all the long pure vowels are, from their nature, mutable. All these changes, excepting No. 1, and the first instance in No. 3, are very frequent in He- brew. The laws of declension, in such cases, supersede the usual laws of the vowels, applicable to other cases ; so that one can call no vowel in Hebrew absolutely immutable : all being liable in certain cases to change. But when and irhere this happens, can be learned only by practice. Note 1. The composite Shevas in a like way, are frequently ex- changed for each ether, in the course of declension; e.g. Dr"". , fem §§ 128, 129. CHANGES OF THE VOWELS. 59 ftJabttj ; "lON^, with sufhx. "»3nO«;. The A sound is shorter than the E sound. Note 2. The proper mutable vowels are these ; viz. Qamets, Tseri, and Hholem, all long and pure ; Pattahh medial and short, Seghol medial and short, Hliireq medial and short, Qamets Hhateph, andQib- buts short, nil pure. The other vowels are immutable in the sense above defined, i.e. they remain immutable, unless a particular form of a word becomes more imperious than the usual laws of the vowel- changes.] § 128. («) The changes of vowels for each other are very generally, (not always), limited to the respective clas- ses to which they belong. A few exceptions appear ; as IS , plur. 0^772 ; }*y\1i , plur. ff*i}*yitt. So Hiph. b^Bpn, 2 pers. pfcbpri. Every language has some such anomalies. Practice only can teach how to distinguish them. (b) Each long mutable vowel has one or more corres- ponding short ones, for which it may be exchanged ; and vice versa. E. g. Long pure vowels. Corresponding short vowels. Qamets (-) Pattahh (-) Tseri C\ $ Seghol (v) J- sen (, ) $ Hhireq short (. ) u . , ( • \ S Qibbuts short ( .. ) Hholem l— 1 < > . ,_,, . ,v \ x ' ( Qamets Hhateph { ) [ § 129. Long mutable vowels are exchanged for corres- ponding short ones ; (a) When they arc in a mixed sylla- ble on which the tone rested, and from which the tone, for some special cause, has been removed, cither forward or backward. E. g. forwards ; as l\ , D^T; ; tt5\ , ^Q^. , )k , *f?3 i ~&$1 s T^R"! yiq-tbl-hha; isb^ , n^ziDri ; before Maqqeph, as S3, HiuN-bs kbl H a sher, § 89. With tone moved backwards, i. e. towards the right hand ; as *|5j, ^?.T.2 ! °P? ^pJll vay-yd-qbm ; t3P"lJp2, t3ntt)J33. The reason of such changes is, that long vowels cannot stand in mixed syl- lables, unless they are tone-syllables, § 36. Of course, when the tone is removed, they must be shortened. Note. A few solitary cases are found, of apparent exception to this principle; e.g. 1 Sam. 17: 35, "lVOarn . But the first Yodh here is merely a fulcrum, § G4. GO 180. « w anm.s <>r tiii. M>.\ 1 i |, (h) Wlien thoy arc in a mixed syllable, which the con- struct state requires to be shortened. E.g. 13* word, but niM^ "Di tf/ie word nf Jehovah, where the orig- inal syllable 13 is shortened to ~D ; see § 342. 6. (c) Long vowels before a Daghesh forte latent, in a a final letter (not a Guttural), when a change is required, for the most part are exchanged for an appropriate short vowel. E. g. (a) Tseri goes into Hhireq pai-vum ; as fcN (with Dag. forte implied in the D), "'hn . (b) Hholem into Qibbuts short ; as ph , rvj,~, • but sometimes info Qamets Hhaleph, as i$, fyf bz-zl. Note. If the tone remains, the vowel continues long in such cases ; e.g. !"J731B sham-ma, Siah hem-ma. (d) A pause accent falling on final Tseri, not unfre- qucntly shortens it into Pattahh. See § J45.] § 130. Short vowels in mixed syllables become long ; («) When the form of the word is in any way so changed, that they come to stand in a simple syllable. E. g. T3 , "*?D ; 31 , 131 ; r*0£ , fcfip. So, of course, before a Quiescent: as N"^» instead of N£"2 . ttba instead of rtb-2 — *bi . [(b) When a Daghesh forte is omitted in writing, the short vowel that would stand before it becomes long ; § 112. corap. §58. §59. E.g. "pa instead of SIS}, ^13 instead of *p3, ^")'z instead of *P2 , etc. Note 1. Daghesh forte, implied in a letter at the end of a word, (it cannot be written in such a case, § 72), xisually prolongs the vowel which precedes. E. g. !?A* instead of V^ , SN instead of 72N , 18X1* for Ttfrn y'uh-dw ; but sometimes the vowel remains short, as hi* for W , 30 (not 3D) for 3=3 . Note 2. In the case b above, the syllable with the short vowel, becoming a simple one by- the coalescence of the implied Daghesh'd letter, the vowel must of course be lengthened, according to the rule a above. Before rt and 1, however, the vowel Pattahh usually re- main*, in such cases ; but it is long, § 112. Note. (f) The article prefixed to a few words, lengthens the short vowel in them. E.g. tag , ta*i ; 11 , inn ; is , ixi ; 13 , ibi ; y^Sj , '{->*-• 'Usage only can distinguish such cases. § 131 134. FALLING AWAY OF THE VOWELS. 01 § 131. A Pause accent falling on a medial Pattahh or Seghol, commonly (not always) lengthens it. E. g. toys, D"; 7 ; ?3n , 22^T. Occasionally other accents do the same; see § 149.] Falling away of the Voiock. § 132. Vowels arc said to fall away, when they are dropped and a Sheva takes their place. E. g. *\"yi , t-D" , where the vowel under the ~, in the first word, falls away in the second. Note. Apocope of vowels is dropping them at the end of a word ; as Jl?3"^ , ."p*] , where the final quiescent long Seghol of the first word is dropped. § 133. When the tone is moved forward one syllable, (i. e. moved toward the left hand); («) The penult vowel of the ground-form* falls away, if pure and mutable. E. g. *\bfi , -nn- ; a'sS , >aa3> . If the tone is not shifted, the vow- el remains ; e. g. 20* , ""ab"^ . (b) If the tone is moved forward two syllables, both the ultimate and penult vowels, if mutable, fall away. E. g. hSjft , Cq-nni ; jj^t , t=in" , ;pT ; where both vowels of the ground form vanish. In regard to the short Hhireq which takes the place of one of them, see § 137. In regard to Sheva being inserted when the vowel is dropped, see § 52. [§ 134. Regimen or the construct state (§ 332), usually occasions both the ultimate and penult vowels to fall away, if pure and mutable. E.g. '"D'sj word, fiin? " 1 "}DT the words of Jehovah. But not all vow- els which appear to be mutable, are so; see § 20 seq. on the vowels. In particular, Tseri in participial forms, and in many others, remains unchanged by a state of regimen ; e.g. bEjip, reg. the same ; a*jt , reg. the same ; tad , reg. the same; other like forms follow the rule, e.g. 15 , reg. ]3 ; ^SH , reg. rjv'o . The vowels are sometimes dubi- ous by usage ; as in '&~)B , reg. ttJ^S and a}"SB . Note. In Segholate forms, (Dec. VI. of nouns), the final vowel is merely^wr/ire ; so that, these nouns being monosyllabic in theory, * The trround-form n the primary one. in number, KOlldor, or truer to » In 'h it belongs ; the origiuiil, from which the ethers rue derived. Ofl §§ 135, 130. FAILING AWAY OF VOWELS — RISE OF NEW ONES. rcgii.icti makei no change in their vowels. See in the Paradigm of Dec. VI. § 135. Where the ground -form of a word receives an ac- cession at the end beginning villi a vowel ; {a) Which re- quires both consonants of its final syllable to be united with such accession in the same syllable, then the final rowel of the ground-form falls away, if mutable. This happens most frequently in verhs ; e.g. Vcj3 , fern. inbup; itep?, plur. ibtaj?^ ; "133 , fern. fn33; part. pres. b'Cp, fern, "rep, plur. D^Dp; in Piel, labJfl , fem. PHJa^E ; but also in nouns of Dec. VII., as n^.N, plur. D^'N. (b) Also, where only the final consonant is united with an accessory vowel, but the penult consonant, from the nature of syllabication necessary to the form of the word, must have a Sheva silent, the final vowel of the ground- form falls away. E. g. Imp. fem. "'btsp (not ''bbp)* ground-form Vt2j5 ; ^-pp (not iV'ttp), ground-form b'trp . Note 1. If only the final letter of the ground-form is to be united with the accessory vowel, and the penult letter must retain a vowel instead of having a Sheva, then such vowel cannot fall away; e. g. tTT, with suffix i~i37; 3313, plur. ta^SlS. Note 2. Usage only will enable the student readily to distinguish the cases where the rule is to be applied. We can see no reason, a priori, why the Hebrews might not have said, i~n~ , as well as i - ^"! , (especially since they say WQp> T , etc.) ; except that in this way, the method of suffix-forms is distinguished from that of simple declension, which marks person and number.] Rise of New Vowels. § 136. We have seen, that two successive vowels may fall away (§ 133. b. § 134), on account of the tone being removed, or of regimen. In such cases, an impossible syllable would arise, (i. e. one with three consonants before a vowel, § 42) ; consequently, a ?iea> vowel must be inserted, in order to avoid this. E. g. "^7, constr. plur. "*~)3~ dbhre. But this is inadmissible; see § 42. So O'.uai* , constr. t&3$ (with one composite Sheva), would be an impossible syllable. A vowel must therefore be supplied. §§ 137 141. RISE OF NEW VOWELS, ETC. €)'•} § 137. In case the vowels falling away leave two sim- ple Shevas, the usual supplied vowel is short llhireq. E. g. *"Q- , plur. constr. ^~)3~ instead of * , n2~ . § 138. But if one of the two letters that have been deprived of their vowels, is a Guttural, then Pattahh or Seghul must be the supplied vowel. E. g. E3TiJ:JK , constr. " i u3:n instead of V ^:N ; &' , j??h , constr. "'jsbrl • [§ 139. II an accessory prefix letter with a Sheva, conic before a syllable beginning with a Guttural which lakes a composite Sheva, such accessory letter takes a supplied short vowel, which is homogeneous with the composite Sheva. E. g. *ny , but with prefix b , -b>: ; V=>N ., Vdn?. ; "^ft., v rri2 bd- hh°ll. The Futures of the verbs tt"*?1 and IrPri make iT.v* j ^T! 5 an( ^ analogous to this are the prefixes, as ni""^ , contrary to the analogy of other guttural forms. § 140. When in varying the forms of words it so hap pens, that analogically two Shevas would come under two successive letters, and the first of these would be a com- posite Sheva ; then the corresponding short vowel is sub- stituted for such composite Sheva. E. g. !"Dfiro instead of rr^Dn: , which would make an impossible syllable. So *{b*B po-bl-kha instead of ~:2S ; 1130?* instead of IISS^. The ground of this is, that from their nature two Shevas cannot stand together, unless the first be silent, and the second vocal, except at the end of a word. But in the case above, the Jirst is vocal, i. e. a com- posite one, § 46. a ; of course the expedient of a new vowel must be adopted, in order to avoid an impossible syllable.] Rise of furtive Vowels. § 141. As the Hebrews rarely admit two consonants after a vowel, in the same syllable (§ 42) ; so, to avoid this, they supply a furtive vowel, in most cases where such a concurrence would otherwise take place. This vowel is commonly Seghol short; but under words having a pe- nult Guttural, it is Pattahh short; with a penult Yodh, it is short Hhireq. 04 §142. kisi; in itutivi; \«.\vr.i.s. — BUnUMHC OBAMGBS, ETC. E.g. *{-b instead of ~btt ■> " 1! ??. f° r 1-y.i "^'l fi-> r ~!"i > n "? f° r rP? . See on Dec. VI. § 359, and also § 283. 3. y. on the Segholate forms of verbs. [Note I. The 2 pers. fcm. sing. Praet. in verbs Lamedb Qattural, takes PuiUxhh furtive ; e.g. R973QJ instead oflW&S, in order to ease the pronunciation, § 69. Note 2. All words having a furtive vowel are Milcl, i. e. accented on the penult. In this way they are distinguished from the few forms that resemble them, in the final vowel, but are accented on the ulti- mate ; e.g. ^33, ':*!."!?, etc. Comp. § 100. a.] Euphonic changes of the Vowels. [§ 142. These are various, (a) A Guttural with Qamets, seldom admits a Qamets or Pattahh immediately before it, but exchanges them for a Seghol ; e. g. tZPnrTn instead of d" , ")^n , T'hiJ for T»r1Bt ; nns for n^E , r^N-rrs for ■•afojt-lTO . Note. The rule is not uniform. Such cases occur, as V" , > V J~ ) "^'i S33?n , etc. The word ~"l is anomalous, being put for T$1 or "W1 . T T 7 V X O 1 r f T T The practice of the rule is occasionally extended, to cases where the Gutturals are not present; as i'TQID rTfi—IS?, where TV% stands for nE; also to Gutturals not pointed with Qamets; as Q^ii'irtn iforS^cnnr: , hd-h"dhu-sh~an. (6) In mixed syllables, losing their tone, Seghol in some cases takes the place of Pattahh; e.g. ^ , C32*TJ for £35*£; ^D& for ^3fr. The reason of this is, that Pattahh is better adapted to a mixed sylla- ble with the tone ; Seghol, to one without it. Consequently, (c) In a tone-syllable, we sometimes find Pattahh instead of Seg- hol ; e. g. "l^T , const. ]pj , not "jp.T . See Dec. V. of nouns, Parad. (d) A furtive vowel, at the end of words, causes the preceding vowel, if mutable, to conform. E.g. Qamets; as DBn^h instead of DJIjnin. Pattahh ; as ififa for *£^ ■ '^ m ' » asn 13a f° r n l^ . So in verbs, ^.""n for 1?A»T, fjnn for Spii. In Gutturals, nsnin for naniio. (e) Anomalous changes of the vowels occasionally occur ; proba- bly to mark the peculiar pronunciation of certain words. E. g. (l) Long vowels are put for short ones before the composite Shevas ; as ?£rin for -jib-Pi , ribW] for nbgtt , nryh for n rrn . (2) Short vow- els for long ones; as =nrs* for nhN , WrT; for sjafp . (3) Long vow- els are put for short ones arising out of composite Shevas ; as tohMj for tonNn, inbaep for inbDNn. All these under e are very unfrequent ; and it is difficult to decide, whether they should be at- tributed to mere accidental euphony, to negligence in transcribing, or to a principle of the language* §§ 143 147. VOWELS CHANGED BY ACCENTS. 65 Voicels changed by Accents. § 143. Pause accents, (and sometimes others, see § 149), not only occasion a shifting of the tone-syllable of words (§ 100. /), but very frequently occasion a change in the quantity of vowels; usually lengthening short vowels, but sometimes shortening long ones. § J 44. I. They lengthen short vowels ; changing Pattabh and Seghol (when used for Pattahh, § 142. d), into Qci- mcts ; and Qamets Hhateph into Hholem. E. g. D^b , d:£ ; ^ , !?gj3 j ^. (for !fcfc , § 142. d\ $% . So where they shift the tone also ; as nriN , nnN ; nny, nnv . So ntt'T vay-ya-molh, rio*} . Note 1. The praepositive and postpositive accents (§ 95), may af- fect vowels without standing on them, in the same manner as other accents which are placed on them ; e. g. Tyr 73 (instead of *]^?2) with Tiphha anterius, Ps. 97: 1 ; tesUT (instead of inS'^l) with Segholta on the ultimate; see § 146. [§ 145. II. They shorten long voicels. Verbs in pause* frequently exchange Tseri ultimate for Pattahh. E.g. *Hbrt, ;i itt*; ifltfft, *»p; fcti*"* , Wfl"*-; Y?" »*T~-- So with verbs, when they have suffixes; as D^QN , Dr'ftN; "jn^h^ , "jnT;" 1 . But the cases are numerous, in which rule II. does not have any influence. The whole thing is mere arbitrary euphony. § 146. A pause-accent on a word, which by declension has dropped the final vowel of the ground form (§ 135), restores that final vowel, and also lengthens the same if it be short. This takes place, (a) When such accent falls on the restored voxel; asriN-T, rrN-v, ground-form &■£; ^3)90, W»t3, ground-form }hx2 ; ^BB^, Vfup"; , ground-form Vbp*; ; n3>JDttT , W3TD? , ground-form JWM^ . (6) When it falls on the succeeding syllable ; as "p^.'V , instead of "P^RT i Joel 2 : 5 ; I'PTl' in3tead of rr^.i^i Joel 2 : 8 ; |*a%£ in - stead of J«Di£, Joel 2: 7." N. B. Both of these usages are very often neglected. & 147. Pause accents, falling on those persons of verbs ft m ^ Urn ^ * TV? (properly 17, § 280), which drop a letter and a vow- el, restore the letter as well as the vowel dropped, and affect the vowel, as in the foregoing section. * A word or oylluble is said to be in pause, wbon a pause-accent rests upon it. 9 60 §§ I I"--- (58. vowki.s OHANOBD BY AOCEMIOfc, ETC. E. g. !»B3 , "PCM , groand-fonn ~^; = ^ ; ? "-i """.r i ^ rnm "^ = ^3, $ 200. Note. § I UJ. Where no vowel has hem dropped) b p&use-i ccent (ins) Falling on simple Sheva penult, puts Seghol m it> place. E.g. CDO,D3^; ^3b», -3^. (//) Falling on a composite Sheva penult, substitutes the corresponding long vowel. E.g. i\h , "^N ; \bV;, n 5?n; cases with (•.••) do not occur. But the practice is not entirely uniform ; e. g. *>*}? ;, "H* ; ''SEh , *^~ . § 149. General Remark. The effect of pause-accents fa not uni- form. In a great number of eases, no change is occasioned by them. On the other hand, most of the Disjunctive accents, and even several of the Conjunctives, not unfrequently produce the same effect in pro- longing syllables, as the Pause-accents. For example, (a) Disjunc- tives ; Itib^ , TiS-J ; WHg,-WBi ft**?'-? \ Wrt ; IttjW; ":"!", ^•5 Ps. 5: 12. etc. (b) Conjunctives; as ">nr;n, "iJjnttlT; ^ — £ , "Ittjjj; Sjrona, 'qnsna; "*0£, n"C~, etc. The entire want of any regular system, in regard to the influence of the accents over the vowels, shews very clearly, that such influence belongs only to the occasional method of reading certain passages or words, and not to the csseyitial mutations of the language itself.] Voicels changed by accession and transposition. [§ 1 50. Forms of verbs ending in 1 , receiving an accessory pro- noun beginning with a consonant, and not having the tone upon it, drop the first vowel of the ground-form, if it be mutable, and restore the second, which had been dropped by declension, and (if it be short) lengthen it. E.g. nty, plur. int*, with suffix ^£tf9; sonasa?, ^ikwr ; § 151. Transposition is only occasional and euphonic. It belongs not to the rules of language. Instances of it are such as the follow- ing, viz. "3t-r for *h; , rvrri-js for fra^na , etc.] Vowels changed by position. [§ 152. The prefixes to words, consisting of one letter, varv their vowels, according to the nature of the words to which they are attached. Thus, («) The article 'ft (for rn § 162) has, (l) Usually, Pattahh followed § 152. VOWELS CHANGED BY POSITION, ETC. 67 by Daghesh forte ; e. g. ^tzzrj= -": b~ . (2) Before] the Gutturals N , 'J and 1 , it takes Qamets ; as "^\\n . ]"\~ , ':«1" . (3) Before I"i and n, Pattahh long is the more usual vowel; as *V~~ ■> T*"- (4) Before all the Gutturals, when they have a (garnets under them, the article usually takes Seghol ; see § 142. rr. (o) The Daghesh after the article is not only omitted before the Gutturals and Resh (§ 111), but usually omitted, also, before words beginning with 73 and ? having a simple Sheva ; e. g. IiSD^n for nOD"2~ , H4t?n for "UN*" . Note. When the article is preceded by the particles, 2 , 3 , b , it frequently suffers syncope (§ 108.6), and gives up its vowel to the par- ticles ; as trlbiaa for D?$3\8tt3, D3J3 for tSSTTS , ci-'r for irnnnb . But on the contrary, it frequently resists syncope ; as uSm? , etc. (b) The particles 2, 3, b, are appropriately pointed with Sheva simple. But,(l) Before the composite Shevas, they take the correspond- ing medial vowel ; e.g. pin? , "'bnb l°-hh"li, etc. (2) Before accented syllables, they usually take Qamets ; as T)Wb , n«0^b , Err . But this is confined chiefly to forms of the Inf. mood not in regimen ; to pro- nouns ; and to tone syllables at the end of a verse, or of a disjunctive clause. In other cases, the usual punctuation is Sheva. (c) The conjunction ") is appropriately pointed with a Sheva sim- ple. But, (1) Before Gutturals with a composite Sheva, it takes the corresponding medial vowel ; asTn^i. (2) Before N which would regularly have a composite Sheva, it sometimes takes a corresponding contracted vowel in which N quiesces ; as ETTjbNi for O^n^ip , see § 119. c. 1. (3) Before a tone-syllable it frequently takes Qamets; as -\ihi ITT, nt]2] . The usual cases of this nature, are before a Dis- junctive accent ; before a Conjunctive one, t retains Sheva. ( l) Be- fore a Sheva vocal either simple or composite, under a letter not a Guttural, and also before 1, 23, D, it takes Shureq ; as rsbl , nnTT, ^py^. 1 ! , rPaT, ifr-Xtf, fisngl. (5) Before Yodh with Sheva, it takes long Hhireq ; as Ti^i , "•JSpl . (G) Before the verbs rTrr and rrrr, it sometimes takes short Hhireq or Seghol ; as taiy^rT] , spft"] , rv."" 1 ■ {d) The interrogative T> changes its usual punctuation, (1) Before Sheva simple, it takes Pattahh; as niTTpri . (2) Before Gutturals with (garnets, it takes Seghol ; as Son" , is he wise ? (3) Before Gut- turals without Qamets, Pattahh and sometimes (garnets; ?Tbfitn , shall I go? QPiNn vosne? (4) It sometimes imitates the punctuation of the article before a letter with Sheva ; e. g. n:rizr: an tunica ? "^n-n viaene mcae? And even before a letter with a vowel, although very rarely ; as 3U"".~ an bonum erit . ? ] PART III. GRAMMATICAL STRUCTURE AND FORMS OF WORDS. § 153. Radical Words. The Hebrew and its cognate language.*, in their present state, exhibit a surprising degree of regularity and uniformity, in the construction and sound of the radical words. This circumstance forms a broad line of distinction between them and all the western languages. Almost all radical words, which with few ex- ceptions are verbs, consist of only three letters usually forming two syllables ; as ^rtt he reigned, yiN the earth. From such trilateral roots are derived the various forms of nouns and verbs, which are used to express case, number, gender, person, tense, etc. and the different forms of nouns, adjectives, particles, etc. From this generul principle of derivation as to nouns, etc. (which was commonly represented by the older grammarians as universal), are to be excepted, perhaps, a few words, which constitute the names of familiar objects ; e. g. 2N father, E3N mother, "1^ hand, etc. A few particles and primitive pro- nouns also are biliteral in their root, and perhaps not derived from any triliteral word. § 154. Conformity to the same principles. So extensively, in Hebrew, is the principle of inflection grounded on derivation from a triliteral root, that nouns which are primitive and biliteral, conform to the com- mon laws in their declension ; i. e. they are treated as though they were derived from triliteral roots. Thus SN by inflection becomes ■'S* =" | EaN , as if derived from E3/3N ; although £K seems to be a primitive. § 155. Biliteral roots. From some appearances in the Hebrew language, it is probable that originally it contained a greater number of biliteral roots, than at present; and that its triliteral forms were, in many instances, constituted by doubling the second radical of the root, or adding to it one of the vowel-letters, or the semi-vowel Nun. E. g. 3U^ and 2112 to be good, common root 2U . H2: and n'E to blow, com- mon root PI2. ^Dl , ^=17, iOw , ~r~ to thrust down, common root ^p7. In like manner, there are a considerable number of words in the Hebrew and its cognate dialects, in which two of the radicals are the §§ 156 1GI. GRAMMATICAL STRUCTURE OF WORDS. (59 same, while the third is quite different, and yet the meaning of all the words remains the same. E. g. The verb signifying to lick, is either 93>b , as?* , tM>r , Ci'b , PJ?b , yvb , or p'jb ; the letters *> being uni- form in all. But if biliteral roots were originally more numerous than at pres- ent, they had conformed to the common laws of the language at least as early as the written Hebrew now extant ; since the written lan- guage every where presents the triliteral forms, as principally consti- tuting the radical words. § 156. Quadriliteral and quinqueliteral roots are very rare in the Hebrew ; such as -23"}3 a fruitful field, QD13 to devour, ]:NbiB to be quiet. Those which exist, are formed by the addition or insertion of a letter or letters, to lengthen the triliteral root ; in the same manner as triliterals are formed from biliterals, as described above in § 155. § 157. The parts of speech in Hebrew are, the article, pronoun, verb (including the participle), noun, adjective, ad- verb, preposition, conjunction, and interjection; which will be treated of in their order. § 158. The proportional number of roots, in the various parts of speech in the Hebrew, may be thus arranged, (a) The verb is alto- gether most frequently primitive. (6) Only a small number of nouns are primitive, (c) The original pronouns, personal, demonstrative, etc. are all primitive, {d) Particles are some of them primitive, and some are derived from other parts of speech. The Hebrew has very few particles. Grammatical structure of words. § 159. There are two ways in which case, number, gender, per- son, tense, &c. may be expsessed in any language. First, by the in- flection of the original words or ground-forms; and secondly, by affix- ing other words or particles, which serve to express relation. The Hebrews, as the sequel will shew, made use of both these methods. § 160. Composite words, i. e. compound verbs, nouns, etc. which the Greek, Latin, and other western languages exhibit, are not usual in the Hebrew. Words properly composite are found in Hebrew, almost exclusively in proper names; where, however, they frequently occur. § 161. The Hebrew also differs from the languages of the west, in the mode of writing many of its particles, and the oblique cases of personal pronouns. These, instead of standing by themselves, are commonly united with the verbs, nouns, etc. to which they belong. or on which they depend, so as to form with them but one word. &<\ ](\'l — 166. ARTiri.F.. I'ROMH'NS. OF THE ARTICLE. § 102. The Hebrew has but one article, viz. pfj, com- monly written 'H . It corresponds in a good degree, but not universally, with the definite article the in English. § 163. Jn writing, the Lamcdh of the article T~ is al- ways assimilated to the first letter of the noun to which it is prefixed, and expressed by a DagJiesh forte in that let- ter, or by some equivalent. E. g. ^D?3fl the rain, instead of ""itttt r" ; ^"JN^J the man, instead of S^N bn, etc., § 107. I. 6. § 111. For the various pointing of the article, see § 152. a. Note. That the original form of the article was bn , seems prob- able from the form of the Arabic article, Vn , whose b is frequently assimilated, in the same manner as the Hebrew. The only difference is, that in Hebrew the assimilation, or some equivalent for it, is uni- versal ; in Arabic, it is usual only before the solar letters. OF PRONOUNS. § 164. I. Pronouns personal. The Hebrew is rich in personal pronouns; not only distinguishing the masc. and fern, of the 2d and 3d persons, when they stand as the subjects of verbs, but possessing forms appropriate to the oblique cases which follow verbs, nouns, or particles. The following table exhibits the Nominative case, or ground-fctrm, of all the personal pronouns. Singular. Plural. com. 7, *3», ""ifij We,yTi)j(, Vn\ 13*. mas. thou, nntf , Ditt ye, EFIN . fern, thou, f]», Vtt| ye, }T)&, ~:FN. mas. he, fcttlTI, they, uH, fi 1~ . fern, she, N^H, &OH (hi) they, Wli »"'i~- [§ 165. (a) In pause, the pronouns assume the forms, "^N , MPwS* , nN, etc., § 144. (6) The N in KVt, N\-J, (JOT! hi), is paragogic, § 125. a. and otiant, v> 57. (c) The form 13PJ seldom occurs: WK . §§ 166 — 170. pronouns. 71 only in Jer. 42: 6. (d) In n:r.N , mih , SlSJTj , the !f_ is paragogic, § 1 25. 6. (e) The forms HFN , FN , "WN {at), Dn&j , ]FN , are proba- bly for HFCN, PIN , "TOB, DR3«, fljaJJ, § 107. a. (/) Nin (fa), is anomalous, (probably the older form of the pronoun) ; the marginal rending or Keri (§ 103) always supplying the form NTi , as a correc- tion. It is found only in the Pentateuch. Note. The ground-forms of tbe pronouns above, though general- ly designating only the Nominative case, do sometimes stand in other cases, § 468.] § 166. The oblique cases of personal pronouns, in He- brew, are represented by fragments of primitive pronouns united with verbs, nouns, and particles, so as to make one word, instead of being written separately as in the wes- tern languages. For an account of these pronominal Suffixes, as appended to the above mentioned classes of words respectively, see for verbs § 309 seq., for nouns § 336, for adverbs § 405, for prepositions § 408, and for interjections § 410. § 167. II. Pronouns demonstrative. Of these there are but few in the Hebrew, viz. Singular. Plural. Masc. Jit, fern. JTINT, com. r?*!? this. Com. !"ITtf these. i"i"bn, "IT, IT, this. 78 these. Note. The usual forms are those in the first line ; those in the second, are unusual. For nNT, the form til is sometimes used ; once TTVn, Ezek. 36: 35. § 168. III. Pronouns relative. The only proper one is "ViENl j who. which, what, of every gender and number. [Note. This pronoun is contracted mostly in the later Hebrew, by dropping the N* (§ 108. a), and assimilating the *"i (§ 107. c) ; as BtV$ instead of ib T«DM . The X (the apocopate form) lias various pointing, according to the nature of the word which follows; e. g. "i? , 'ttj, '£?, U9 , as ari;i! Ecc. 3: 18. § 169. The demonstratives. T"\ and *,T , are occasionally employed as relatives.] § 170. IV. Pkdnoi ns interrogative. These are two, viz. h £3 who, and n£ (fi/Q, HE) what. Note, before a Daghesh euphonic, the form rt>2 is used, as ^V~"^ ; before a Guttural with (garnets, r>72 , as 'VSbtA rlJj . n ^ 171—173. VKRBS. OF VERBS. § 171. Classification. They are distributed into (a) Primitive, i. e. underived from any other words; e.g. "fr^ to reign* aijj* to sit, and so of most of the Hebrew verbs. (6) Derivative, i. e. such as come from primitives by the accession of formative letters. Such are all the conjugations of verbs excepting the first or Kul. (c) Denom- inative,!, e. those which are formed from nouns, {de nomine); e.g. p~K to live in a tent, from ^~'k a tent. Note. These divisions concern tlie origin of verbs, but not the mode of inflection. A great number of verbs is comprehended in the class b, while very few belong to the class e. § 172. Inflection. In respect to inflection, verbs are divided into regular and irregular. Regular verbs are those which are analogous in their inflections, and preserve through all their changes their original triliteral root. Verbs irregular are either pluriliteral, or those which drop or assimilate one or more of their radical letters. § 173. Conjugation, {a) The term conjugation, in grammars of the Greek, Latin, and some modern languages, is employed to denote different classes of verbs, which are distinguished from each other by certain peculiar characteristics of form or inflection, and which are therefore said to belong to the first, second, third, etc. conjugation. In this sense, the Hebrew might be said to have several conjugations ; but this word is not so used by Hebrew grammarians. (b) In Hebrew grammar, the word conjugation is applied to dif- ferent forms of the same verb, and corresponds in some degree with the term voice in Greek grammar, although it is employed in a much more extensive sense. The passive and middle voices, in Greek, ex- hibit the original idea of the verb under certain modifications, or with some additional shades of meaning. So the property of all the conjuga- tions in Hebrew, is to vary the primary meaning of the verb, by uniting with it an accessory signification. The Hebrews were thus enabled to express, by means of their conjugations, all those various modifica- tions and relations of verbs, which, in most other languages, are ex- pressed either by composite verbs, or by several words. Note. The most convenient arrangement is, to make as many conjugations as there are forms of verbs, original and derived. These are presented to view in the following section. * Literally, he reigned. The Infinitive in English is used in this work, merely for the sake of brevity, in preference to the Praetcr wbjch would exactly correspond to the Hebrew root. §§ 174 — 176. verbs ; peculiar conjugations. 73 § 174. The Usual Conjugations of the verbs are as follows, ACTIVE. PASSIVE AND REFLEXIVE. Name. Form. Name. Form. 1. Kal Voj? 2. Niphal Vpp: 3. Piel ^"Jp 4. Pual } ^X rjp 5. Hipliil ^ttpfi 6. Hophal 7. Hithpael VuJp_nn [§175. Peculiar Conjugations. The conjugations fre- quent only in certain classes of verbs, are, 0) 1 Poel nniD. 2 Poal 221D. 3 Hithpoel bbSffit] ■ These conjugations are found in (he class named Ayin doubled (r"), and very rarely appear in any other. They take the place of Piel, Pual, and Hithpael, as these appear in regular verbs; see § 262. (b) In verbs Aijbi Vav (l2 § 269), forms similar in ap- pearance are common substitutes for the regular Piel, Pual, and Hithpael ; viz. 1 Polcl D'Tip . 2 Polal Dfilj?. 3 Hith- poiei Btnpnn. . Note. Although the appearance is the same, in the two clashes. a and 6, yet the mode of formation is very different. E. g. 32^0, etc. comes from the root 23D , and is formed by inserting i between the two Jirst radicals; while C30ip, etc. comes from t31p, and is formed by doubling the last radical. Most of (he lexicons and grammars name the class 6, Pilel, Pulal, etc., because, in regular verbs, the shape of these conjugations would be like b^pjS , bbtip , etc. But as these conjuga- tions scarcely have an existence in regular verbs, (and have not even a similar corresponding one in the Arabic, excepting the very rare and peculiar conj. IX. and XI.), so it is much better, for the sake of perspicuity, to name them as I have done here. A potiori nomen Jit ; a good rule in making out artificial denominations of this nature. § 170. Unusual Conjugations. Most of these are of very rare occurrence ; and several of them occur not more than two or three times, in the whole Scriptures. They are as follows ; \ iz. 1. Hothpaal or Iluthjiaal, btSDnri . biEjSrin, both passive forms of Hithpael. Comp. Pual in § 17 1. They are of very rare occurrence. 10 74 ^^1"~ — ^'- vi.nns ; unusual roNjr<;\r lONe. (2) Pilel active, and Pulal passive, bbt3|3 , b^0j3 , (romp. § 175. fc. Note), occurring only in live or six cafes, in regular verbs. (:$) !'ilj>rl active, and Polpal passive, formed ont of verbs 93 and 13> , by repeating the first and last radicals; e. g. from r'rj conn- : baba ; from bl3, bsbs and bsbS. These are equivalent to the forms, from the same verbs, described in (j 175. a. b. ( I) A form Tiphel seems to have been in existence; e.g. fl — F from n'~}~ , bs^R , from ran . Once we have a Ptoel form ; e. g. in Note. Some others are made liy some grammarians ; but they arc disputed ones, and it is of lit t lo or no importance to the student to insert them liero, as his lexicon will give him the requisite information, vj 177. Plurilateral verbs, i.e. whose root consists of more than three letters, take the following forms ; viz. UX}~\3 , ic~;c , ]£tt33 - ac- tive ; b3"13 , 2iBCn , L »53"1'3rl , passive.] § 178. No one verb in Hehrcw exhibits all the conjugations above mentioned ; and very few exhibit all the usual ones in § 174. Neith- er does the active or passive meaning always attach to the forms, under which it Is ranged ; as will be seen in the sequel. Predomi- nant usage directs the classification of the respective conjugations. § 179. The names of all the derived conjugations are borrowed from the various forms of the verb -V2 , which the old grammarians used in constructing the paradigms ; and are merely the modes of pro- nouncing those several forms. The first conjugation is called b£ QdZ, or, (as it is usually written,) Kdl, i. e. light ; because it is not, like the derived forms., increased by the addition of any letter to the root. The other names are formed thus ; "SKA'i^A-ydl ; ri;3 Pi-Vil, Da- ghesh forte being excluded by the Guttural ; H'S Pv-'Jal, Daghesh be- ing excluded; VWDrT Hlph-Vll ; -?Erj Hbph-'Jdl ; r^snn Hlth-pd-V'el, Daghesh excluded ; and so of the unusual conjugations. § 180. The third person singular, of the Praeter tense in A*a/, is regarded as the root of all verbs ; one class (verbs l") excepted, whose root is the triliteral Infinitive, as Sip. § 181. («) Kal is generally active ; but it may be either transitive or intransitive. (6) The root has three different lorras, distinguished by the final vowels, Patthah, Tseri, and Hholem. E. g. ~l~ t Z to visit, iPT to be old, and *}X* to fear. Note 1. The form with final Pattahh is generally active, and tran- sitive ; but sometimes it is intransitive, as b^sl to be great. The other two forms are usually intransitive, but sometimes otherwise. §§ 182, 183. verbs ; signip. op the conjugations. 75 Note 2. Some verbs in Kal have a passive meaning; e. g. ■jru , to inhubit and to be inhabited ; tC^'J to elevate, and to be elevated. § 182. (a) Nu'hal is formed by prefixing Nun to the ground-form of the verb, and dropping the first vowel of the same ; e. g. ;?Dp , V ZJp D . Note. The real prefix seems to be Z~ ; (in Arabic, it is :n) . In the Infin. this developes itself; e. g. bUj?!"T = -!?.{•£*"! • Nan being as- similated in the first form, § 107. a. The appropriate pointing of the prefix Nun, in the Praeter, would be Sheva (') ; bat short Hhireq is necessarily substituted for it, § 137, or an equivalent vowel in case the first radical is a Guttural, § 138. (6) Significations of Niphal. (l) It is passive of Kal, when Kal is transitive. (2) Passive of Piel, or of Hiphil, when they are transi- tive and Kal is intransitive. (3) It is often a reflexive form, correspond- ing to the middle voice of the Greeks ; as T3'^n watch thyself !*N"~: he asked for himself. These are the usual meanings. (4) It also has an intransitive sense, and often expresses passion or affection; as fib n: , he was sick, Kal, r£)l the same ; h38M to sil — 1>*. M.lins; SK.MF. or THE CONJUGATIONS. § 184. Pual is simply the passive of Piel, and is chararfrri»ed by a Da^liosli in the middle radical, (or a compensation for it when it is excluded), and by Qibhuts short or (garnets Hhateph in the tir-t -\l- lable ; e. g. ttgj3 , or b"4^ qbtlaL § 180. (a) Hiphil prefixes He, and inserts Yotl'n. before the tWQ lasl radicals; e.g bQp, Hiph. ^Wfl. (6) Significations of HiphiL (l) It is causative of Kal ; as BV to be holy, 2dRDtt instead of ^aOnTl to — IttiB — -i'^rt — -?.~T~ * — P"^ — f~^h — r~-ir)~ In the latter case (£), the n is not only transposed, but changed into its cognate U . This case, however, is very unfrequent in He- brew, though common in the cognate languages. (2) Before a cognate letter, the n is more commonly assimilated. E. g. 1?7PJ instead of "12-n- from 12% "inert — "vnurin — *inO| c-:n- — QS^*i — DJgin (3) The same usage of assimilation is occasionally extended to some other letters; e. g. ^ 188 — 193. verbs ; sn;nif. of the conjugations. 77 With T, as ^2Tn instead of I^Ttn from not — s, as rt&sn — *o.5 n .n — "^ — D, as N2:n — N?.;^ 1 ! — N^ — T, as ttgv-lSj — D»^1xVfi| — C r n(§110.) — aj, as DJgiien — DJaisnpi — dtjsj] (c) Significations of Hilhpael. (l) It is reflexive of Piel ; as ~~_p_ to sanctify, '£ r }.Ji.r}~ he sanctified himself. (2) It signifies to make one's self be or do, or to exhibit one's self as being or doing, that which the verb in its ground-form signilies ; e. g. CSrrnr: to show one's self cunning, from CDh to be wise ; b^an.""! to behave one's self proudly, from 5:15 to be great ; n?^Tnn to represent one's self as sick, from ~\~ to be. sick. Also with some slight modifications, as D2nnn to think one's self wiie, from DlSrl to be wise; ^tT:r~, to make one's self to be sought, i. e. to conceal one's self, from tDDh to seek ; "Ji^nr! to ask favour for one's self properly to make one gracious, from "j2ft to be gracious. These are the leading significations. (3) It is sometimes the passive of Piel; as *V£2 to number, IJtzr'r] to be numbered. (4) It is also intransitive ; as PjiNriFt to be angry. (5) It is not unfrequently active and transitive; as ~vaPf£r| to keep or ob- serve, viz. laws, statutes, etc. I 'iiiisnal Conjugations. [§ 188. Poel, Poal, and Hithpoel, are merely substitutes for the Daghesh'd conjugations, § 175. a; as are also Pole!, Polal and Hith- polel, § 175. 6 ; and likewise Pilel and Pulal, § 176. 2. Note. When the regular Piel, Pual, etc. of verbs Z'J and W are employed, together with the forms just mentioned, there is generally some slight distinction of meaning between them, such as is described in § 185. b. Note. § 189. Pilpel and Polpal are only another form for Piel and Pual, § 17G. 3. § 190. Hothpaal and Huthpaal agree in meaning with Hithpael, when it is used in a passive sense. Noto. The olhei unfrequenl conjugations nave generally an intensive signification. Thesisw rilittral verbs arc low, ami of various significations.] § 191. The moods and tenses of verbs are very limited in Hebrew. The moods are the Indicative, the Imperative, and the Infinitive; the tenses are the Praeter and Future. § 192. The number, person, and gender of verbs, are expressed with unusual fulness and accuracy. § 193. The ground forms of all verbs are (l) The Praeter, 3 pers. singular ; which is the ground-form of the past tense and the present participle. (2) The Infinitive construct , which is generally regarded as the ground-form of the Future and Imperative. 78 §§104 — 107. vbbbi: pormatiom <»i pbabtbb i r< Bat In varha with Futnre Pattahh, the Iailn. cooa true i Lakei Hholen regularly; which aoanii to bfl :u variance with thin principle : m leut, it i* in exception [a large i •• maxim «» jut laid down, tee $ 211 8 | Iho Inf. conat. aa a ground-form. ii t of Kal, the tnf. may well be takan m the ground-form of the Fats and Imp. in nil the conjugation | and oven the participial i i Piejj Pu.il, Hiphil, Hoplial, and Elitbpeel, are derived from the Inf. bn in tin- lame • onjugalions. § 191. The Praeter is declined by adding to the root, (the 3d pors. sin g. masc.), fragments of pronouns, in order to designate person and gender; e.g. Si.')t3p3. by prefixing - 2 from WK. [§ 198. The praeformalive affixes to the Fut., would appropriately have a Sheva for their vowel-pointing, (as in Piel, Pual, Hithp. they have), but this receives various modifications, according to the point- ing of the letter which follows; see §§ 136 — 139. § 199. In the derived conjugations, (Niphal, Hiphil, Hophal, and Hithpael), the pracjbrmatives of the Fut. almost always expel the characteristics of the conjugations, and transfer their vowel points to themselves ; e. g. Fut. Niphal iup* 1 instead of ^'C^'n'' from Inf. bttpn — — in verbs t'J Dip"] — Hiphil -^p.I — — in verbs 12 O^p* 1 — Hophal bop" 1 — — in verbs 1J> Dj5 ! P — Hithpael ?3>j3TP — biprr ^qprji cp ; -; r^pnn" 1 IV mpn § 200. The final vowel of the Fut. may be, (like that of the Praeter and Inf.), either Hholem, Pattahh, or Tseri. E.g. With Hholem, (which is by far the most usual form); as i't3j? , i . With Pattahh, (which is common in intransitive verbs, having a Praeter with Tseri, and also in verbs with a Guttural in the final syllable, and some others) ; as TaD"? , 9&BP , NiZtt? = JM£tt*» , *>flp ;= b»3* , etc. With Tseri ; as 1S8P , 3^^. , ^PP = ]pr , etc. 80 §§201 — 20-1. vkkhs ; scnj. ani> opt, MOOOB, §201. T%e Imperative, follows the same analogy as the Future, taking the same vowels m it- final syllable, and for the like reasons. It is declined l)j means of Buffix-frag- ments, like those in the Praeter and Future. Note. The Imp. h;is only the 2d persons; when an Imp. sense for the 1st and 3d persons was needed, the Hebrews employed those persons of the Fut. tense. § 202. The Participles, in Kal, are both active and pas- sive; in the other conjugations there is but one form, which follows the conjugation in respect to its meaning. E. g. Kal, 3rp3 scribens, SWriS scriptum. But in verhs with final Tseri and Hholem, the part, present retains the form of the Praeter, as Praet. K^JD, part. Nra ; Praet. "iV , part. SiST; so in verbs 17, Praet. DP-., part. DP. In Niphal the same principle prevails, with a slight variation ; as Niph. !?tap3 , part. bOP3 , i. e. with final Pattahh prolonged. Note 1. Intransitive verbs usually have but one form of the parti- ciple in Kal, which may have either an active or passive meaning, as the case requires. Note 2. Beyond Niphal, all the participles are derived from the Infinitive form of their respective conjugations, by prefixing 23 , and dropping the characteristic I"» where it occurs; e. g. btp.PH, bEptt, V'tapfc , ?Vpn , -t?,P.na . In the passive forms, the final Pattahh of the ground-form is prolonged. Any departures from this principle will be noticed, where they occur. Note 3. Participles are declined in the same manner as adjec- tives, having sing, and plur. forms, of the masc. and feminine gender. Subjunctive and Optative Moods. § 203. The Hebrew has neither of these in separate, regularly defined forms, as in Greek, (§ 191); but it employs in the room of them, and to a certain extent, peculiar forms of the Future tense. Note. In the Arabic, the usage of the Fut. in this way. is tar more defined am) general, than in the Hebrew. In Syriac and Chaldee. the usage does not at all appear. The Hebrew use is a bind of medium between the two. as it is somewhat frequent, and yet far from being general § 204. The variations of the Future, for the purpose of express- ing an Optative or Conditional «ense. are made. {a) By paragoge of ~_ and sometimes T>-; e. g. Fut "12TwX , with paragoge, fl'ja'T** ; T?.:** , n"vajN . {b) By a kind of apocope ; which consists in general, in rendering §§205 — 207. vfrrs; parag. and apoc. futiri:. 81 shorter the final long vowel ; ami in some cases, in casting away the final letter and vowel ; e.g. ft3j!£i a P 0C - -V.)"- 5 TClS* , apoc TCP* j 7l\l' , apoc. ti* • § 205. The Paragogtc Future is, for the most part, con- fined to the Jst person, singular and plural. The 2d and 3d persons rarely exhibit it. It is employed, («) As an Optative; e. g. "nr:N let me die. {b) To express ex- citement, urging, assurance, strong determination ; as !"DbJ* / must go, PiTrtt let me rise up, n"l3*1fit I am resolved to speak, robs let vs go, etc. (c) After the particles ]yob , "l , it expresses ihc latter part of con- ditional sentences ; as FHSON *i":b , so that I may declare ; TC-^".^ , lhat we may cat. {d) In some cases, it is used in this last (conditional) sense, where the particle is omitted. Note. Vav conversive (§ 208) frequently occasions the paragogic form of the verb to he adopted, particularly in the later Hebrew ; but not with any speciality of meaning; as ^;" , 1 7:i^■' , and I said ; comp. § 200. Note 1 . § 200. The Apocopate Future, on the other hand, is mostly confined to the 2d and 3d persons, rarely making its appearance in the first ; e. g. 3d pen. 3il pors. Keg. verb Hi ph. b*I3p2 apoc. bfip* Verbs vj Kal m*:^ — na* Hiph. nia^ — n*:^ Verts ro Kal nbs* — irr (br) Piel iiiil — ii". (-*7) Hiph. rf£p — \*i C-i;) This Future is employed (a) To express command, wish, prohibi- tion ; e. g. nn^^ , let him destroy ; "iFCn rN , hide not. {b) After "J in a conditional sentence ; as 12*1 , that he may tell, (c) After the par tides of negation, Nb, ~N; as FjOTD iNr , thou shalt not add ; "irrFi "rN, thou shalt not be preferred. [Note I. Vav conversive (§ 208) connects itself very often with such apocopate forms, but frequently without any speciality of mean- ing; e. g. b^p;*; , and he divided. Comp. § 205. Note ; also § 101. b. Note 2. The apoc. Future is confined to conjugations and forms, such as the table above exhibits. All Futures do by no means admit it. Note 3. The apocopate Futures, in poetry, and in the later He- brew, are not always of special significancy, but are often employed as the common ones.] § 207. The Imperative, like the Future, has both para- 1! 3d pen. 2d pers. -*upn apoc. bvP.F. . man — nbJj. n*an — nan. n^n — r;~ (rsn). rrran — ban (r^n). rrrsn — **9 (::-). BS §§ftl)H — 210. Villus ; 11111:1: \NI> I'ltAKTI'.lt WITH VAV. gogic and apocopate forms, which give intensity to tin: meaning. E. g. Paragogic ; as *f»ti , rnTrii ; dip, r.E'p; *»*5 , rt*l»C . .7- pocopute ; as bttpr; (for b^p.") ; so nVa , apoc. '-■: ; '-n?: , apoc. ; ": ; ]siip apoc. ofnjyBiO, |4$^j3 apoc. ofn:N~ip. Future with Vav conversive. § 208. Vav with Pattahh prefixed to the Fut. tense, and followed by a Daghesh forte, is called Vav conversive ; because its usual etfect is to convert such Future into a Praetcr, in respect to meaning. E. g. "IftN he said, also ^1338**1 and he said, or, he suid. ]f the prae- formative letter of the Fut. be K , the Daghesh is omitted, and the vowel lengthened ; as VojSNrt , § 1 11. § 112. If the praeformative let- ter of the verb have a Sheva simple, Daghesh forte is usually omitted after the Vav ; e. g. bBj3?2 , § 73. Note 3. [Note 1. Vav conversive is often connected with the paragogic 1 pers. Fut., § 205. Note ; also with the apocopate 2d and 3d pers. Fut., § 206. Note 1 ; but without giving an Optative or Subjunctive meaning to them. Note 2. Vav conversive commonly (not always) makes the Future Mild, and consequently shortens the final vowel if it be long, § 101.6. Note 3. Vav conversive is probably a fragment of the verb rn~ to be. The first letter is dropped, (as it commonly is in Syriac), and the fragment !"P is united to the Future by assimilating the r:, (as in JTp3 = rrr-ntt) ; so that tbj?«1 == FtJjf^ r^- it was [thai] he killed, i. e. he killed. So the Arabians make their Imperfect, only they write out the verb of existence in full ; and so the Syrians, except that they employ the participle of the verb of existence.] Praeler with Vav. § 209. Vav prefixed to the Praetcr, is merely a con- junction. But it often gives to the Praetcr, the sense of a Future, because it connects it with a preceding Future or Imperative. Note. As Vav conversive, prefixed to the Future, retracts the tone (^ 208. Note 2) ; so, on the contrary, Vav joined to the Praeter, usually throws the tone forward, as ^PH?"? 1 ^.1^1 -> § 10 '- a - § 210. General remark on the tenses. The tenses in Hebrew are 211,212. RF.rnx.vri VERBS TRANSITIVE. S.'J real Aorisls, capable of every variety of meaning as to designation of time. See this fully developed in the Syntax, § 503. § 501. Paradigms of Verbs. [§ 211. Remarks applicable to the Paradigms in general, i.e. to all the different classes of verbs. (a) Paragogic letters are often suffixed to some of the forms ; e. g. (1) Nun, to persons ending in =1 or \_ ; as 1 ! Hjv>.'V instead of 'HJS'V, "PP2"PI instead of n j53*lPi; rarely to the Praetcr, as yi9"}* instead of WVJ; see § 109. c. § 146. b. (2) He, usually to the Put. and Imp. active ; § 204. § 205. § 207 ; rarely in the Praeter, as nnn.^ for JVU3; Niph. Praet. fern. ~Nbs: , with rr_ parag. nnNre: ; Hiph. fern. rrJOZMri , with parag. nnNShr: . (3) Jlleph, paragogic or otiant, rarely : as 'obrj , NTDrr] the same ; so MiBS? for 1iZ)3* , § 125. a. (4) Participles sometimes take He or Yodh paragogic, especially the lat- ter, when they are in regimen; as mN"ib " , b" , 2Ui - :r; . Sometimes the Inf. mood takes it; as Tyajlttb . Also the Praeter 2d pcrs. fern., as (/>) Forms with Quiescents are sometimes dcfcclirrli/ written, § 63. E. g. ha« for "nJMJ , T,ZV for WT^ (comp. § 122. l) ; hut this usage is rare. Oftener "| is written for n: ; as ■JUJaFl for r;:"i';n. Sometimes n_ for \-]_; as PfifH^ for "VIS*]* , tfSS for'Ti^y , etc. (c) The prepositions a , 3 , b , prefixed to the Inf. of Niphal, some- times (not always) expel the n characteristic, and stand in its place ; as bUj?2 for btt^rl? ; comp. § 199. (d) Mem praeformalive in participles is sometimes (rarely) omit- ted ; as 'rrjvb for n|?:3 , Dttipna for cxnpntts , etc.] REGULAR VERBS TRANSITIVE.* NOTES ON THE PAUADIC.M. The student is Brat of all to commit Paradigm I. of the Verbs. The following nalei "ill ^n" to explain variations and anomalies. The Paradigms aro, lor convenience' sake, thrown together at the end of the (jrammir. [§ 212. Aotcs mid Explanations, in respect to Paradigm I. of t he verbs. * Some of the verbs here treated of ate in'raiuitive also; but in general il ia Otherwise. A potiori nomtn fit. 84 { 2J2i fBRJM : v<'i U "V k m . 'I'll. i learnei » ill be careful i" note, tbal il"- lone i- "" the ultimate, i . »l! eeaet where il i- sol markc.l with an >t ovei tin- pnnntt. Partifiulot euro nt the outlet, will enable him alwafl 10 accent tii<> vri> ; rightly, wilb< nt aoj mm Mr. Kai.. (I) The example -3~), exhibits the Fat. with Pattahh, (fa- miliarly- called Fut .'?) ; btit there are very few verhs with such a Future, unless the last Bjllable has a Go tt oral in it, or the verh be- longs to the classes with final Tseri or Hholem in the Praeter ; §181.6. (2) The Inf. of 23"} is Z3n ; and so in other cases of the like na- ture ; which seems not to agree with the idea of its hem? the ground- form of such Futures and Imperatives as take Pattahh; § 193. 2. (3) Other forms of the Infinitive, besides those in the Paradigm, are, (n) Inf. absolute, !:t3J5 (Vav omitted). Inf. construct, biup (Vav fulcrum only), ri33 . It h:\sfemirtine forms also, though rarely; e.g. like fi'-jcp , ^:* c r. i ^-.^k ) (-^T-^ i ' i,Opn ; some the one exclusively, and some the other. No actual case of the Inf. construct occurs in this conjugation. In a very few cases, the i~, characteristic of tho Conjugation n- mains after the Pracformative, e. g. rnJPSpha for niTSpn ; BO in Hiph. nnin^ for -"li" 1 , verb frr . § 218. Hithpael. (l) The end syllable with Pattahh i* frequent here ; which, in Pause, of course makes Qamets ; aatt^Tpni"] . anjjrjil . (2) In the second and first persons, (where the usual vowel between the second and third radical is Pattahh, as in the Paradigm), if the tone is thrown off from this penult syllable, it occasionally takes Hhircq in- stead of Pattahh ; "'rr.p-^nrn , Dr.'i'r^nrp . (3) Before Maqqeph, the forms with Tseri of course shorten it, as it is pure and mutable; e.g. rti — pz-nrr. (4) Nun parag. usually retains and prolongs the Pattahh, when that vowel is used ; as l":Vr:»~!r:. (5) Daghesh forte in the middle radical, is sometimes omitted here, as in Piel and Pual ; e. g. ^pcrT , Judg. 20: 15, (for *"~2rr), the Pattahh being prolonged as a compensation. So TipEnri (passive form of Hithpael), Num. 1 : 47. 2: 33, et al. § 219. Besides the conjugations of the regular verbs here noted, Pool and Poal, and Pilel and Pulal occur; but they are exceedingly rare. E. g. of the former, are •vr^iuj and ii'ysi , part. Dfi'i&fi Job 9 : 15, 1 wVr;: (for so it should be pointed) Ps. 101 : 5 ; of the latter, r'rs:. REGULAR VERBS INTRANSITIVE. NOTES ON THE r-ARADIGMS. § 220. The 3d pers. sing. Praeter, is the principal one which ex- hibits a departure from the forms of the regular transitive verb ; as will be seen by inspection of the Paradigms. § 221. Verbs final H'nolem (of which there are not half a score), generally retain the Hholem in the derived forms; as lPrii n from n:p , "^Vs"' from bb^ ; but not always, as "T^d shd-khal-ti from b-~* . As the Hholem in these verbs is pure, so it is shortened when it loses the accent ; as pn.'.'n vtya-ghbr-(a. § 222. In the same manner, those few verbs, which retain Tseri in the derived forms, shorten it either into Hhireq or Seghol, when the tone is removed ; e.g. l\^ , ^'Vi'ir'! ! '**."£/ j D»2»1|?' • [Note 1. All the Futures are with Pattahh, unless the Praeter has §§ 223 — 226. verbs with gutturals. >7 two forms, A and E ; as }0"ij and ]3/iJ , Fut. only f$B* , as in the Para- digm. Note 2. In pause, the Tseri of verbs intransitive most frequently makes its appearance ; e. g. Ipl/t , and so often. In a number of cases, a pause accent makes the Tseri appear, which elsewhere does not ap- pear ; as "(S"^ , ]3;i; only in pause.] Note 3. Out of Kal, the intransitive verbs conform to the model of the transitive ones, and need no separate Paradigms. The whole number of them is very small ; and the cases of departure in inflection from Par. I., comparatively very few, even in those which do occur. Note 4. The verbs called intransitive are, in some cases, transitive. As before, a poliori nomcn Jit. VERBS WITH GUTTURALS. § 223. We have seen, § 179, that the verb ^jr© , (the example for Paradigms in the old grammars), is employed to give technical desig- nations to the various forms of verbs. Accordingly, as D is the first let- ter in this verb, 5> the second, and b the third ; so verbs with Gutturals may be denominated, S guttural, 9 guttural, b guttural, whose first, or second, or third radical letter, is a Guttural. Verbs Pr. Guttural. § 224. Where other verbs would take a simple Sheva. under the first radical, these more usually have a composite Sheva. This may be called, the smooth enunciation. E. g. *fa»;, fjcfr, pirr, n»y, Pfoa, pm, etc. Note. The Praeformative letters must have the short vowel which corresponds with the composite Shevas, in such cases; see § 139. This extends to the letters formative of conjugation, as well as of tense ; e. g. Niph. mgyj , Hiph. "PSSPJ , Iloph. IJMJH , etc. § 225. But often the Guttural retains Sheva simple : and then the vowel under the praeformative, etc. Is the same as it would be in case a composite Sheva had been em- ployed. This may be called the rough enunciation. E. g. Hon: , HT3.;: , !-jcn: , 'JJatt; ; instead of Son; or -io*r , Star or Sta>^ , ^2": or "75~: , ttJah^ or ti^fF . Only the verbs tt^tt and !"pn , make such forms in Pe Guttural as rsri* and rrrr . §220. When, in the course oi' inflection, a simple She- va comes immediately to follow a composite She\a under §§227,22*3. mm i> "\ \ : i.i.- !•:• <.i i i i i: \! . the Guttural, the Guttural assumes the corresponding short vowel ; see § 140. E.g. SH3MJ2 , not ^"i"^ , which would make an impossible syllable, § 42. § 140. So ^pN?. , not S|B0»; ; sHOJPI , not • 1 "'^"~ • § 227. Where the first radical would regularly ho doubled, (as in the Inf. Fut. Imp. of Niplial), hut this is prevented by it- tn'in^ a Gut- tural (§ 111), the preceding vowel is lengthened (§ 112), as the Para- digm shews. Note. In this respect, verbs Pe Resh agree with verbs Pe Guttural §111; e. g. 0%nn instead of O^n . §228. Notes on the Paradigm, (a) Km., (l ) Inf. const, receh ing prefix-prepositions with a Sheva, causes them to be pointed as the praef or /natives in the Future are ; e. g. "Vasb , r3Jp*"T , plur. ^HOrP. (o) Imperative with N, as PjDSt, THN. With n parag., aslltSN. Imp. fern. sing, "•oipil , "'THN . (6) Nifhal. The common vowel of the first syllable is of the Se- ghol class; e.g. 1^53, or (according to the rough enunciation) 2'rft?. . But in the Inf. absolute, with Hholem final, it is Pattahh (see a. 2. a- bove) ; as ^2^;: , "linya ; very seldom with Pattahh in other cases, yet sometimes so, as nN'2h: , Gen. 31: 27. Vav prefixed commonly occasions Pattahh. The increased Part, forms also receive it ; as cr "~. , Tiizbvz , E^^ri;: . In Est. 8 : 8, we find STPr:: , a Part, sui generis. (c) Hiphil. (l) Sometimes with the rough pronunciation, as T , cn~. Peculiar is nri'n . ^ 142. e. 1. Vav prefixed changes the composite §§ 229 232. VERBS AYIN GUTTURAL. 89 Sheva to the A class; e.g. ■'nEnnrp , i.e. it hastens the pronunciation of the first part of the word, because the tone is thrown forward. (2) Inf. abs. and constr. are sometimes interchanged in their usage ; e. g. "VaWJi Josh. 7 : 7, for Inf. absolute T^h ; ItMjb , Dent. 26 : 12, for Inf. const. T'toyb . (3) Future with rough enunciation, as TO** ; and so the Part, as T»q hJO . -pTTa is for "p!^. 7 ? , § 119. c. 1. {d) Hopiial. With rough pronunciation, ^"n ; also very rarely, StVstI , § 142. e. 1 ; Irnhn , Inf. abs. sui generis, Ezek. 16:4. Note. The Daghesh'd conjugations, (i. e. Piel, Pual, and Hith- pael), are regular, because they can never have a Sheva under their first radical. Verbs Ayin Guttural; Par. V. § 229. Where other verbs have Sheva simple under the middle radical, these of course take a composite She- va, § 49. § 230. Final syllables in the ground-forms of any of the conjugations, having Hholcm or Tscri in them, often (not always) exchange these for Pattahh. But the Inf. const, in Kal takes Hliolcm. E.g. Fut. p»P, rarely as d'n^; Piel an:,Drtt; Hiphil Imp. p*ntt, etc. Verbs Ayin Resh sometimes imitate this. § 231. As the conjugations Piel, Pual, Hithpael, cannot admit a Daghesh in the middle radical, they prolong the preceding vowel in cases where analogy would require one; in which verbs Ayin Resh imitate them ; § 1 1 1. § 1 12. [§ 232. Notes on the Paradigm, (a) Kal. (l) Inf. fern, as HDrTaj , HbJj.N ; also as nj3Hn , S1J3?^ § 142. e. 1. (2) Future, anomalous phi*J , § 142. e. I. (6) Piel. In the Praeter, middle N takes either Tseri or Hhireq long before it ; as ]NE , yND . Middle n , long Hhireq, as ]ir3 . Mid- dle h and 3?, long Hhireq, and rarely Tseri ; as ©113 , ^rjJJ , ^53 , Jis>n . Resh demands Tseri ; as T^2 . In the Future, Inf., Imp., and Part., middle N and 1 usually require Qamets before them ; as INtD"; , *p3 . But n, ft, ?, most commonly take Pattahh ; as yn^ Dh-O , ^'" , etc. (c) Pual usually compensates for Daghesh excluded, by a Hholem, as Vip? , ^na ; sometimes by Qibbuts impure, as yfn , D"1 . (ti) In Hithp., the vowel before the Guttural is varied, just as in 12 9t §§23U 238. VKRHS I.AMKDII OUTTIRAI.. the fut. Picl ; see above under b. The accent affects Qamets here, in a peculiar way; e.g. iF^ninn , instead of " , p'3n:nn , which is ex- plained by § 142. er, and § lit. 'fti'iK = y*'ina (§ 187. b. 3.), is an in- stance of Jlithpoci] Verbs Lamedh Guttural; Par. VI. § 233. Where by analogy the Guttural must have B Sheva, the vowel points are like those of the regular verb, Par. I. This appears by Par. VI. Note. The 2 pcrs. sing. fem. takes a furtive Pattahh under the Guttural ; e.g. fVatti instead of nyJDIS , § 52. 2. If the Pattahh under 9 here was a proper vowel, the pointing would be nsft'V , i. e. with n Raphe. Punctuation like Sp3M3 is very rare. § 234. Where the Guttural is preceded by 1 , *■ or l, _ immutable, it takes a Pattahh furtive, § 69. E. g. in the Iuf. absolute, in the Part. pass, of Kal ; in Hiph. through- out, where ^ is usually retained. The Inf. const, in Kal commonly follows the same usage, as gfetfj ; compare, in § 230, a similar punctu- ation as it respects the Hholem. § 235. In Kal, the Fut. and Imp. always take Pattahh; also the fem. Part. Segholate ; as r?12JD . § 236. All the forms with pure final Tseri, may retain it, and put a Pattahh furtive under the Guttural ; or substi- tute a real Pattahh in their stead ; e.g. £530, or Pfi©. Note 1 . The prolonged forms, i. e. such as the Inf. abs., the forms with a Pause-accent, etc. retain Tseri. The apocopate forms take Pattahh. Note 2. Verbs -lb frequently imitate this class of Guttural verbs. IRREGULAR VERBS. § 237. Under this class are included all those, in which any of the radical letters are either dropped, or assimilated, or become quiescent. § 238. These maybe most conveniently distributed, into (a) Those which are irregular Q, i.e. in their first radical, (§ 223). (b) Those which are irregular y, i. e. in their second radical, (c) Those which are irregular b , i. e. in their third radical, (d) Those which are irreg- ular D and b , i. e. in their first and third radical. §§ 239 24*2. IRREGULAR VERBS J PE ALEPH — PE YODH. 91 I. CLASS OF IRREGULAR VERBS. §239. These consist of verbs iXD, ^S, and "ID, i. e. whose first radical is either jtf , ^ , or 3 • Verbs Pe Aleph ; Par. VII. § 240. In most cases, verbs with N for their first radi- cal, belong to the class Pe Guttural, & being treated as a Guttural. The verbs belonging to the class now in ques- tion, are those in which !tt as first radical is quiescent. [Note. Of these there are only Jive, viz. ISK , rQN, rSN , "ISK , •TICK . Three more, viz. 3r?K , TftN , >]0N , sometimes exhibit a quies- cent N , and sometimes a guttural one; e.g. TrjiO, WW. For other explanations, see under Paradigm VII. § 241. Notes on the Paradigm, (a) Kal. (l) Future drops N quies- cent of the root in the 1st pers. sing., and retains only the N praefor- tnative, which designates the Jirst person; e.g. "15D& instead of "lENtf , thus avoiding the occurrence of two Alephs. (2) In a very few cas- es, the first syllable takes a Tseri instead of Hholem ; as finN; 1 (not nriN" 1 ) ; in *2-N , the Fut. has both forms, e. g. 1st pers. sing, nftN and ^~N • Note. Quiescent M here is not unfrequently omitted in writing; as P|Di for P1DN -1 , "HJSh for nnN 1 , etc ; see § 63. (3) Inf. const, from TEN , ibisr.for "iENlr, § 119- c. 1. Imp. once UBJJ for 3B», see § 119. d. 2. (6) Derived conjugations, (l) Niphal once as VrjN;:. (2) Piel ad- mits contraction ; as fcj^H for V\tii73 , nTP! for *T7Nn ; see § 118. Note 3. (3) Hiphil also admits contraction, in a little different manner; e.g. b"3n for b^fittS- Future, b ¥.***'- (with accent retracted § 129) instead of b^tf*] , Vta for pWj; see § 119. c. 1. Fut. once with Hholem, as nn^j* , Jer. 40: 8. Imperative, Vxrn for rfjfiti} , § 119. c. 1. (4) Hofhal, nr^i" 1 (l for N § 122. 2) for ^iT , like the con- tractions in § 119. c 1.] Verbs Pe Yodh ; Par. VIII. §242. These may be divided into three classes; viz. ( I) Such as have (originally) a Vctv for the first radical; e.g. Ip^sss^ 1 ). (2) Those whose first radical is proper- ly Yodh ; as 2D n . (3) Such as follow the analogy of verbs Pe Nun, in assimilating the first radical. 90 §§ 343 — -17. iKiti.(;. \ i.Kits ; it. BOOH, i. CLAM. Fir.it Clms of vi.tIh I'u Vo.lli ; Tar. VIII. §213. 0) In K;il inf., Put, and Imp, the fodh is for the most part dropped ; the Praeter and Part, are regu- lar. (b) In Niph., Hiph., and Hoph., the original 1 appears; but it is quiescent, except in the Inf., Fut., and Imp. INiphal, where it is moveable. § 244. The Inf., Fut., and Imp. of Kal exhibit two forms ; viz. one with final Tseri, and another with final Pattahh. (a) The forms with final Tseri take Tscri in the first syllable also, and more generally omit the Yodh ; as 2d*;, etc. in Par. VIII. [Note. The Fut. sometimes (rarely) retains the Yodh in the writ- ing of these verbs ; as 1st pers. sing. Fut. parag. !"Ob\X (from ft*), ^iV.". (from *ij^), with final Pattahh because of the Resh. With a Guttural in the final syllable, Pattahh of course takes the place of Tseri; as 2>"T , not gV . In the Inf. const, and Imp., Yodh disappears almost throughout, in the forms with final Tseri.] (6) The forms with final Pattahh more usually retain the Yodh in Inf. Imp. and Fut. of Kal, and the Fut. takes Hhireq prolonged in the first syllable ; as ■}&?, #1?, ^T1 • See in Par- VIII. Note. 1. Yodh quiescent is sometimes omitted here, in writing; as \TS? for Bin** , Ps. 102: 5, § 63. So WV for Ifc-j^ . Note 2. The Inf. constr. of the masc. form, is not analogical here. It takes Hholem ; as ttl* , "j'ii "^ . One would naturally expect Pattahh. §245. The derived conjugations, of both these species of verbs are alike ; and are as the model in the Paradigm. [§ 246. Some verbs ^2 take both of the forms above noted ; E. g. pagj , Imp. pt and pr; ; *\fc* , Fut. Tig*'] and 1^ •> also Tg^ • The lexicons mark such. § 247. Notes on the Paradigm. Kal. (a) The Inf. of the class Fut. £, has more usually the fern. Segholate ending, as in the Paradigm. With a Guttural, Pattahh of course is used ; e. g. r&\ (not n~\) from 3>V , § 113. But sometimes the apoc. masc. form is used ; as £- from 3>V ; fem. rYlb from nb^; with suffix, 'fltoffl (^ttj) from MJ" , ^irn from "JV , suff. state of the usual inf. forms, nauj, rrn , etc. (6) The Inf.. of the class Fut. A is regular ; see § 244. b. note. 2. §§248 — 250. IRREGULAR VERRS ; PE YODIT, t. II. CLASS. 03 Feminine forms are as ribh"] , from b?* ; HJJ'V from N"T . A form with Vav fulcrum, is \V&[ . (c) Future which has Tseri, is pure, so that it may he shortened ; as it is in Sttj*2, with tone retracted, § 129. With n parag., as ""V , rT3»*l*. Altogether anomalous is JH?.? . (d) The Imperative, (l) Of those with Fut. £, is commonly parago- gic ; as rVH , Tob ("?), from "n , ^b masc. forms ; so with rr_ parag., as ivn , masc. 2H , § 125. b. (2) The Imp. of the verbs Fut. A, reg- ularly retains its Yodh radical. (e) Niphal. (l) Future sometimes retains the Yodh, instead of exchanging it for the original 1 ; e. g. "i.^ , ibft** with retracted tone, § 129. It is peculiar, also, that the first pers. sing, here retains Hhireq (like the other persons) in its first syllable, as Sltt-lfit , '^ . Five others partake partly of the peculiarities of these verbs, and partly of the other classes, viz. ID" 1 , "ID" 1 , p^ , "1SF , TD" 1 . Note 2. Simonis and Eichhorn derive all the peculiar forms of this class of verbs, from roots 7D; whose derivatives are of the like forms. The question is one of etymology. It matters not for the student, which way it is decided. I follow the Lexicon of Gesenius, for con- venience' sake, rather than from conviction. The fulness of the Pa- radigm, supersedes the necessity of additional notes.] Verbs Pe Nun ; Par. XI. § 252. The peculiarity of these verbs is, (a) That whenever 3 (their first radical) would analogically take a Sheva, in the course of declension, etc., it more usually be- comes assimilated to the letter which follows, and is ex- pressed by a Daghcsh Jbrle. (b) That in the Inf. and Imp. of Kal, the Nun is some- times dropped, in the manner of verbs Pe Yodh. [In this case, the Imper. more commonly takes the parag. form, as aja , TVOi ; "jn , n:n . The Inf. commonly has a Segholate form, in cases of aphaeresis, i. e. where the first radical is dropped ; as n'wJ in the Paradigm. But apocopate forms in these verbs, either of the Inf. or Imp., are not frequent at all. These moods more generally preserve the radical : , even when the Fut. assimilates it ; e. g. Inf., Imp. Dp: , Fut. dpi ; Inf., Imp. y'n: , Fut. y"rp .] § 253. Verbs, whose second radical is a proper Quies- cent or a Guttural, exclude the peculiarities of verbs JD. The reason is, that the Daghesh (compensative of Nun) cannot be inserted in either of these classes of letters ; and therefore usage com- §§ 254, 255. IRREGULAR VERBS J PE NUN, ETC. 95 monly preserved the Nun before them. But in Niphal Praeter, where a Guttural is the second radical, and Nun would be repeated ifit were preserved, it is dropped, as D^: , not Drr:2 , the vowel in the first syl- lable being prolonged as usual, § 112. The verb n^;: more usually drops 5 in the Fat. of Kal ; as niY| , but also rihaft 2d person. In oth- er respects, the verbs above named are regular in respect to Nun. [§ 254. Notes on the Paradigm, (a) Kal. (l) Inf. const, like r,'-2J \ , occurs only in six verbs. Once 8*liB from Nb: , Ps. 89: 10. The reg. form, as 3>A3 , HX3 , Dp2 , is most frequent. Some verbs have both forms ; as V'C and nJPtJ . I find no example of reg. Inf. with final Pat- tahh. Fern, form with suffix, as IPX?* . (2) Future O is more frequent than ./?, in these verbs. Fut. E only in "jn: . Some verbs have both Fut. O and A, as 7iz , bl- . Some at one time retain, and at another omit 2 , in different examples of the Fut. ; as ^T: , "lis , etc. (3) Imp. like the Inf. seldom drops the radical 2 , § 252. 6. The apoc. forms are like *J3 , ba (before Maqqeph TB3), ^n from in: . (6) Niphal. (1) Praeter appears like Piel, because it drops the 2 of the root, and inserts a Daghesh, or prolongs the vowel ; as JttoJ , Piel and Niph. Nifi3 ; on:, Pi. and Niph. an2 , §253. Once with Hho- lem, as >ia2 . (2) Inf. abs. sometimes as ^^2 , Sp2n Ps. 68 : 3, "pn: tt Jer. 32 : 4. (3) Part, once as *rj'r-r— r , with suffix ~. (c) Hiphil very rarely retains the 2 ; as iFFCrl , rs:V . So in Ho- phal, sipPDtt . The usual vowel here is short (^ibbuts, as in the Para-" digm. Note. The verb fi^b imitates "jD in Kal ; see Lexicon. The verb ■Jrj2 assimilates its final ] also, before suffixes beginning with n or 2 ; as Rn5 instead of nt:n: , nin: , etc. The Inf. is nn for n:r ; (§ 107. 2), with suff. WJ. Remark. The great variety of usage, in verbs of this class, shews that the sound of 2 was quite variable, and the letter less prominent and distinct than most of the consonants. The predominant usage in Kal, is regular; in Niph. Hiph. Mophal, irregular. The Daghesh'' d conjugations are regular throughout ; so that no Paradigm is needed.] II. CLASS OP IRREGULAR VERBS, or Verbs irregular 2> . § 255. These comprehend such as arc defective in respect to their middle radical ; i. e. such, whose middle radical cither falls out, or becomes quiescent. i)(i — 960. ini:r.r;ri.\n verbs; avin Dorm.r.n. Verbs Atfin doubled (^'") ; Par. XII. § 25(>. This cla~s comprises all those, whose second and third radicals are the same letter, and which often drop the second radical in the course of inflection; as 220 , Praet. 2D, Inf. 50. These verbs might well he named contracted verbs, (not very un- like the Greek rifuxo), zi/nol, (iiltu), q.i\o), etc.); for a great part of their irregularity arises from contraction. But dispute about names would not be important. § 257. The principal law of contraction is, that the sec- ond radical is dropped, and with it the points of the pre- ceding letter, (whether a proper vowel or a Sheva), and the vowel belonging to the second radical is then transfer- red to the first radical. E. g. 33D , 3D ; 33D , 3D ; 3*3p2 , 3D* , etc. The alterations oc- casioned in the formative praefixes etc. by this, will be considered in the sequel. Note. All the forms which have an impure vowel in them, or a Daghesh forte in the middle radical, are incapable of contraction ; e. g. aai D , 313D , 313D , 3zp , etc. § 258. Any accession to the end of a contracted form, (by declension, or in any other manner), causes the second radical to reappear by a Daghesh forte, but does not re- store to the first its original vowel. E.g. 33D, contr. 3D, with accession 12D sab-bu (not 12DD), ^n'lZD, "*20, 33D* , etc. In all such cases, the middle radical, having lost its vowel, is written by a Daghesh in the last radical, and joined on to the preceding vowel. § 259. In order to render more audible the doubling of the final letter of the root, the epenthetic syllables, i and \ with the tone, are inserted before suffixes beginning with a consonant. In the Praeter T, as rvizp , Wiatj; in the Fut. and Imp. \ , as ttl^Dn , rr^zp . The Arabian, while he writes the words fully re- gular in these cases, pronounces them like the Hebrew. § 260. The Praeformativcs of tense and conjugation, in- §§261 — 263. irrf.(;ilar verbs; AYIN DOUIJLF.D. 97 stead of the short vowel which they have in regular verbs, usually assume long pure vowels in the contracted forms, § 130. Hophal only has an impure vowel following its characteristic ; e.g. SDin instead of aaoJi. Note. In most cases, the original grounil-forms, from which the contracted forms seem evidently to he derived, are somewhat different from those of the regular verbs; e.g. Kal. Fut. do" 1 appears to come from a full Fut. isc? , (like the Arabic Future), so that when is thrown, by contraction, into the second syllable, and Pattahh comes to stand in a simple syllable, it of course becomes long, i. e. goes into Qarnets, § 130. So in Niph., where we have 2D: apparently for 5203 , and in the Fut. SEP for 220"; ; in Hiph., a on from 3 2 On , etc. But in some few cases, the contracted forms appear to come from re- gular original ones ; as Fut. "\732 , apparently from H^E? » 80 Niph. £>rj2 as from irbh: ; Inf. rnn, as from b^hn, etc. § 261. A second mode of contraction is, to insert a Da- gliesh in the first radical (after Praeformatives), to give those Praeformatives the regular short vowel, and then omit doubling the last radical, when the word receives an accession at the end. The epenthetic 1 and 1 _ arc also omitted, in this case. E. g. Kal Fut. 231 , etc. ; Hiph. Dl£ (from B&ft) instead of crv ; Hoph. nE>* (from nn3) instead of ro^P . Note. In Kal Fut. this is not uncommon ; in other conjugations it is rare. In Chaldee, this is the reigning method of contraction. § 262. The conjugations Poel, Poal, Hithpocl usually take the place of the regular Daghesh'd conjugations here ; but not always: and sometimes both exist together, either as synonymous, or with shades of difference, §188. § 175. a. § 263. Verbs 3?3?, with the second and third radicals Guttural, lengthen the preceding vowel, in cases where Daghcsh forte should be inserted but is excluded by the Guttural, §112. E. g. nhiy , contr. ttia , 3d pers. fern. nfra , 1st pers. T^rrjj . So *n72 , 3d fem. fntt (not n^tt), "'ninTa (not Vp^a), etc. Remark 1. The tone syllables in the usual contracted forms are peculiar. See an account of them in § 100. f. 13 98 ' Ht\. IftttBGl LAB \ BRBI ; a v i s i.oi 1:1.1: n. Remark 2. The student must not fail to note, that in An/. lerbiSS often retain the regular form ; Bpeciftllj in ihe I'rartcr, and sometime! in the Infinitive. In most other cases, they generally follow the mo- dels in the Paradigm; with more anomalies, however, than rrn »»1 other classes of verbs, as the sequel will shew. An instance of conformity to both models in the Fut. is ]2t1, Fat "jn' and "jah^ ; so "j:n, Iliph. [§ 264. Notes on the Paradigm, (a) Kal. (l) Praeter of verbs final Hholem, conforms to the law of contraction in § 257 ; e. g. C£"1 , 3 plur. Mir\ ; and so lin , etc. Once, n:En = so^tePi , Ps. 64 : 7, or per- haps for Taan of the second form of contraction, Daghesh being omit- ted, § 73. Note 3. (2) Inf. const, sometimes with Pattahh ; as fj , bsj . Inf. fern. r>'/-\ from i'J?"! . The Inf. is, in a considerable number of cases, written with a Vav fulcrum, § 64; e.g. ^13, D^~, -n£. So Imp., even with a Daghesh, as ^i, flurip. Rarely is the Inf. as "ns, Fee. 9:1. In the suffix state, or before Maqqeph, the Inf. having a pure O, shortens it; as y'n , ij>H; en, ~Dn <6«i. (3) Future usually has Hholem pure ; but sometimes it appears with Vav fulcrum, § 64 ; as liv^ for 19* . This Hholem is shortened by losing the tone ; as ]rT , I33.rr , Ps. 67 : 2, or Tii.t/? i Is. 27: 1 1 ; }&»! . The Fut. with Pattahh also occurs, which gives a Tseri to the Praeformative ; as ~\J2i , ^j?^, Dr?. , DrPN 1st pers. with Yodh ful- crum, § 64, from CEn . The Fut. also has Shureq, in a few cases ; as *j*~>" , "f r "V . So the second kind of contracted Future; as ann ( = DlPtPl) instead of DP.TI , from CttPi . 4. Imper. also has Pattahh sometimes; as r£ ; with n parag. as nS3: with a Resh, as i*nN . The Imp. O of course shortens this T ~ TX NX vowel, when the tone is removed; '•fl , n'Vc . (6) Niphal. (1) Praeter sometimes with Tseri, as JrjJ3; also with Hholem, as "? ;: , Is. 34: 4. The Praeform. has sometimes other vow- els besides Qamets; e.g. ]hi from JJfl, bn; from bb h ; n~: from nn2 ; where the vowel under : is long, because of the Dag. forte omit- ted in the second radical ; which conforms to the second mode of con- traction described above, § 2GI. Comp. § 260. Note, at the end; also §111. §112. According to these forms, we find Frn2 (from bb_~), Ezek. 22: 16; "ran: (from ]3l), Jer. 22: 23. (2) Inf. abs. with Hholem ; as pisn , V.z~ ■ Inf. const, with Tse- ri ; as D^n, )rftn,§261. § 112. (3) Future with Hholem ; as BT^with Resh "p'nr) 2d pers., lan^ 3d pers. plur. from D»*3 . §§ 2G5 — 2G7. irrf.oi_-i.ar verbs 5 win doubled. 90 (4) Imp. with Hholem; as IfcVn. (5) Part, with Tseri ; asC':: . (c) Hiphil has a pure Tseri throughout, in both of its syllables ; which, therefore, is liable to change, as is usual with all pure vowels; e.g. 2Dn Hiph., 2 pers. nizon , etc. (1) It should be noted here, that Hiphil not only takes a Paltahh final, in case it has a Guttural or a Resh in the last syllable, as nr" , 10n; and in Pause, as Tnri , § 145 ; but also, not unfrequently, with- out either of these reasons; as p" , labn , Part. irXTa . (2) Praeter, once b n fj] <=&! rt , § 2(51. Sni generis is n^BM for rrjpffiri, Prov. 24: 28; unless it may come from nnr. which is more probable. (3) Future with tone retracted, as !3Q»i , etc. {d) Hophal has no special anomalies except the manner in which the Praeform. is pointed, 20^— for 22on .] § 265. The resemblance between verbs 23? and 13? is great. Hophal is the same in both ; and the Prael'orma- tives take, in the same way, a long pure vowel. Besides these general resemblances, there are many particular in- stances, in which verbs s'J exhibit the same appearance as verbs 13?. E. g. Inf. IIS from -ns , iplrja (instead of iplia) from pfc'n . Fut. )W*, y>^1, iV^i etc - Hi P h - ,nf - T^r 1 " (for sjati^) from nan . Fut. i_PiSJ^ , from DOttJ ; "|»T ; T (for Jntt*) from nn" . It may be doubt- ed, however, whether the root is not IS in all these cases, § 298. § 299. 1 conform to the Lexicons, in this arrangement. [§ 266. Peculiar Anomaly. Verbs ••, with the first ibrm of contraction (§§ 257 — 260), sometimes omit the usual Daghesh forte in the increased forms (§ 258), and also the vowel which precedes it. E. g. Fut. nba: for rtVaJ, VOI* for laT^; Inf. DJDrjV for DahV; Niph. hj?a2 for fijpas Is. 19:3, Fut. r.E7: for SiB^a Jer. 8: 14. 'But these anomalies are by no means frequent.] Note. The conj. Poel, Poal, and Ilithpoel, with their substitutes, Pilpel, Pulpal, and Ilithpalpal, are declined regularly; the final Tseri in them being pure, and subject to changes as usual. Remark 1. Of the whole number of verba Ayia doubled ISM ,96 hive IV I ete. Ibrm -nhi ,• 'JO linvc Poel etc. forms only ; 10 have Pilpel etc forms only : II have both Kel •!<•. . 2 have Piel etc., with PilpeJ etc. ; and 3, Poel etc. with Pilpel etc. The other 59 supply DO exam- ple! of any of those conjugations. It appears, therofam, thai the rr«ular form in Pud, is U us any Other. Remark 2. Tho Imnm. are very irregular in designating the oonjugationa 1 I The student must accommodate the designation to the uctual foim. The Hholem in UwM OOOJOga tions is sometimes omitted in writing, $ 63. 100 §208 — 'i. HUUBOOfcAB TBBM j .\vi\VW. Remark. Almost all the anomalies perplexing to the student, arise from the peculiarities noted in § 2G1 and § 266. But those in I are altogether of the most frequent occurrence. If the student tho- roughly possesses himself of the second mode (if contraction there ex- hibited, he will meet with but few cases which will trouble him. Verbs Ay in Vav; Par. XIII. § 267. This class comprises all those whose second rad- ical is Vav, and whose root throughout, in Kal, Niphal. Hiphil, and Hophal, becomes monosyllabic. This species of verbs, also, might justly be called contracted; so that verbs Ji> may be named the first species of contracts, and verbs IS* the second. § 268. The laws of contraction are substantially the same here, as in verbs W> ; the principal differences are occasioned merely by the nature of Vav, which is a Quiescent. (a) The vowel of the contracted form of the verb, is regulated by what would be the last regular vowel, in a full-form of two syllables ; it being transferred to the first radical, and taking the place of its appropriate punctuation which falls out; comp. §257. E. g. Uncontracted C1J5 , contracted C£= DN £; the original 1 con- forming to the heterogeneous vowel (§ 117. 2), i. e. *i becomes N, in order to conform to the Pattahh of the root, which Pattahh then qui- esces in the substituted N , and therefore becomes Qamets. So Prae- ter E and O ,• e. g. rPE , contr. na = n?» , Vav conforming to the final vowel Tseri (§ 117. 2); ufta ba-vosh, contr. '^,12. bosh; Hiph. B-, 1R_ i contr. D^ , the Vav, after conforming to the vowel i. e. after becoming Yodh, having fallen out as superfluous before another Yodh in Hiphil. In Hoph. DjSliT, there seems to be a transposition of the Vav to the first syllable ; as if Dj^n were put for D^n . But see and comp. Hoph. of verbs h , § 260. Note. § 264. d. Note. All the forms where Vav takes a Daghesh forte, and also where it is immediately followed by n as the third radical, are inca- pable of contraction ; e. g. "ip> , T^p , etc. (b) The Praeformativcs all take long pure vowels, in the contracted forms; the kind of which is determined by the original uncontracted forms, which appear to have dif- fered from the common- regular forms; like those in verbs h, § 260. with the Note. " §§269,270. IUKIICCF.AR VERBS J A YIN' VAV. 101 E. g. Kal Fut. ttpi , as if from Onif^ (comp. the Arabic Fut. !?Bf£ ); Part. trip , as if from a^p , an old Part, form ; Imp. and Inf. C'lp , as if from C31J3 . So in Niph. Sip: , as if from E3"»f>3 ; Hipli- B"^ • &"»"»pn , etc. (r) In like manner as verbs ?? (§ 250), these verbs in- sert 1 and "_ with the tone, in the Praeler and Future, before suffixes beginning with a consonant. E. g. Niph. Praeter, nvmp: , EJiyiianpD Hiph. nib"^-; Kal Fut. Hr'Wpn. So far as the principle extends, it is just the same as in verbs $9 . But in verbs Vf , it extends only to the Praeter of Niph. and Hiphil fori, and only to the Fut. of Kal for \_; while in verbs 3?S , it extends throughout the four contracted conjugations. (d) The tone-syllable in these verbs is throughout anal- ogous to that in verbs J*3?-; see § 100. g. §269. Piel, Pual, and Hithpacl are here very rare; instead of them, Polel, Polal, and Hithpolel arc employed, § 175. b, § 188. Examples of Piel are TIJ?, Irnp . Most instances of Piel assume Yodh ; as Izrp , S*ft , for a up , ajrj , etc. In regard to the differ- ence between nnio in verbs yy, and Ottip here, see § 175. b. Note. Remark 1. The 2d and first persons in Kal Praeter, are peculiar, inasmuch as they take a short vowel in their contraction. So it is, al- so, in the corresponding Arabic and Syriac. Hophal also takes a short vowel in the contracted root. Both these cases conform, indeed, to the general principle § 268. a ; but they differ from the manner in Kal Praet. 3d persons, and in Niphal throughout. Remark 2. The anomalous vowels, in different tenses and conju- gations, may be easily accounted for, on the principles developed in § 117. E. g. in the Fut. talp^ , (instead of Sip^ 1 which we might expect), the vowel conforms to the Vav with the U sound. It might, indeed, take the O sound equally well, (for aught we can see) ; bat its present form distinguishes it more clearly from the Fut. of verbs yy . So in Niph. Praet., Sip: (instead of Dp;), the vowel h;i\ ing conformed to the Vav, § 1 17. 1. So also in the Inf., Fut., etc. of Niph. ; the Hholem arises from the conformity just described. In Hiph., the usual vowel is adopted, because it accords well with the Quiescent, which there conforms to the vowel and becomes Yodh, § 117. 2; or. if you please, is omitted because of the characteristic Yodh. [§270. Notes on the Paradigm, {a) K.u, (l) Procter r;ird\ u l»J3, Hos. 10:14; Fern. 3d pers. once with n, as MTU (like theChaM , I (hi §270. IBBEGOLAB vr.nns \ avin\\\. Syr., and Arab.), for Mad . Ezek. 40 : 17. In Mai. 3: 20, — r-E come* from TE ="IJ1B, comp. § 101. b. Very seldom is the 3d person with Pattahh ; e. g. 72 , HD , as if from TT3 , nnu . j? verb final Tscri. (he Par. exhibits. The final n of MD, (and of other verbs ending with n), before a suffix beginning with n, is desig- nated by a Daghesh in the Suffix letter, instead of being fully written. Verbs Jinal Hholem are also found, among the class 12 . They re- tain the T in the 3d pers. Praeter, because it is homogeneous, and the third person is protracted ; e. g. wis, "Pi* . But in the other persons, (which are shorter), they usually omit the Vav ; e. g. ttjSa, fllftz, Raja, raia, "vraJa — iitfia, Eai-pa, jJ-npa, wi&a. Inf. imp. Part, also atfa. (2) Inf. const, sometimes with Hholem; as rri», fitia, aiD, etc.; the Vav is sometimes omitted, as fit a:: etc. § 63. (3) Fut. sometimes with O ; as fifing , atf3> , cir;^ , bipV Defec- tive forms are tDp^ , w3j^^ , etc. Fern. plur. sometimes without the epenthetic T_ , as Piaaton , or jS&'n , instead of rt3^3fifft . Fut. apoc. as Cap^. , with Hholem pure and mutable ; e. g. — p'2 vay-ya-qbm, fit2""3ttjfi td-shobh-na. It is sometimes written as Eaip^ (Vav fulcrum) , not unfrequently it appears with Qibbuts, as Oj5£. With a Guttural or Resh, the apoc. Fut. usually takes Pattahh ; as (4) bnper. also written as Q|3 , ntt , etc. § 63. Parag. as flE'.p, "iu , etc. /m/?. o/;oc. , as i»H , like the Fut. O pure. (■>) Part, with O, as ta^lSj with £, as n" 1 :? , § 202. With fit re- tained, as Bfct'IJ , iZPB&itt? = ta^EJttJ . (6) NiniAL. (1) Praeter rarely with Tseri penult, as -py: . Out of the 3d pers. Hholem is usually exchanged for Shureq, (§ 127. Exc. 1), as being equally homogeneous with the Vav, and somewhat shorter; which is required, because the accent is thrown forward upon the epenth. i. Hholem rarely remains; as taiJIXSS . (2) Inf. const, rarely with U ; as ^-n . (3) Part, also has rarely U; astraac forta , 'a : )aD=sa ,, bia3. (c) Hiphil. (l) Praeter written defectively is rare ; iyn=Ty?i . Sometimes the epenth. i is omitted ; as Ms\n = nib:" , \Vr^~ , i = "n^Bnj ; Przri , "wan , instead of nirPEri , "•nin'Wi ■ So also, not unfrequently in the 2d and 1st pers., the forms imitate verbs yy ; e.g. ■wbn for "'nirPEn , fcatj|»n for Caijirpan , etc. Sometimes with Tse- ri; as nibnn, niiar^, MijbjPn , etc. With Hhateph Seghol under the Praeform. ; as pi'TCH . Peculiar is ynn , "in , and icr; , as if from roots yy ; see Lexi- con. Once TP&n (from n^D), like verbs yy in the second form of ^ 071 — 273. IRREGULAR VERBS J AYIN VAV. AYIN YODH. 103 of contraction, § 261. The praeform. It, (in the derivates of my and ■Wj takes Pattahh instead of a comp. Sheva ; e. g. niViTj , niTSSl , (2) Inf. fem. once r"»c:rr 1 apoc. form of masc. rp:n . Inf. abs. once; T3jn because of the Guttural. (3) Fut. *\ v\l ; comp. forms in §261, which this imitates. In the plur. fem. fMttjya, instead of nr'TpP, because a mixed syllable* with Yodh and Hhireq long cannot, by usage, be penultimate, even if an accent supports it. Fut. apoc. short- ens the Tseri, whenever it loses the tone; e.g. tajjVi, "j^nrrJl. With a Guttural or Resh ; as 3nni , tO»] . (4) Imper. once with Tseri ; as 2 v »;n , 2 K. 8 : 6. (5) Part, rare- ly as rPBH , yzv, (for rpqa , f^fc), imitating verbs 99 ; see § 261. (d) Hophal is sometimes written with Qibbuts vicarious ; as ^np" 1 , icrr , instead of 1 nE"* 1 , "inn ,§41. (e) Polel, Polal, and Hithpnlcl are declined, in all respects, like Poel etc. in verbs 99 , i. e. like Piel, Pual etc. in regular verbs, as the former stand in the place of the latter. Polal occurs in only four verbs. (/) Hithpolel, like Hithp. in reg. verbs §21 8, often takes Pattahh in the final syllable ; which in pause becomes Qamets, as " : isnrt . Once the H of the Praeform. is omitted in the Part., as CaigipTia for S7?.ipn?j2, Ps. 139: 21. {g) Pilpel etc. are declined like Polel etc. Pilpel is found in only five verbs; Polpal only in b"2; and Hitbpalpal only in r 1 "^ . § 271. General remarks on verbs "12 . (a) The great similarity of them to verbs 99 is very manifest, from § 268. a. b. c. d ; and indeed, from many of the forms produced under § 270, specially under § 270. c. 1. It might indeed be doubted, whether more or less of these forms, so much like 99 , have not a root belonging to that species of verbs. The resemblances in the general principles of contraction, are too manifest to escape notice. (b) The number of verbs ",9 is about 141. Of these, 13 are fib, and incapable of contraction, § 268. a. Note ; 6 resist contraction, \\/.. Sj2 , "nfi, rn 9 , hiJE , fH" 1 > an( ' ?V® > the res ^ are contracted. Fiot only have the conj. Pick] Vtrhs A;/ in Yudh. § 272. These arc such as have a Yodh originally for their middle radical, and which retain it in more or less of the forms in Kal. n 273. Out of Kal, verbs V in all respects arc like those fo. 101 §§274—277. IBRBGULAB VCBBi J i.\.i;i.!i UEPH. [§ 271. JVotcs cm the Paradigm. Kai.. (l) Praeter has Yodh only in three verbs, viz. "pz , 3" , ~\ , Fl ; and where this i9 retained, the epenth. i is inserted before the formative suffixes, beginning with a consonant ; as the Far. shews. All the other cases of the l'raeter, conform to that of verbs 1» . (2) future in all respects resembles Hiphil, in regard to form. .So the apoc. form also ; e. g. T^ , ]3r] ; tBtD* , Op\l ■ (3) Part. in one case is regular, viz. ^TN, from n^J* . Note. Very few verbs are exclusively *9; most being also iy in Kal. The older grammarians and lexicographers admitted no class "y , but ranked such forms as M^a under Hiphil, with an aphacresin ef the M . But as this is without other example, and as the kindred languages exhibit verbs ""y, this class is now generally admitted.] III. CLASS OP IRREGULAR VERBS. § 275. This comprehends those, whose third radical becomes qui- escent, or disappears. Verbs Lamcclh Aleph. § 276. Aleph, at the end of words, is usually quiescent, §119.6. Throughout verbs N^, Aleph is quiescent or otiant, when it ends a word or a syllable. § 277. The general laws of quiescence are, (ft) In the Praeter of all the derived conjugations, before formative suffixes beginning with a consonant, itf quiesccs in Tseri. (b) In the Fut. and Imp. of all the conjugations, before a sujformafivc consonant, tf quiesces in Seghol. (c) In all oth- er cases, it quiesces (when at the end of a word or sylla- ble) in the regular vowel ; excepting that whenever it meets with Pattahh, it lengthens it into Qamets. E. g. n»&», sisaaKgi., ftaKsaR, naasjbrt^ etc. In Kal, the Fut. NIT:-; with Pattahh (Aleph affects the Fut. like a Guttural §235), be- comes ttsa^ ; in Niph. we have N£":: instead of ax*:: f Pnal, WED instead of N3ffi , etc. § 11 5. Note. But the vowels, made long by such quiescence, do not re- main immutable. The laws of declension supersede the laws of quies- cence ; and Qamets etc. (made by quiescence) fall away, like any §§278,270. irregular verbs; lamedh alepii. 105 mutable pure vowels; e.g. M2Z!Q, fem. rtNlTS ; Fut. N£?3% 2d fem. "WXaPj, etc. See §127. Exc. 4. So Piel N'S* , fem. ttKKO, etc. [§ 278. Notes on the Paradigm, (a) Kai.. (1) Procter of verbs final Tseri, usually retain it here; as 2fV, n^V, Er^-T, etc. The 3d pers. sing. fem. sometimes takes n (like the Aramaean) ; ;i- .-\\^~ . b. 7: 14. Sometimes these verbs are written defective; as " l n3£)a for ■'njtsa , § 63. (2) Inf. fem., as !"JiJ*V, tt&MBH, also with n, as ntfbJa =mn ; ': - :. tllfiHp (with 1 fulcrum merely) = ruNnp ; see § H9. c. 3. Inf. masc. sometimes as ittft = JtlBlrf , § 63. (3) Imp. INT; yi-rft, =.1Jt^';, see § 118. In plur. fem., }8t^j3 , apoc. for n:N->p ; ~:\\^ for n3i*X , from 8tX^ , is sui generis, Cant. 3: 11. Qaere, is not the root fiNi: ? (4) Part. fem. DNStt for Plfijka, n^i" 1 for r^fi|^C^' , , § 119. c. 3. With suff. carta for tayfa , § lis. (b) Niphal. (l) Procter fem. riNrc: ; see under a. 1. above. Forms defective, SJIJttJBS for ar^atfa . (2) /»/. abs. Nip: . (3) Air?, some- times as O^Nlza: , seemingly from N££3 . (c) Piel. Inf. sometimes as DNlrQ , niJtVtt ; comp. a. 2. above. {d) Hiphil. Praeter defective, as^q^r; = {T , B^n i; Inf. also ^n", Jer. 32 : 35. § 279. Interchange of forms between verbs Nb and ~b. In the Chal- dee and Syriac, these two species of verbs fall under one and the same category, and have the same forms throughout. In Hebrew, there is plainly an incipient tendency toward this idiom, which developes it- self in the frequent interchanges of these verbs for each other, in re- gard to vowels, or consonants, or both. E. g. verbs JO imitate verbs (2) As to consonants. Kal. Imp. !r»B*l for ND-] riD3 for nc: Fut. T t v\ Sn forinSK^n Niph. natT) for Nnr: n^a for njej: Inf. const. hB"1?J for NS^n Hitm. n'N'n:ri for N2:nn Piel, -\72* for Bt\>»^ (3) Jls to both vowels and consonants. Kal. tW£ for ntt&£ , Pibti for HI&12 , see § 1 1 8. Part. act. STST for n«X^ ,§118. Sy^fc for tffyftt , § 118. Pass. -«lto3 for «1i!», Ps. 32 : 1. Niph. wfeoa for WNJgBJ . nns-O for nac-i: . Fat * 309 * for •!«»»:, ^H8. ' p'iel. IBV for IKB'V , § H8. 14 (1) As to vo wrls. Kal T863 for T)»b3 Part. £t£» for K3t» Piel kVb for NV73 T)Jt£l for TINE1 Fut. NH^ for nsjp Inf. nifctett for N'r: lOii 280,383. ii:i;i;«.i i.\u VEBM : LAttBDB ■«. Ilinc. *jn*>aran for spJwxBii • Pa*t ~ z .?.'± r,,r N ":r= • Hith. rpfcann for rtttz&nn . m2:n- for N2:nn. Compare with these reaemblaocee to rerba ~r, t ho similarities of those verbs to : , etc. (2) Part, pass.; as '^s ga- iety, where the Yodh remains a proper consonant. § 2S2. The rules of quiescence, and the form of the quiescent let- ter, differ in different persons and tenses. They are as follows : («) Tlic Practcr, 3d inasc. sing, in all the conjugations, requires H quiescent in Qamcts. See Paradigm. (6) The other forms without accession at the end, take n_ throughout ; excepting the Imp. 2 masc. sing., which has n_, and the Inf. abs. which lias n_ . (r) Before suffhrmafioes, beginning with a consonant. (1) The Praeter of Kal has \_/. (2) The Practcr of all the derived conjugations, has *»__ . (.3) ThcFut. and Imp. throughout have "^ . See Paradigm. («/) Before sutfbrmatives beginning with a voted, the Quiescent falls away. E. g. Tra instead of ! Pr-: , "'ra for ""fra , etc. § 118. Rut a pause- accent restores the Quiescent, and prolongs the original vowel which preceded it ; c. g. V*\l1 instead of "r^ ,$117. §283. IRREGULAR VERBS; LAMEDH HE. 107 Note. The fulling away of the Quiescent here, throughout, de- pends on the principle stated in § 118 with the Note. [§ 203. Notes on the Paradigm, (u) K.u.. (l) Praeter sometimes has the Chaldee form, as nilMP for Srnipy, comp. § 278. a. 1. With Vav moveable, once, 'Rlbffl , Job 3: 26. Forms written defective are rather unusual ; as "V)\s for ""n" 1 ": 3 . (2) Inf. abs. sometimes drops the !"i , and takes the form S^S for nVri , etc. Twice it even takes n; as rnrrn for tta'Mpj'fi ; and sometimes it becomes otiant, by reason of a Dag. euphonic, as npxnn; and even falls out here also, as n|\?n . {"/) The Apocopate Future is common to all the conjugations of this verb. It is formed by dropping the final ~ with the preceding vowel. It then appears (l) Usually with a furtive vowel under the first radi- cal. (2) Without one. E. g. u: 1 Fo rim with :i furtive vowel. 0-2) Forms without b furtive vowel. full form, apoc. form. full form. Sing. 3 ~".^ C- ¥1) -**3 "■ r,+z* ft: i (-=-.) » — 2 !"»v»n " -^2 * "?■"? ^i '-;- ('"«, "-:)> — 1 *%& *-: : ni c — -— - ^V^C 1 *™') * Plur. 1 rt:sg "mti & --^ I t " gutt. 3 ii%&1 "': 8 - ° 3 "in;. in* n /t -3w^ alb*] p Note 1. T/te Segholate forms in verbs differ, in one respect, from those of nouns, etc.; inasmuch as verbs take Hhireq medial for a pe- nultimate vowel ; whereas nouns etc. allow only of Seghol, Tscri, Pattahh, Qamets (in a few cases), and Ilholem, all pure. In the above table, a, c, and />, have Hhireq medial for a penult rowel. Note 2. In the apoc. forms of the 2d and 1-t persona, sing, and plural, the Hhireq is prolonged into Tseri, so 6, c, d : not bin] ■ b$R1 , etc. On the other hand, the third person very rarely has a Tseri in the penult, like b/1§\ from rfr-ii , under a. 108 $§ 283 — 285. IRREGULAR VERBS ; I. wir.nir n i . Note :'.. When the second radical i- a Guttural, the apoc. forms assume the usual Pattahh in the Goal syllable ; ai in < aod f. k 113. When the firel radical is a Guttural, both vowels more usually arc Pattahh, as in g; but rt and n may take Hhireq, as in /.-. Note 4. The nude apoc. forms in No J, without furtive vowels, are not frequent; yet they occur sufficiently often to be distinctly ac- knowledged. Iu form they resemble such nouns as B'JJp, "i"G, etc. The learner will observe, that the Hhireq under the Praeform. is oc- casionally prolonged, and becomes Tseri ; e.g. in i. In /, the Pattahh in ""■; yi'lilul, is only/urttve, as the Dag. lene in ~ shews. Note 5. In the forms under j, k, the Segholale shape accommodates itself to the words which have a final Yodh ; e. g. Vr instead of TP or TJ* , etc. See the ground of this, in § 120. b. So also W (writ- ten once 8*!j!"p § 125. o), from rPrj . Note 5. All the apoc. forms of the Future more usually have a 1 conversive before them ; but some occur without it ; and 1 does not always occasion apocope, e. g. fT3£*1 2 K. 1: 10. «T^3*1 2 K. 6 : 23. Remark. The student will observe, that none of the Segholates in A'u/, have the common form of two Seghols, as "Tj'-h • 1° this respect the forms of Kal are distinct from those of Hiphil, which adopts the double Seghol, wherever the nature of the word permits. (4) Imp. For the forms ^j) , >'■:■: , instead of ^ba , ^Vi! ,see § 118. Notes 1. 2. 3. (5) The act. Part. fern, is ftVSa (for !"Pbiil § 118). Sometimes it assumes the form rrrii , plur. rri'ba ,as if from ^3, of the form """r. § 212. 6. (6) The pass. Part, rarely as ni»# for ""liD*, IBSfc Ifor ^&X. In Kelhib, nilt33 nttu-voth, Qeri, rri^Da . § 284. In all the forms where Yodh radical is dropped, it is oc- casionally restored, either by a Pause-accent, by Nun parag., or by the emphasis required upon the word. See § 147, for pause-accent. With Aim, =12-T , ]T«a"P and J^")} Emphasis, !"POrl Vs. 57: 2. Imp. I^ya , Is. 21 : 12. With - parag., also, Fut. n;^s . Note. From these cases of restored and prolonged vowels, it is clear, that the Fut. and Imp. of verbs ni have, in the real ground- form, a final Pattahh, since the restored vowel goes into Qamets ; § 146. §285. Niphal. (l) Praeter sometimes with Hhireq before ■»; as ry^D from n ( ~: , ":"'r5: . In pause, ^c: from r?D: . (2) Inf. aba. rarely as n ; 'r.": . Inf. const, very rarely, as !TtK*^Jj| , Judg. 13: 21. (3) The fut. apoc. here, merely drops the final T\ with the preced- ing vowed. §§ 286 291. IRREGULAR VERBS J LAKEDH HE. 10'J § 286. Piel. (l) Praeter sometimes with Hhireq before i ; rp]?a . (2) The apoc. forms in this Conj., not only drop their final n with its vowel, but also the Daghesh forte from the middle radical, (see Par.), because this letter now becomes a Jinal one; § 72. The preceding vowel is sometimes prolonged, as "jrP1 = ~i!r"] . (3) With Yodh restored ; Imp. V\n (for ^^, § 73. Note 3). Fut. with Sufi. " , : : ir:nr . . §287. Hipiiil. (l) Praeter sometimes with Hhireq; as ^n^'rr.n, T^nin. Sing. fern. 3d pers. sometimes as nb:~ ; comp. § 283. a. I. In some cases the ~ prefix takes Seghol ; as nb^r: , nsin . Also as the Chaldee, fJjWj for ttrhn ; comp. § 283. 3. a'. (2) Inf. abs. once as ~2~in . Inf. const, once, niXptn for rjlSprl , Lev. 14: 43. (3) Fut. once, 3d pers. plur. "POXlfl Irim-slv, like the Chaldee Viy-\ , etc. Once ^rrtii-i for --?;n , Jer. 18 : 23. § 288. Futures apocopate. Like those in Kal, they are divided into two kinds, (l) With a furtive vowel ; e. g. Vi\] , SQ^I , -~ "* ] . Here the penult vowel is Seghol, or (under a Guttural) Pattahh. The usual forms of noun-Segholates are here prevalent, in distinction from those in Kal; Remark, p. 108. (2) With nude apocope ; as -""V , 'T'V ; fir.-D? , Fi3> , etc. Note. The Imper. follows the analogy of No. 1 ; e. g. with a furtive vowel, always as l~\n , Pp7?i instead of i"I2p?3 , "3")" , etc. With a Guttural, as r^n for Flbsrt , etc. § 289. Peculiar anomalies. Such are the endings in ( • •), in Inf. Fut. and Imp. ; e.g. Inf. Kal, J"i*n to be ; Piel, 1~tiy opprimendo ; Hoph. rpT3n. Kal Fut. rvrrn, N!ah for nnxn. Piel, nr;n. In Syr. and Chaldee, the Fut. ends in 6t_ or 1_. , in these verbs. § 290. Imitations of verbs nb ; comp. § 279. (a) Imitation in re- spect to the consona7its ; e.g. "'rifitXI for " 1 n" , ^~j ; fcticl Inf. abs. for rr;r: , Imp. fitnrr . So Kara*, N>n;, for n:ur , nirn: ; asttj for tiro Piel; 6t|BP forn?u"!, Ecc. 8:1. (b) Aa to voweh; e. g. n'rsn for rt^an, rwzjjj for -"VX; Piel Inf. n::? forrriSJg ; Part. Niph. nbha for r,~-.z ■ n?3n for n^an . § 291. General remark on the usage described in § 279, § 290. The number of these anomalies will be increased or diminished very much, according to the principles assumed by the Lexicographer. If he constitute roots both in Nb and in n'p, with the same meaning, then the anomalies are reduced to a very small number. If he make but one root, then they are multiplied. 1 observe that Gesenius, (very rightly in my apprehension), in his latest work*, increases the num- ber of the roots, and thus diminishes the anomalies. J10 1203 -206. tBBBOULAH \ii:r.>: I wn.mi r\v i PC. § 292. J'ilrl appears only twice, viz. in rPN:. (contract, rvs: § 119. c. 1), from ~n: ; and in ^ihljn Part, const plur., from HrTD, Pllel rnrjiu. IliihjHilfl appears only in ~~r, Ilitli. !-."----. Fat :,p.,. " - r^- instead of lftnp? , § 120. 6. Inf. with r. parag. rrirjwpn , 2 K. Verbs liaraedh Too. [§ 203. These are not strictly Irregular; but in all the persons which receive a sutlix beginning with n, the n final of the root i- in- serted by a Dag. forte in the suffix letter; e.g. rn2 , r~\Z , 1, IV}5>, £3Pn3 , etc. So also, WD lie died, FBfl , \n?3 , etc. Verbs doubly anomalous. §291. These are such as have two radicals, (usually the first and third), which may be dropped, or assimilated, or may become quiescent ; as iinN , N22 11 , ""V , Nto: , T.VZ , etc. Note. Very few cases occur, like NTS , where two irregular let- ters come together. Two cases only occur of verbs irregular E and 1"" ; e. g. "n: , and CE: ; for which see Lexicon. The verba v: and 5 s ! 2 , are regular as to the ,Vim, § 253. § 295. In regard to the first radical, these verbs exhibit all the various phases of verbs irregular E ; and in regard to the third radical all the phases of verbs irregular r ; see Par. XVII seq. § 296. The following examples, and notes on the Paradigms jii«t mentioned, exhibit all the forms of these verbs in which the student is likely to meet with any difficulty. («) Verbs isis and r.7 • nrx , Hiph. fut. apoc. rioi 1 Sam. 14: 24 for ft^ji»1 . ftBN, Imp. "EN Ex. 1G: 23, by Syriasm for H>* (§ 119. d. 2) : Fut. with suff. inbnl 1 Sam. 28 : 24, for ISnSfifrn . nrwX, Praet., in pause nTK Jer. 3 : 22 ; Imp. in pause, "Tun; for ^M (§119. d. 2. § 147) ; Fut., »rj\i Deut. 33 : 21, for nryw , the first N being dropped, and final N put for -, § 290; riKjl Is. 41 : 25, for rHjNJI . Hiph. Imp. in pause, IVlSl for ITiarj, § 119. e. 1. $ 147. (b) Verbs ^S and sfe . N^ , Inf. fern. D8S for nfip| , $ 1 19. c. 1. Imp. as , § 243. a. 0) Verbs ^ and jft , Par. XVII. -T, not found in Kal ; Piel. Fut. H'qQ Lam. 3: 53, for ^"V Hiph. Fut. with n retained, rTjTJT Neb. 11 : 17; first person with suffix T]iN, Ps. 35: 18, and in pause ^i&, Ps. 30: 13. §§ 29G — 299. irrf.o. vf.rbs ; doubly anomalous, etc. Ill nil i Fut - lst P ers - P ,ur - wilh sulT -- °V- 1 Ps - 74 : 8 - ttbl , Fut apoc. Pp*1 , Ezek. 31:7; Popaal, n n l>*Bj , Ps. 45: 3. iTV , Fut. 1 pers. with saff., D"V: , Num. 21 : 30. Hiph. Fut. with suff., D-V, 2 K. 17 : 27 ; SplR, Ps.46 : 8 etc. GO Verbs ]S and A , Par. XVIII. The Paradigm exhibits in Kal and Niphal the forms of N",r: ; in lliphil those of tfd: , because the former does not occur in Hiphil. Infinitive construct, nNfcJ for fitgv (§119. c. 1). Fut., n: ; |p, Ruth 1:14, without Aleph. Hiph. Fut, W , Ps. 55 : 16, Kethib for WQ • (c) Verbs JB and jft, Par. XIX. The three verbs in": , ~c: , ~3: , are all of this form. Kal. Fut. apoc. with Vav, D»1 and -0*1 ; 7*1 , 2 K. 9 : 33. Niphal rtn: , Praet. 3 pers. plur. in pause, VE: , Num. 24 : G ; Fut. 3 pers., SttiS^ , Zech. 1: 16; 3 pers. plur. 1t3|" , Jer. 6: 4 ; from !7:d: , Praet. !l33 , 2 Sam. 11: 15 ; 1833 , Job 30 : 8, wilh N for n, § 290, or perhaps the root is N2: . Hiph. Fut. with suff., as is: •> 2 Sam. 14:6; SjB.2, Job 36 : 18 etc. Fut apoc. with Vav, O^l , ^'i etc. The Imp. also suffers apocope, and takes the forms arr , ^*n , which are of frequent occurrence. § 297. The verb N13 has all the common inflections exhibited in Paradigm XX. But it has many forms mi generis, besides these. E. g. with suff, as *j«3, FT3$2; Fut. in*] for 603*2- Pern. 3d plur. n:"N x bn, with epenth, \ . Also finJWR, Deut 33: 16, for N3R; and T1M3R , 1 Sam. 25 : 34, for^Jt*3n. Hiphil sometimes takes epenth. i ; as ■'Snis^nri , rrjiirah, DniN^n. Defective, "'n- for N-n- Note. The verbs NT 2 and Nip, are used only in lliphil ; where they are declined like N13 . Relation of irregular verb* to e.arh other. § 298. In the irregular verbs, in general, only two of the radicals appear to be permanent and immutable. The other radical may be, and often actually is, supplied in different ways, according to the forms adopted by the different classes of irreg. verbs. E. g. from the biliteral "p , have been formed "p- , "y- , Hyy , r t 5i , all of the same meaning. So also 3^ and 2'^: ; "IX*, 113t, and -ni: ; K^j3 and !T^J3 ; 2TU and zz:* : and so, more or less, of a large proportion of the irreg- ular verbs, much larger than has yet been generally noticed. This principle reigns extensively, also, in the kindred Shemitish languages. § 299. In consequence of different forms having the Bame mean- ing, it happens in many cases, that one forin Is employed only in some particular tense or conjugation, while another H employed ovlu~i\ el\ in another. E. g. from ^fl , ivit, la derived the Praet. and Part. : 112 §§ 30(1 — 303. I-i.mmi.ITI-.RAI. \\.\:n- — PAETICIPLEB. while its equivalent, -|r? i furnishes the Inf., Fat, :in«I Imp. So pj:r , a^- asaal in AV//,- but Paal "^Ti an( ' Hith. risnnri, come from ~p~. Compare, in Latin, /bro, twli, latum; Greek, , ototo, "/viyxa. [| nriebed Hint lexicographer! woald makes ranefa nore entendre om of thii obvioni end nridar} extended principle in Hebrew etymology. It would greatly diminiab the «<> called anomalies of tlic Inn- gunge. Plurilateral Verbs. § 300. These are properly very few ; and they are declined like the Conjs. Pilel and Polal. The following list comprises the whole number that actually appear; viz. (l) &K2W3, 1 pers. with sufTix IrPnKttJtta , Is. 14: 23. (2) r=~3 . participle b2~)r?J , 1 Chr. 15: 27. (3) D^3 , Fut. with suffix. ns^tnb*, Ps. 80: 14. (4) ti-)B, Job 2G: 9. (5) ttfi'cn, Job 33: 25. (G) -~)r.r , 2 pers. fut. STjfnn, Jer. 12: 5; participle !i*MwB , Jer. 22: 15. (7) A few other forms are noted in some of the lexicons, but in others they are more properly referred to the Pilel form, derived from a triliteral root ; as Pilel 3 pers. fem. in pause ^^ T ".'!l -> J°b 15: 32. Cant. 1: 16, from |**n.] PARTICIPLES. 301. Participles are treated as adjectives, i. e. declined as nouns; which is common in other languages. Participles, in regard to case, tone-syllable, etc. follow the usages of nouns. Par. XXI. exhibits the various phases and declensions of their absolute cases. § 302. All of them in the fem. may form Segholates, except the ground-form has an immutable penult vowel. E. g. ~E£ i !"*30J!3 , !"!?3' , p}2 , etc. are incapable of a Seghol. form, because the penult vowels cannot be so changed as to conform to the laws of Segholates; see § 142. d. But in Hiphil, the fem. Segholates are derived from an apoc. fem. form ttlbttptt, like the apoc. Fut. ££>[£. VERBS AVITII SUFFIX PRONOUNS. § 303. Pronouns, following- verbs and governed by them, are attached to them and united in the same Avord. This is effected by taking the fragments or parts of the pronoun, with an appropriate vowel of union (where one is needed), and adjusting the form of the verb, when ne- cessary, so as to receive it. §§304 307. VERBS WITH SUFFIX PRONOUNS. 113 E. g. ^JfBJJ , instead of"W t^j? , Ac H/fet/ me ; D^DJJ , instead of Dr: ffccj? , f/'O" didst kill them. Comp. Latin eccum, for ecce cum, etc. § 304. Most of the suffix pronouns influence the tones of the verb, i. e. they move it forward or toward the left; and consequently they occasion more or less change - in the mutable vowels of verbs, usually (not always) ac- cording to the general principles of the vowel changes; § 12G seq. In some few cases, the consonants of the verb suffer a change in order to receive a suOix, § 311. § 305. As all the conjugations of verbs ternrnate in the same manner, they all receive suffixes in the like manner with Kal, with very little variation. But neuter verbs, and those which arc passive or reflexive, do not from the nature of the case admit of suffixes, as they do not govern words after them ; Note. Verbs of the first and second persons do not receive suffix- es of the same persons, because, the reflexive forms of the verbs ex- press the sense which would be thus conveyed. § 306. The Inf. mode, and participles, receive suffixes either in the manner of verbs or of nouns. But not with the same meaning, as it respects the Inf. mode ; for a noun-suffix appended to it, denotes the subject or agent of the verb ; but a verbal suffix, the object of the action implied by the verb. E. g. Inf. *ips, with noun suff., ""ips, my punishment, viz. that which I in- flict; with a verbal suff. ^npoi: to punish me. [§ 307. Different forms of pronovn suffixes. Most of the verbal-suf- fixes, or fragments of primitive pronouns, have at least three different forms, adapted to the different ending or tense of the verb to which they are appended. (a) The most simple form of the suffixes is that in which they be- gin with a consonant. In this shape they are appended, through all the tenses and moods, to forms of verbs which end with a vowel ; see Note. (b) To the simple form is prefixed a vowel of the A class, viz. Qamets or Pattahh. In this shape they are appended to forms of verbs which end with a consonant, usually in the Praeter only. (c) To the simple form is prefixed a vowel of the E class, viz 15 114 ' r /\ :10^, 309. VERM WITH SIFFIX PRONOUNS. Tseri or Scghol. In this shape they ;irc appended to forms of verbs which end with a consonant, in the Fnt and Imperative. Not*. The vowel which it thai prefixed to tbe tafixee, lervei to connect them nore reedily with the verb, mid is therefore celled » i •* ■ it*unt-t>aw*l. \\ ben tbe rerb endt io i rowel, thai row- el ofcoilrM servos an a union-vowel. § 308. Between the suffix and the union-vowel, there is sometimes inserted an epenthetic Awn, § lo'i. />, which is usually assimilated to the first letter of the suffix and expressed in it hy a Dagbesb forte. In poetry, the Nun is sometimes fully written. Thi^ cla-< of sullixes is limited principally to the sing, number of the pronouns, and to the Fut. tense of verbs. § 309. The following table exhibits the suffixes as appended, (a) to verbs ending with a vowel in all the moods and tenses. (6) To those ending with a consonant in the Fraeter. (c) To those ending with a consonant in the Fut. and Imperative, (rf) It exhibits also those suffixes which receive an epenthetic Nun. Sins, common. 1. 2 m. 2 f. 3 m. h 3- sjL-nbf 3 f. n_ pi. i. \L 2 m. DS 2 f. ]5 3 m. D poetl&l 3 f. 1 Praetcr. h D_ in pause h 2_ w| in pause *[ S|_ P. _ u_ poet. T2 " M Future etc. Ti &c. ilD_ I TV.' R u_ u_! poet. 'TD_ w Future with epenthetic Nun. Sing. 1 . ^j_ h 3_ for h 2:_ &c - 2 m. ^j- !"u)_. for Tp_~ &c. Sing. 3 m. -13.. for VW-., also 13 - 3 f. T\l— for ~I_ § 310. Notes on the. table of suffixes. (1) In a very few instances, the Fut. has the suffixes " , :1, D_, like the Praeter ; and vice versa the § 310. VER15S WITH SUFFIX PRONOUNS. H; Praet. very rarely takes suffixes like the Future, viz. 1 :1. and a few times " l :l. . (2) The original union-vowels would seem to be Qamets and Tseri, which shorten into Pattahh and Seghol when the tone is removed. Before the epenthetic Nun, the two latter only are found. So also in " , :_., which in pause becomes "':_. (3) The 2d pers. sing feni. "J_ in b, occurs but seldom ; the more common form in the Praeter is ^_, and without the tone f_\ as in the Future. The form with parag. Yodh in c, occurs often in the later Psalms. (4) The suffixes CD , "}3 , never take a union-vowel ; nor does the suffix ^ or ~D , except in pause. The 3 pers. sing. fern, of the Praeter also takes suffixes, either with or without a union-vowel ; see below § 312. 2. (5) The forms T73_ T72_ ia!_ with a parag. i , are common in po- etry. The form 1H is found as a suffix once, Ex. 15: 5 ; so in Ethio- pia The form Drt_ occurs in Dent. 32: 26. (6) Instead of the fern, suffix "J of the 3d pers. plural, the masc. form □ appears, specially after the sufform. 1 and ■•_ ; perhaps in or- der that the fern, suffix may not be confounded with the parag. ] ; as DttHins, Ex. 2: 17, for -jT-nri; DI^O^l , 1 Sam. G: 10. Gen. 26: 15. Num. 17: 3, 4. Josh. 4: Series. 2: 14. Prov. 6: 21. But ] is used in Jer. 48: 7. (7) The suffixes with epenth. Nun are occasionally found in the Imp. and rarely in the Praeter; see No 1. above. In Chaldee, an epenth. Nun is always found before the suff. of the Fut. Imp. and In- finitive. (8) Wherever there is a union-vowel, it uniformly takes the tone. The suffixes CD and ]3 always draw down the tone upon themselves, removing it two places if necessary, and are on that account denomi- nated grave suffixes. The others never move the tone more than one syllable, and are called light suffixes. The suffix ^ or FID, when appended to verbs ending in a conso- nant, usually takes the tone. The 3 pers. sing. fern, of the Praeter is excepted; see Paradigm. (9) Some of these suffix-forms of pronouns are derived from primi- tive forms which are still in use ; as D, ], from Z~, ]n, etc. Others would seem to come from forms which are now obsolete in Hebrew ; as ^ from n3J< = n2:N thou, like "OiK / ; C^ from c?N etc. The form "^ still appears in Ethiopic, as a regular sufform. in the flexion of verbs. Note. Wrli'il snilixos arc alao united, in all theil limn-, with certain adverbj anJ interjec- tions; in which condition they are in the .Yum. case. I ((J §§ 811, B12 t Minis wrni si mix PRONOUN*. § 311. The changes in (he vowels, of the verh, occasioned by the suffix prnnourn, are seen in the Paradigm. In the conmmanU, the Ibl- lowing cbangea take place ; viz. Praet. 3 fem. n_ becomes n_ ; the fern. Pi ("Ti) becomes "'Fi ; 2. plur. masc DJJ hecomes TF; as the Par. shews. The forms ending with n: receive n in its room. § 312. Notes on the Paradigm. Kal. Pratt. 3d pers. masc. In "Q^13J3 , as the tone is moved Forward, the first vowel falls away, § 132 ; the second vowel of the original word is thrown into a simple syllahle, and becomes long - , § 130; hut where the syllable remains mixed, Pat- tahh continues, as DsbCP . In such a way, the student will easily ac- count for most of the changes made in the original vowels of the verb. Verhs final Tseri retain it, when a long vowel is required in the ult. of the verb ; as :ca: . (2) Praeter 3 fern, substitutes n for the final n, unites this (for the most part) in a syllable with the last radical of the verb, and al- ways puts the tone upon the same syllable. It is only when a suff. be- gins with a vowel, (which occurs only in "J_ C_ •)_), that the final n is taken away from this syllable (§ 90. 1), which of course prolongs the Pattahh, § 130. E. g. with suff. *7_. ,, !jri VbjD , where the Tseri of the suff. is shortened, in consequence of falling into a mixed syllable with- out the tone, § 129 0. So with D- ]_ , it makes by the same rules, Dn?Bj3 , Tnb'cp. Note. The suff. Wand n sometimes assimilate their n to the final n of the verb; e. g. TO?333 ==*nn5»a , 1 Sam. 1:24; rtB*in» = hnffrtg, Jer. 49: 24. (3) Prael. 2 fen. exhibits the form ''FlbOP before a suffix, (as sta- ted in § 311); and in this way appears in the same manner as the 1 pers. sing, when it takes the suffix of the third pers. sing, and plu- ral. The student will remark that here, and in the second pers. plur., a union-vowel is provided for the verb, by adopting the forms ^nrUP, 4. The Inf. most usually takes suffixes in the manner of Segholate nouns, in Dec. VI; i. e. the final vowel is thrown back upon the first radical, and shortened. If the verb be y Guttural, then the points are regulated by the usual principles, in § 114. § 128. See the examples in the Paradigm. The variety of punctuation, with suff. " , 23, 73, may also be there seen. The Inf. of a verb Fut. Pattahh usually takes Hhircq under the first radical, before suffixes ; as 2>"p.2 in the Par. ; but sometimes Pattahh, as ^ypn , ifc»D, etc. Verbs Pe Gutt. sometimes take a Seghol in the first syllable ; as FT33lrJ , Ps. 102: 14. The Inf. fern. Segholate takes suff. like nouns of Dec. XIII. Hhireq §§ 313 315. VF.URS WITH SUFFIXES NOUNS. 117 is the usual vowel in the first syllable; e.g. D"^"\ , " , ri«2Jn ; but some- times Pattahh, as rui , " , rou; . (o) Future suffixes are provided with a union-vowel, in most cases, where the verb ends with a radical letter; in which cases, the final Hholem or Tseri of the verb is dropped. But with stiff. ~, CD , "jD, these vowels are retained and shortened, because they lose the tone. But verbs Fut. Pattalih retain this vowel, and prolong it before a union- vowel ; as DHJ^-^ from '^?~?- (6) Imp. follows the analogy of the Fut. throughout ; in regard to verbs final Pattahh, as well as other*. (7) Participles follow the manner of the nouns to whose declension they belong, in receiving suffixes. (8) Piel usually drops its final Tseri before a union-vowel, as in the Par. ; but before tj, CD , "jD, it commonly shortens it into Seghol, or short Hhireq, as ^^j? , DDUi-iS ; rarely into Pattahh, as *pH3 , Deut. 2: 7. Pattahh final here remains, as "£nn . (9) Poel, Polel, etc, imitate Piel in their suffixes. (10) Hiphil appends suffixes to its full forms; not to the apoco- pate ones. Very rarely is the final vowel of the verb dropped ; as in linttKE instead of iS^'iM^ • Verbs Lamedh He with Suffixes. § 313. Suffixes here cause the final letter and vowel to fall away. The union-vowel is then supplied, or omitted, as the nature of the case requires. Note 1. Praet. 3 sing. fern, rejects the final n_ , and then follows the analogy in regular verbs, as to the n before the suffix. Note 2. Suffixes, beginning with a consonant, sometimes cause the original Yodh to be restored ; asniT'Yn , i^CTT , Ten , D^fiHMJ, etc.] NOUNS. § 314. Derivation. Most nouns in Hebrew are derived from verba , and in general they have for their ground-form* the Inf. mode or Participles. A comparatively small number of nouns are probably )>rimitive ; but these conform, in their inflection, to the usual laws which regulate those derived from verbs. § 315. Declension in Hebrew nouns, differs much from declension in Greek and Latin. The plural and dual numbers are, indeed, dis- tinguished by appropriate endings added to the ground-forms ; but case. 118 §816. Niiins; &BlflRAL CLASSIFICATION, BT< properly considered, is not marked by any peculiarity of inflection in the noun itself For the most part, it a designated i>\ prepositions and the construct state of the preceding noun, §3:32. Hut the plural and dual endings, the suffixes, and whatever increases the original ground-form of the noun, and shifts the place of its tone, occasion a variety of changes- in the vowel-points and in the forms of nouns, which may not unaptly be called declensions. § 316. Classes of Noum in respect to origin. Nouns, like verbs, are either primitive or derivative. Those of the latter class are di- vided into verbals* or those derived from verbs ; and denominatives, or those derived from riouns. Three classes of nouns may therefore be reckoned. (a) Nouns primitive ; which are principally those that designate animals, plants, metals, numbers, members of the human and animal body, and some of the great objects of the natural world. But among the names of all these, are some of verbal derivation. JVote. The form of primitive nouns is not distinguished from that of derived ones. They are treated, in their inflections, in the same manner as if they were derived. Only a knowledge of ety- mology, therefore, can enable the student to determine whether a noun is primitive or derivative; and in some cases, it may be doubtful to the best etymologist, whether a noun belongs to the first, second, or third class above specified. (6) Nouns derivative ; which are altogether the most numerous class. Very many of them appear to be derived either from Parti- ciples, or from the Inf. mood. The former more commonly denote the subject or object of action or passion, {nomen agentis vel patientis); the latter denote action or passion, {nomen actionis vel passionis). The first class are named concretes, being used to designate some being or thing; the second obstructs, denoting simply action or pas- sion. But to this principle, there are very many exceptions. (c) Nouns denominative; which are nouns derived from other nouns, either primitive or verbal. E. g. 2"i2 a vine-dresser, from the primitive D"ns a vineyard; "p'-li; eastern, from the verl al 2*ip. the east. The forms of these, resemble those of the other classes. [Note. Denominatives are usually formed, (l) by adding to verbals the masc. termination, ■>_ or the fern. rr_ ; e. g. WU six, ^SJH sixth ; "QSOE a Moabite, from UOJOj ^KniD 1 ; an Israelite, from -N")'^ , etc. Several adjectives, also, are formed in this manner ; as '■■J32 , fem. !"P"p3 strange, from 13: a stranger ; ^z'vCfc Jirst, from pD*lj2 , etc. (2) By adding n ,, _ , which is usually of the fem. gender. E. g. wJO princeps, n v £Nn principium. Words of this form are sometimes defectively written, as nx 1 ^ for FVUpX . (3) Rarely by adding the terminations n_ n_, \_ and ^_ . E. g. i-p-\N a lion, from " | -)N ; n»« fire-offering, from UN ; " l r"'3 a deceiver, from j" 1 ^ ; l "|T:2 a treasury, from T?.\ . §§317 320. NOUNS COMPOSITC AND PROPER J GENDER. 110 § 317. Nouns composite and proper. Composite noons are very rarely found in Hebrew, except in proper names. A few however occur, which are made up of two nouns, or of a noun and a particle. E. g. nia*2Z =ma jr^ shade of death ; "ri'"r2 worthless, from *r2 not and h?2 profit- Note 1. Proper names, in their formation, follow the general an- alogy of verbals as given in § 21G. b. Very many of them are com- posite, and consist usually of two nouns, or of a noun and a verb. E. g. "pJEPSa Benjamin, or son of my right hand; D^p^in"] Jehoiakim, or Jehovah will exalt. Note 2. To the first word in composite proper names, a Yodh is usually added, as rJOnss Gabriel or man of God, from "133 and rN ;; sometimes a Vav, as ^KlftiS Samuel or name of God, from D'S and bx . The name of God, either bx or mr,* , forms the beginning or the ter- mination of a great multitude of Hebrew proper names.] § 318. Gender of nouns. The Hebrew has only two genders, viz. the masculine and feminine. These are dis- tinguished sometimes by the Jbrm, and sometimes by the signification, ol words. §319. I. Gender distinguished by form, (a) In gene- ral, nouns arc masculine which end in one of the original radical letters of the word. (b) The feminine is distinguished by adding to the mas- culine, cither m_ , P. P_ or r __ . E. g "p.". a king, ttSlriO a queen; KSi] a sinner, nftKDh sin; and ^^SfS a Hebrew man, n" 1 "!^' a Hebrew woman ; *!1t3p , fern. fi"lbjP in- cense ; 3>*vto, fern. DV~pl2 acquaintance. The fern. n_ is appropriate to words with Gutturals at the end, § 141. [Note 1. The following terminations of the feminine actually occur, but they are rare; viz. (l) N_ ; as N:irr, for n:ip, § 122. J. (2) n_: as PHBT, poetic for n*lHT. {$) n_ with the proper vowel Pattahh, and with the tone on the ultimate; as n^pa emerald, nNp pelican, Vs. 102: 6. Note 2. The endings n" 1 - and PJl are also feminine. They arc contracted forms, for the full fern. rP_ and flj— , neither of which the language permits, § 120. c] § 320. II. Gender distinguished by signification, (a) Nouns which designate objects such as the following, are masculine, though thew hare a lorn, termination. 120 §§321,322. nouns; (1) Names of men ; as ni^T Judah. (2) Offices of men ; a 1 - r~t a governor. (:l) Nations; as rfllrr^ the nation of Judah. (t) Kivers; as !"T;?2N Amana. (b) Nouns which designate objects such as the follow- ing, are feminine, though thev have a mnsc. termination. (I) Names of women ; as brj*n Rachel. (2) Office or relations of women; as CN mother. (3) Countries; as TI1SK Assyria. (4) Towns ; as ~n£ Tyre. (5) Female lieasts ; as "pntf a she-ass. (6) Members of the body by nature double ; as "jTN the ear. Note 1. The same word may be masc. in one meaning, and fern, in another; as MTUr , Judah or the Jews, masc; but rmrP , the country qfJudea, feminine. Note 2. There are some nouns which are feminine, although des- titute of any distinctive sign of this gender, either in form or signifi- cation ; as "1N2 a well; 133 a talent, etc. These can be learned only from practice. §321. jXouns of common gender. A considerable num- ber of nouns are of common gender. Such are generally the names of beasts, birds, metals, etc. Note. 1. These nouns are mostly masculine as to form. Some of them are more commonly employed as masc. nouns ; others more fre- quently as feminine. These can be learned only from practice. What is of the neuter gender in the western languages, is generally designated in Hebrew by the fern.; as m^ r>3, daughter of 'lyre, i. e. city of Tyre. Note 2. Nouns of the dual number are universally of the common gender. § 322. Gender of the plural. In the plural, the appear- ance of nouns as to gender is in many cases dubious. A considerable number of masc. nouns form their plural as if they were feminine; while many fern, nouns have plu- rals of the masc. form, § 327. 1. E. g. masc. 3N a father, plur. rn^tt . Fern. ~'6f[ wheat, plur. BPBrl etc. Note. The gender of the plural, let the form be as it may, is, with few exceptions, regulated by that of the singular. Some words exhi- bit both the masc. and km. forma of the plural ; but the gender of both forms is the same, viz. it is the same as that of the singular. [§ 323. Formation of feminine nouns. The addition of the fem. terminations (§ 319. b) to the masc. forms, usually occasions some §323. nouns; gender. 121 change in the vowels of the masculine, hecause these terminations af- fect the tone-syllable of the ground-form. E. g. (a) 1 . The ending n_ draws down the accent, and consequently causes the penult vowel of themasc. form, if mutable, to be dropped ; §132.133. (2) In nouns etc. if the original word has more than one syllable, and is of the form of Dec. VII., the final vowel is dropped. (3) Such norms as Dec. VIII., in case they have a long vowel, exchange it for a short one with Dag. forte, or, in case this is excluded, substitute an equivalent for it, § 111. § 112. (4) Masc. Segholales receiving !l_ fern., assume the suf- fix-form in order to take it ; see Par. Dec. VI. (5) Nouns of declen- sion IX. drop their final n and its preceding vowelj in order to receive the fern. tt-. All these principles are apparent in the following ta- ble of formations, in which those nouns not accompanied by a common numeral mark, form the fern, by the mere addition of the fern. n_ to the masculine ; those marked 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, correspond in their forma- tion to the rules given in 1, 2, etc. above. The Roman numerals mark the declensions to which the masc. nouns respectively belong. Pec. Masc. Fem. Dec. Masc. Fein. Dec. Masc. Fern. I. DID riDTO VI. m ^3ba(4) n tVt9 ■pnftn nsinfin 9$\ ^■2 (4) VIII. on nan (3) II. KXi'a rt«xija ^;h man (4) rl *»= (3) III. bv-u nWi* (i) b$\ *\$ (4) n w? (3) pina rtjpina(l) !?3& Tib6« (4) ph rtgtj(s) DiJtr rroixsj (l) P!" *&?*(*) T3 -T3 (3) ima n^-aO) -!•% rtbis (4) n rna(3) DV.a tt»"'p.»(l) vk rtn-»a (4) 1JP rt-ito (3) IV. D ?,l *»B?(0 VII • Tl^ nnnfc»(2) ix. ncr rt»:(6) V. m wjhCO ijsP*> !"Hj?ia (2) W$"|J3 nN-)o(5) W: — :(<*) 2^t ftyi Note. As nouns of Dec. V. not unfrequently imitate those of Dec. VI. in their const, form (see Par.), so among the feminities derived from ground forms belonging here, are some that imitate the fem. of Dec. VI. E. g. *\11 , fem. na-P ; ban , fem. rtb3>\ For the form pfa» fem. rtjjina , under Dec. III., comp. § 127. Except. 1. § 270. b. 1. (b) The ending n makes no change in the original word ; e. g. 6ttoi3 , nNtah ; ''"ja*, nSas , etc. (c) The Segholate endings, n_ n_ , (l) Affect the penult vowel, in the like manner with -_ ; see above, a. (2) They change the ulti- mate mutable vowel ; according.to the rule in § 142. d. (3) If the final vowel be impure, they subsitute a pure one in its room ; e. g. lL^st , (n«*jji ; tiibv , rn$?tt) ; nunn: , nun: ; -psa , tl^l , etc. ; see § 127 Except. 16 I9B §§324 — :t-2i'». MH.Ns, FORMATION OF TBE PLURAL. Note. The Fem. Segholate form is usually cboMO Utt 1 h1 _ . E. g. (1) DTD, plur. tTDIO. (2) "133 , C 1 -)^: ; also as ^ , D*lb But the plur. ending, as might be expected, is sometimes written de- fective ; as izpprri, D:" 1 :!? idem, § 63. {b) The unusual forms of the plural, are (a) "p.— ; e. g. ^b, plur. ■pDbs, Prov. 31= 3. {b) \_ ; e.g. ]1>rj, ^iVh, Jer. 22: 14. (c) Perhaps " , _ ; e. g. ]X3 , ^iQ , Ps. 45 : 9. The forms a and 6, coincide with the Chald. and Syr. plurals. § 326. Plural feminine. The plural of fem. nouns is formed, («) By changing the terminations n_,P__, D_ of the fem. sing, into m, and by corresponding vowel-changes. E.g. nnin, plur. ni-nn,- fi*i\«, plur. roiae* ; nyru,plur. ni"30 . The n of the fem. ending sing, is, in a few cases, retained in the plural, as if it were a radical ; e. g. masc. in , fem. rib~, , fem. plur. rnnrr. (b) By annexing m simply to those feminines, which in the singular have a masc. form ; as ")JSG , plur. rniNS , § 320. Note 2. (f) By changing rP_ into IT)* 1 -, as n h "C?, plur. rh*-Q?; and rfl into ni*_ , as rfirfjjO, plur. r'Tlh'Z. Note. The plurals under c, appear to be derived from obsolete forms of the sing, in n*_ and rp_ . Nouns of these classes sometimes also torm their plural after the usual manner; as ITCH, plur. D*n ,, :)i and nimsri; ffl3T , plur. C\-i"T . The plural ending of the fem. form, also, is sometimes written defective ; as ri'rp for nV:p, etc. §§327 — 320. nouns; formation of the dual. 123 [§ 327. Heteroclites. Thus we may, in the manner of the gram- marians, name those nouns which specially depart from usual analogy. They are of/we classes. These are, (l) Such as are masc, and yet have plurals of the fern, form and masc. gender, e. g. 3N , n^ai* , § 322. and the Note. (2) Such as have two forms of the plural, while the gender of both follows that of the singular, e.g. ~:u; fern, a year, plur. D^.tfj and m: - i5 fem., §322. Note. (3) Some nouns have only a plur. form ; e. g. W2Z , the face. (4) Some are found only in the singular; e. g. PpS /ow/, S|B children, etc. These have a collective and plur. sense, as well as a sing. one. (b) Some words exhibit (like many in the Arabic) o pluralis plura- lium, i. e. a plural formed by a second plur. additional to the first one ; e. g. n£3 a high place, plur. niQ3 , plur. pluralium STiTEa .] § 328. Formation of' the dual. This is usually formed, by adding the termination D\_ ("P-) to the forms of the sing. ; e. g. (a) To masculines without change, (b) To feminines in H_ , after changing the final H into P . E. g. (a) En"*, t'biv (6) rt3-P, trn3-p . In nouns of Dec. VI., the dual ending is appended to the suff. form ; as b^H. , &*biH, see Par. Note. The dual endings appear, in some few cases, to suffer con- traction ; e.g. "jn"- for j"?rn , Qns-T for S^ro-p ; *y* for Q?V . These contracted forms are limited mostly to proper names. § 329. Use of the dual. It is used principally to de- signate such objects, as are double cither by nature or by custom. [E.g. t3^~^ (he two hands; t3")?y.3 a pair of shoes, etc. The names of members of the human body, which by nature are double, have al- so a plural as well as dual form; but the dual is generally taken in a literal, and the plural in a figurative sense ; as ETC 5 hands, rhB3 han- dles. Note 1. In a few instances, the dual form stands, instead of the plural, for a greater number than two. E. g. tn*~:3 U31Zp six wingi . E3")e.'JJ "iJblp three teeth. It hardly needs to be remarked, that tho dual is of course essentially plural, requiring a plural verb, adjective etc In some cases, it is difficult to show the reason of the dual form; as fia^rlX mid-day. etc. Perhaps it is intensive. Note 2. The words B^'jj heavens, and dyi waters, though ap- parently dual, are used as plurals.] 124 §§ 330 — 333. nouns ; gender or the dual — declension. § 330. Gender of the dual. It is erf common gender ; and it is found only among nouns, and not among adjec- tives or participles. § 331. The dual ending is sometimes annexed to the plural ; e. g. niEin walls, dual Q^nan two walls etc. Comp. § 327. 5. DECLENSION OF NOUNS. § 332. Construct state. The Hebrew has no cases, in the sense in which we speak of cases in Latin and Greek. But when two nouns come together, the second of which is to be translated as a Genitive, this relation is indicated, contrary to the usual custom of other languages, by some change in the jirst noun (if it be susceptible of change) instead of the second. The first noun so situated, is said to be in regimen or in the construct state ; while any noun not thus placed before a Genitive, is said to be in the ab- solute state. Two nouns, in such a relation, are supposed to be uttered nearly as if they were one word; for which reason the first noun is usually contracted in the utterance, (if it be capable of contraction), so that the stress of voice may be transferred to the second. § 333. The consonants of the ground-form or absolute state, are modified in regimen or the construct state as follows ; viz. (a) In all classes of masc. nouns sing., the const, is like the abs. form as to its consonants. (b) Feminines singular in H_ , change this ending into ri- ; as FttTV], const, n&tT • Other feminines singular suffer no change of their consonants. (t) The plur. ending D 1 *-- and the dual C\L become •L ; as C^DIO , const. WO ; fi^ , const, vjj . (d) Plurals in Dl suffer no change in their consonants, in the construct state. Remark. The vowels of words are also affected by regimen or con- struct state; see § 341 seq. §§334 — 336. nouns ; suffix state. I2fi § 334. Suffix stale. This is that form of nouns, to which are appended or suffixed fragments of pronouns, equivalent in signification to our pronominal adjectives in En^lisli. E.g. DTD a horse, with suffix, "iOTD his horse, etc. So Jsip voice, i?p vox ejus. Note. Pronouns or fragments of pronouns thus suffixed, may be considered as equivalent, in general, to nouns in the Gen. case, and as putting the noun to which they are suffixed into a kind of regimen, or const, state. Frequently the suff. state requires the same vowel-chan- ges as the const, state, but not always; as may be seen by the Para- digm of nouns, where both states are exhibited. § 335. Most of these suffixes, (like those of verbs § 304 seq.), cause the tone of the word to which thev are appended to be moved forward, and of course produce a change in the vowel-points; see § 129 seq. § 336. Noun-suffixes (like those of verbs § 307 seq.) have generally three different forms, adapted to the end- ing or number of the word to which they are appended. (a) The most simple form of the suffixes is that in which they be- gin with a consonant, and are appended to nouns singular ending with a vowel. (6) To the simple form of some of the suffixes, is prefixed a union- vowel, in which shape they are appended to nouns singular ending with a consonant. (c) The third form of the suffixes is peculiar to nouns plural. Here all the suffixes take a union-vowel ; and all of them, except that of the first person singular, insert a Yodh between the union-vowel and the suffix. [The following table exhibits the suffixes as appended to the various forms of nouns ; lb column (fl), containing those which are attached to DOUOl singular ending with ■ roirrl ; Hi cond (A), those which are attached to nouns singular cm]\u« with n consonant ; the third ■ hibiting the suffixes as they are attached to nouns plural. Bevotal BMUIial formi of suffixes are mihjoined. i-2<; V) 336. NOITNS ; SUFFIX STATE. («) «Df. Pimple form ] . my \^. 2 .... % ?J, q. 2f. thy <] 3 in. /lis Vltl- 3 f. for nl PI. 1, our 2 m. your 2 f. ?/o?/r 3 m. their 3 f. //iezV 13- CD on Wild un. vowel, etc. 1 3* i ri "inl id! P. D_ poet. I'D-- SufT. to noun« plural. V- i_ poet. wl. "\- P.V. dpp_ poet. ift^_ Note 1. Unusual suffixes to nouns singular. Sing. 2 masc. FllD- , Ps. 139: 5; riD- , Ps. 10: 14. 2 fern. sing. f- % Ezek. 5: 12; }_, Ezek. 23: 28. 3 fern. J1_ without Mappiq, Num. 15: 28 ; N_ , Ezek. 36: 5 forn_. Plural 1 pers. wl , Ruth 3: 2. Job 22: 20. 2 fern. n:D ; Ezek. 23: 48. 3 masc. Dn_, 2 Sam. 23: 6. 3 fem. rtDH^ 1 K. 7: 37, Note 2. Unusual suffixes to nouns plural. Sing. 2 masc. "3-, Nah. 2: 14. 3 masc. th, Ps. 116: 12, Chaldaic. 3 fem. MrK- , Ezek. 41: 15, for!-rl. P/ur. 2 fem. n:?.%. , Ezek. 13:20; 3 masc. nan\- , Ezek. 40: 16; 3 fem. n:;^- , Ezek. 1: 11; all with n_ paragogic. Note 3. The suff. '_ , joined to a noun ending with * , usually co- alesces with it; e.g. '13 a nation, ^ia my nation; but sometimes as "^D my fruit. Note 4. The sing, forms, 3 pers., !|i"r_ !"!_ are appended to nouns of Dec. IX. nal- is parag. for fi_, § 125. c. Note 4. Anomalies, (l) Yodh in the plur. suff. is sometimes omit- ted in writing; as "in" for T , 2")" , in—" for irparn , Gen. 4 : 4. T^l" for V~)3~ , etc. (2) Sometimes a sinsf. suff. is attached to a plur. noun; Vns for ^ny , Ps. 132: 12; ~ns"3 forVn.273, Deut 28: 59; laniaK for arpnhs* , etc. (3) Vice versa, plur. suff. are some- times appended to the singular ; e. g. SpIJShR for *fr»*]?rTFj, "]\"|i33 , thy building, for *frp33 , Inf. noun from r.:2 , Ezek. 16: 31. Nos. 2 and 3, are doubtless oversights of transcribers. §§ 337 — 342. nouns ; vowel changes in declension, etc. 127 Remark. The suffixes, d3 , ]D , tan, ]n, are called grave, be- cause they always bring down the tone upon them. With nouns sin- gular, they take no union-vowel. With nouns plural they have one, but do not allow it to take the lone. In all other cases, without excep- tion, the union-vowel takes the tone upon itself. The sing. suff. "^ takes the tone when preceded by a consonant ; and loses it when pre- ceded by a vowel. Other suffixes are called light.] § .'337. Feminines in Jl_ , in order to receive suffixes, change the final H into n. § 338. Nouns dual take the suffixes of nouns plural. § 339. The plural and dual, in order to receive suf- fixes, drop the appropriate endings of the abs. state, and take the suffixes in their place. E.g. "I^T, plur. La^tl?, with suff. T^"- So S\2 , dual &?&§, with suff. T^e?. § 340. Notes on Par. XXIV. This Par. shews the manner in which the suffixes are attached to masc. and fern, nouns. No. I. exhibits the usual suffixes in connection with a masc. noun, ending with a conso- nant. A fern, noun, terminating in a consonant, receives suffixes in the same way. No. II. exhibits the manner, in which suffixes are attach- ed to nouns ending with a vowel or quiescent letter. The noun 3N in its abs. state ends, indeed, in a consonant, but it is in this respect ir- regular. The const, and suff. state has Yoilh, as if from a form "^N ending with a Quiescent. The suffixes are of course of the simple form, i. e. without a union-vowel. The plur. of 2tf is rniMJ ; which takes suffs. like the plur. of min . No. III. exhibits suffixes in connection with a fern. noun. For fem- inines in n_ and n_ with suffixes, see § 390 and Dec. XIII. in the Paradigm of nouns. Voioel changes in declension of Nouns. § 341. As Regimen, and the suffix state, usually either change the tone of words, or occasion contraction in the method of uttering them, it follows, of course, that the vowels must be affected by them. Hut in almost every case of this nature, only the ultimate -and penult vowels arc affected. Fur tlio changes in the Consonants, sec $ 333. 138 $§343,344 n<>i \- ; vdwu. eiiAiraBi. § 342. Laws of the vowel changes* (a) When any ac- cession beginning with, a vowel, by means of declension or suffixes, moves the tone forward one place, the penult mu- table vowel of the ground form falls away ; m nouns, etc. of (he form of Dec. VII., the ultimate, vowel (alls away. E. g. -O'} , plnr. E^-o- ; with suff. "nM , 13*337 5 an( * so uitn all the suffs. which are either monosyllabic, or being disyllabic, have the tone on the penult. Examples of Dec. VII., where the final vow- el falls away, are a;ii» , ETq-iM, "Sri* , »3*iK, etc. See Par. of nouns, Dec. VII. Note 1. Nouns of Dec. VI. i.e. Segholates, inasmuch as their abs. form is an artificial one (§ 141), assume their original ground-form, in order to receive suffixes, or to make the dual ; e.g. abs. -T^O , with suff. "^btt , dual E3*3l?a . (b) When the tone is moved forward one place, by a syllabic accession beginning with a consonant, and when the word is in the const, state, the penult vowel is dropped, and the ultimate usually shortened. E.g. (l) By syllabic accession, viz. the grave suffixes (§ 336. Rem.), as ll'T, Qp-157. (2) In the const, state; as tSTj^R -07, the word of God. But in Dec. VI., the const, state remains unchang- ed, on account of the artificial form of the word (supra Note 1). In Dec. VII. words in the const, state often, (but not always), remain un- changed ; see Par. of Dec. VII. Note 2. The suff. "^ allows of two different forms in the noun to which it is appended ; e.g. (l) It shortens the ultimate vowel; as C3UJ name, 1\nv? thy name. (2) It places it in a simple syllable, by combining the final' letter of the root in a syllable with itself, and of course requires the previous vowel to be long; as "~ia- thy word. (c) When the tone is moved forward two places, and in the const, state of plur. nouns, both the ultimate and penult mutable vowels fall away. E.g. (l) By plur. grave suffixes; as SaD""^**. (2) By const, state, as ta&Tt ^"y^l the words of the people. For the mode of supply- ing new vowels, see § 137 seq. § 343. All fern, nouns, having forms like masc. ones, are declined in the same manner. Besides the usual changes in the penult vowel, as in masc. nouns, feminines §§ 344 — .347. nouns ; dec. I. II. 129 in n_, (l) Before a surf, beginning with a vowel, change H into D. (2) Before a suff beginning with a consonant they both change the H into n, and shorten the vowel im- mediately preceding the I"l . E.g. (0 tt3"«p, with suff. inSttJ. (*)Cj^n3». Am. plurals and Segholates follow the analogy of masc. nouns, as to their vowel chan- ges. § 344. General rule respecting suffixes attached to the plural, (l) In masc. nouns plural, light suffixes are attach- ed to the abs. state ; grave suffixes (§ 336. Remark) to the const, state. (2) In Jem. nouns plural, all the suffixes are attached to the const, state. Characteristics of Declension. — Nouns Masculine. § 345. The first declension of nouns comprehends all, whether monosyllabic or pollysyllabic, whose vowels are all immutable. E. g. 1P9 , CDJ5 , *i2 , ans , jVotf , nibJrJJ , etc. The single circum- stance that the vowels are immutable, marks this declension ; not the kind of vowels, nor the number of syllables. In many cases it is easy to decide whether the vowels are immutable, in others not. Thus in Vip , i^ab etc. the vowels are obviously immutable; but the vowels in 2N3, 'Bis , etc. can be known to be immutable, only from a lexi- con, or from a knowledge of etymology. 346. Notes on the Paradigm, (l) As the vowels are immutable here, additions to the ground-form of course occasion no change. (2) Some few nouns are treated sometimes as belonging here, and at other times as being of Dec. II. ; e. g. Ulnh , const. BJ^h , Dec. II. ; but plur. const. v >P"jh , Dec. I. The Lexicons note such. (3) Some few nouns, having i in the abs. state, exchange it for =1 in some of the derived forms; see Par. Dec. I. c, also § 127. Except. 1. § 270. 6. 1. In the Par., d presents the manner in which nouns, with a final Guttural and Pattahh furtive, are declined. § 347. The second declension includes nouns with final Qamets or Pattahh pure and mutable, whether monosylla- bles, or polysyllables with preceding vowels immutable. 17 130 §§ 348—352. nouns ; dec. II. III. § 348. Changes. In the const, state lingular, before the i^rave suffixes, and sometimes before ~, final Qamets goes into Pattahh, § 342. b. In the plural, the final \o\v- el falls away in the const, state, and before the grave suf- fixes, § 342. c. Remarks, (a) The permit vowel in nouns of this Dec, being im- mutable, of course is not affected by either regimen or suffixes. (6) Final Qamets, also, in many words is immutable, although it cannot be distinguished by the mere appearance ; e. g. "w^ilO , plur const. Tb-jiTS, etc. of Dec. I. Etymology and the Lexicons determine such cases, (c) Some nouns with final Qamets mutable, belong to Dec. VIII. ; e. g. D^ , plur. O'Va* , etc. The mode of declension, and of appending sufls. etc., enables the student easily to distinguish cases of this nature. § 349. Notes on the Paradigm. (1) Under a, t^Q^ (for CDE-) is sui generis. So from T hand, we have both D3"P and S2H" . (2) Ca- ses like c and d, with final Pattahh, are rare. Only the forms of the plural, determine the declension to which they belong. (3) Some participles in Niphal, from verbs tc, seem at first view to belong here; but they drop their Qamets in the plural, e.g. CNEE: , in- stead of C'Vt'JU; ; and such forms of participles as a\\)72l3: , probably have a ground-form like N2312: . § 350. The third declension comprises all nouns which have an immutable vowel in the final syllable, and Qamets or Tseri, pure and mutable, in the penult. § 351. Changes. Out of the abs. state, the mutable vowel of the penult falls away. Remarks, (a) Polysyllabic nouns, like "p n V3 etc., belong here, as well as dissyllabic ones. (6) In many cases, the penult vowel is appa- rently mutable, but really immutable ; e. g. i 3" , "l2=~' , ^2 , Dec. I. The Lexicons, and etymology, and declension, determine cases of this na- ture. Sometimes they are quite unexpected; as in mba, rflTH, etc. with Qamets impure. § 352. A'otes on the Paradigm, (l) Such nouns as the examples in d and e, more generally omit the Daghesh forte in the const, state, etc. as in the Par. ; but they sometimes retain it, as the nouns in smaller print shew. (2) The Seghol, under M in const, "p^yn , is oc- casioned by the Guttural ; so C , :S^y , etc. But 3? also takes Hhireq short, as const. firsts ■ (3) As to the exchange of Hholem for Shu- req, in/, g, see § 346. 3. § 127. 1. (4) In g, the Tseri under N in the §§ 353—357. nouns ; dec. IV. V. 131 sing, is immutable, only because it is a supposititious euphonic vowel, § 119. d. 2; the plur. is regular. The word, however, can scarcely be considered as belonging to Dec. 111. (5) In h , the short form in the const, state (bia gidhul) is rare, § 127. 3. It is used only before a Maqqeph. (6) In such rare cases, as "JTTTO , plur. □"^"HE , it is proba- ble that the ground-form of the plural is like ]3"1>3. (7) A very few nouns fluctuate between Dec. I. and III.; e. g. O^nO , const. O^D , as of Dec. 111.; but plur. DWO, as of Dec. I. § 353. The fourth declension includes all dissyllabic nouns with Qamcts pure in the ultimate, and Qaniets or Tseri pure in the penult. § 354, Changes, {a) Out oi' the ground-form, the pe- nult vowel always falls away. (b) In the const, sing., be- fore the grave suffixes, and sometimes before 7j, the jinal Qamets shortens into Pattahh, § 342. b. (c) In the plur. const., and before the plur. grave suffixes, both the vowels of the ground-form fall away, § 342. c; and then a new vowel, viz. Hhireq or Pattahh, is inserted, § 137. § 138. § 355. Notes on the Paradigm, (l) The vowels here, as in other cases, often present an ambiguous appearance. The Lexicons will determine their nature. (2) The examples c, rf, e, conform to the principles of pointing Gutturals, § 138. § 139. In e, however, the const, and suff. plur. conform to the analogy of other consonants, in their first vowel ; as the Gutturals sometimes do. (3) So, on the contrary, other letters sometimes conform to the usage of Guttunils; e. g. const, and suff. plur. of C|:3 , in f, with a Pattahh for the first vowel. (4) Nouns of the form g, derivates of Nb , belong in general to Dec. III., having the final N_ immutable. But in some few cases, like N3£ , the final Qamets is dropped in the const, and suff. plural; in which case they are of Dec. IV. (5) Cases like h and i, with a const. Segholate form, are not frequent in this declension ; yet they occur often enough to demand a distinct recognition. § 356. The fifth declension comprehends dissyllabic nouns with Tseri pure in the ultimate, and (Jaunts pure in the penult. § 357. Changes. The vowel-chances follow the anal- ogy of Dec. IV., even in the const, and suffix forms. Lfl| $$ 8 W < > 1 . noom; dkc V. VI. $358. Notes on the Paradigm. (1) This declension might have been ranked with Dec. IV. ; but 1 conform to present usage. (2) The Seghol forms of the sing 1 , const, in c and d, are like those in A, t, of Dec. IV. (3) The assumption of Pattabh, in the const, fc ing., and before the grave suffixes, etc., is peculiar to this declension, and can be accounted for only by the near relation of the vowels Pattahh and Seghol. (4) Derivates of nb , like MrO , which apparently be- long here, have a Tseri immutable, and belong to Dec. Hi. The same is the case with a considerable number of other nouns, and par- ticipials; e.g. "jv , rjIP , *}•£* , yslTT , ba.N , HD'iJ , rVC/l), etc. all of Dec. 111., having their Tseri immutable, (o) A few words fluctuate between Dec. III. and Dec. V.; e.g. 3j?3> , const. 3j5 2 , Dec. III.; but plur. const. ^p'J , Dec. V. § 359. The sixth declerision comprises dissyllabic nouns, which have the tone on the penult, and a furtive vowel in the final syllable. In other words, this declension includes all Segholate nouns of two syllables; excepting a few nouns and Infinitives with the fem. Segho- late endings n_ , n_ , which belong to Dec. XIII. The furtive vowel of the final syllable is Seghol, Pattahh, or short Hhireq, § 141. Note. All Segholate forms are factitious and merely euphonic. They appear only in the abs. and const, states of the singular; for all nouns of this species, when they receive an accession, neglect the fur- tive vowel and develope their original state, which is a monosyllable ending with two consonants; as ?t^b , original form ^b^ , with suff. isrE, etc. § 360. Changes, (a) The const, sing, is generally the same as the absolute. (6) The suffixes of the singular are usually appended to the original form of the noun, (c) The plur. absolute assumes a form like that of nouns belonging to Dec. IV. ( *^H i Dut *P— > " , ?* ? '9 i e * c - (4) Original forms are sometimes found here ; as Nun , in: , etc. Remark. Some nouns, by usage, are treated as belonging both to the A and E classes ; e. g. *V*iri , nr^, , etc. see Lex. § 365. Notes on the O class, (l) The examples i, j, exhibit the two short vowels (in the suff. state), which correspond to the Hholem of the abs. state, and from which this Hholem is derived. (2) In k, I, the influence of s Guttural is seen. For the form of the suff. state 'ZD'y^VB pij-ol-khem, see § 140. Sometimes this form appears without a Guttural; e. g. ^Staj? , from nap , etc. (3) In /, a comp. Sheva is assumed under the first radical, in the plur. and light sufl'. state ; an occurrence very rare among nouns of this class. Anomalies. The nouns "£"vij , C*jj5 , rriN . exhibit some anomalic- in regard to their vowels; e.g. plot. t2PS)"lti sho-rd-slum, ta'^TjS qd-dd-shtm, ta^rrii* etc. Also MS , hj3 , hara , have anomalous plu- rals ; see the Lex. on these words. 184 §§ 386—386. nouns ; Die. VI. An original form hero is cujp. § 3GG. Segholates of verbs 12 and"* 2. («) Those of the A class have two forms, viz. with middle 1 (as in m, n), which, out of the abs. <-tate, quiesces in Shureq or Hholem, as in the examples; or with middle * (as in o, ;»), which out of the ahs. state, quiesces in Tseri or Hhireq. The forms like rRib , "p. r , with Qamets for a penult vowel, without the influence of an accent, are sui generis, and belong only to Segho- lates with middle 1 , in proper Heb. nouns. Some of the forms, like *V3> , have a regular plural. (6) Those of the E class all belong to Dec. I., and quiesce in Tseri or Hhireq; as pa, pf, etc., the Segholate form not being admissible here. (c) Those of the O class all quiesce in Hholem or Shureq, in the singular, which belongs to Dec. I ; as q, r. But the plur. is occasion- ally regular ; as in these examples. The form T.~is equivalent to Tl.T , and -n^=nri' . § 367. Segholates derived from verbs jjfe, imitate the Inf. Segholates. The root of verbs n'r is properly v r or "lb, § 280. Hence, as neither 11 nor "1, at the end of a word, will bear a furtive vowel before them, § 120. 6, (so that we cannot write ""-IE , "i~2), the form of the word is changed, so as to accommodate the nature of the final * or 1, i. e. the Inf. Segholate form is chosen, and the final vowel becomes homoge- neous with the Quiescent, § 117. 1. The examples s — w exhibit the modes of declining these peculiar nouns. They appear all of them to belong to the E or class of Segholates. The Par. exhibits the change which a pause accent produces upon them. The examples «, r, w, exhibit the regular plurals which they occasionally form. Note. The final quiescent ^ and T , here, do not make their vowel immutable. The general law of the vowel yields here, to the law which respects the form of the noun in the suff. and plur. state. Forms like =jri's=l77'i , are not found in the suff. or plur. state, in our present Hebrew. § 368. Infinitive Segholates. So I would choose to call such as are monosyllabic in their ground-form, with the vowel after the second rad- ical ; which is the established form of the Inf. construct, so often em- ployed as a mere noun. The class of mere nouns with such forms as USajf . 3tp , ~inz , is not large ; but the Inf. forms of this kind are ve- ry numerous, and the majority of them take a Hholem, as bDjD . The examples x, y, e, exhibit the modes of declining nouns of this sort; yy and —, the method of declining the const. Infinitives. See also in Par. XXII. the Inf. with suffixes, etc. §§ 369—373. nouns ; dec. VI. VII. 135 Note. The reason of classing these nouns and Inf. forms among the Segholates, is, that in the suff. state, etc. they conform altogether to the model of Segholates. § 369. Anomalous plurals of Segholates. Of these there are a num- ber, which in the plur. absolute take, in the first syllable, the vowel appropriate to the plur. construct ; e. g. ~^v\ , Q^tJJJ instead of Cf-)Tljy ; so 3>3b , S^aa ; 1-tfJ » ^1-.^ ; """^ tor ^l'-'. ■ Forms like fca^pip for a^i^i; ; S^n for :zp:nn, etc. sometimes occur. Note. In the plur. construct, Daghesh forte euphonic is not unfre- quent; as ipfcr] for ""jjbh , rriaaJT for rrt3»*, § 73. Note 3. Some other singularities of particular words, are noticed in the Lexicons. § 370. Segholates with a paragogic !"T- . This is appended, like the light suffixes, to the original form of the word ; e. g. ynN , ~:£~*N ; tnp. , ftJBljS: ; b?b, ilb"^ ; taS^P) ~?3\l; etc -i tne tone uniformly remaining on the penult. § 371. The seventh declension comprises nouns with Tseri pure, which are either monosyllabic, or have the preceding vowels immutable. § 372. Changes, (a) The const, singular is generally like the absolute ; in a few cases, it exchanges final Tseri for Pattahh. (b) In case of accession, the final Tseri generally falls away ; except in the plur. abs. of monosyllabic words, (c) Before suffixes beginning with a consonant and taking the tone, the final Tseri is shortened into Hhireq, Pattahh. or Seghol, according to the nature of the word. § 373. Notes on the Paradigm. (1) This declension includes most of the active participles, in their masc. forms ; which are declined like 6, c. The Part, of verbs b Gutt., are declined like d. (2) The forms like d, e, with Pattahh final (instead of Tseri) in the const, state, are not confined to nouns b Guttural, but appear in several other DOOD8; e. g. TDOtt , const. *1ED73 . It is peculiar here, that a number of nouns, which take a final Pattahh in regimen, throw away the preceding Pattahh, in such a case, and take a Hhireq ; e. g. Knvv . ~~z': ; >'2")73 y?~)73 , etc. Probably this may be in order to avoid two Pattahha in mixed syllables, immediately in succession. (4) The case e presents Seghol before the consonant suffix ; as in some few cases is the mage. (5) The final Tseri in this Dec. is not unfrequently retained, in the plur. absolute, as though it were immutable. Usually it is retained, in monosyllabic words ; as in the example g. Comp. § 358. 4, 130 §§*J74— a76. nouns; dec. VIII (»>) Some nouns, as na, ]T , rn (obs. root), lose their vowel in the Buff, state, and when they receive an accession, as if they belonged to this declension; e.g. ^4 , CS^T , CnS . (l) Some nouns with final Hholem pure, are inflected in the same way; e.g. HSttJt) , plur. nV;2«L"N ; "ip*W , suff. tig.*©. Peculiar is plur. nitta , plur. pluralium DTiES . § 374. The eighth declension Includes all nouns, which in- sert Daghesh forte in the final letter of the ground-forms when they receive accession. § 375. Changes, («) The construct state is generally the same as the absolute; bat before Maqqeph, ultimate long vowels are shortened. (6) Any accession causes the Daghesh forte of the final letter to appear ; and, if such accession takes the accent, the final long vowel (if pure) of the ground-form is shortened, (c) Penultimate vowels, if mutable, conform to the rules in § 242 seq. The following classes of words fall under this declension. (a) Nouns derived from verbs yj> ; as pV;, f? , b^, Jh, etc. ; and also the participles of those verbs in Niphal, Hiphil, and Hophal. (6) Other words in which the penult letter is dropped or assimilated to the final one ; as sb for 22b ; Inf. nR for n:ri , etc. (c) Some words which are either primitive or derived from a Pilel form of verbs ; as § 376. Notes on the Paradigm, (l) In a, 6, c, the const, state is gen- erally with Pattahh. In a few cases where the ground-form is as E3^ , Qamets is retained. (2) In c, the exchange of Pattahh for Hhireq, in the suff. state, e. g. TQ , +#B , is peculiar, and is found in but few cases. (3) In d, the Tseri sometimes goes into Pattahh; as "jr, i;3; n3>, ^W , hut with n_ parag. nny . In like manner, Seghol goes into Hhireq short; as b>!-p , ifen*l2B . (4) In e, f, the short vowels may be either short u or 0, § 128. b. (5) Polysyllabic nouns regulate their ultimate and penult syllables in conformity with the laws of other de- clensions ; as in the cases g, A, the former with a pure penult vowel, the latter with an impure one. (6) Nouns of the forms in i. make the const, in s _ , except in the phrase Sfin* '•n . Nouns in \* double the Yodh ; as *£, EP^b . (7) When the final letter is a Resh or a Guttural, and cannot be doubled, the compensation for Daghesh ex- cluded is as usual ; see in /, k, and also in ^ 1 12. For k, see § 1 1 2. Note. §$ 377—382. nouns ; dec. IX. X. 137 Note. A few nouns belong to this declension in some of their forms, and to other declensions in others; e. g. n>t , C , :"!i -, 3 , etc. ; for which, see the Lexicons. General Remark. Nouns of various declensions, as to the naturo of their rowels, helon" to this declension. It is only the doubling of the final consonant, which makes the peculiarity of it. The vowel-changes are all governed by laws belonging to the general principles, adopted respec- tively in other declensions. § 377. The ninth declension comprises all those words ending in n_ , which are derived from verbs T\? • § 378. Changes, (a) In the const, singular, final Se- ghol is changed to Tseri. (6) With suffixes, etc. the ending H— is dropped, (c) Penultimate vowels, if muta- ble, conform to the usual rules respecting the vowel-chan- ges. § 379. Notes on the Paradigm, (l) It is only the final ending T>- , which characterises this declension. The penult vowel may be im- mutable, as in a ; or mutable, as in b. It is treated according to the general laws of the vowel changes. (2) With suffixes, these nouns imitate the verbs from which they are derived, and throw away their final consonant and vowel, as in a, b. (3) The const, vowel, Tseri, {longer than the Seghol of the ground-form), is altogether a peculiari- ty in the phenomena of declension. NOUNS FEMININE. § 380. The tenth declension includes all nouns with the feminine ending I"I_ , and the preceding vowels immutable. § 381. Changes. In the const, state Jl_ becomes D_; before suffixes, it becomes H— or D_ . The plural is usually ni . § 382. JVotes on the Paradigm, (l) In regard to the fern, ending rt_, in the abs. state, although its vowel coalesces with a Quiescent, and on general grounds would be immutable ; yet, in this case, the laws of vowels yield to the demands of case or relation, i. e. a change of the vowel is effected, by a more imperious law which re- quires a change, in order to designate the relation in which the noun in question may stand to other parts of the sentence connected with it. (2) The student will see that Qamets is retained under the penult letter, whenever it stands in a simple syllable ; according to § 130. 18 138 §§383—389. noons; dec. XI. XII. § 383. The eleventh declension comprehends all nouns with the fern, ending H_ , and a mutable (jaunts or Tscri in the penult syllable. § 304. Changes. These are the same, by reason of declension, as in Dec. X ; except that here, the mutable vowel of the penult falls away in the const, state and be- fore sufltxes. §385. Notes on the Paradigm. (1) The cases a, 5, simply follow the analogy of Dec. X, with the exception, that the penult vowel un- dergoes the mutations which the general laws of declension demand. (2) In c, ci, e, after the penult vowel falls away, there would remain two Shevas at the beginning of a syllable ; which being impossible, a new vowel arises, agreeably to §§ 137, 138. (3) Many nouns (of Dec. XI. in the abs. state) conform out of this altogether to Dec. XIII; so that only the abs. state belongs to Dec. XI., and all the rest to Dec. XIII. Such are noted in the Lexicons. § 386. Remarks, (l) Many fem. nouns apparently belong here, but really to Dec. I., because the penult vowel is immutable ; e. g. nrN , flN-H) , ft^fa , !~D"Y3 etc. ; all such a good Lexicon notes. (2) A few nouns, by usage, are employed as belonging both to Dec. X. and XI ; e. g. ftfc*, const. nc"«, suff. TiB* Dec. X. ; so rib?:, const. HbM, suff. ,, r)VM , Dec. X., commonly as nbn; , inba: , etc. The Lex. should designate such. § 387. The twelfth declension includes all those fem. nouns in ?"l- , derived from Segholates of Dec. VI. The feminine ending is attached to the original masc. form of the Segholate, as ^b.^. , fem. nsbtt ; so that these nouns have the appear- ance of belonging to Dec. X. § 388. Changes. Nouns belonging here are declined exactly like those of Dec. X. in the singular; but the plu- ral conforms to the model of the plurals in Dec. VI. § 389. Notes on the Paradigm. (1) The example a, is a derivate of the A class of Segholates ; 6, c, of the E class ; d, of the O class. (2) The form in e, exhibits the effects of Ayin Guttural upon the vow- el-points of a word. Remark. There are a number of nouns, which to appearance be- long to this declension, e. g. STlSfl , ntpB , etc., but which in reality belong to Dec. X. The plural at once distinguishes them ; e. g. plur. nYlXE , not frilttH , etc. as it would be in Dec. XII. §§ 390 — 394. nouns ; dec. XIII. — dual number. 139 § 390. The thirteenth declension includes all fem. Sc- gholates in n _ and D _ ; i.e. all those which have the tone on the penult, and a furtive vowel in the final sylla- ble. The furtive vowel here is Seghol or Pattahh ; and, as it is facti- tious, it appears only in the abs. and const, state. The original vowel re-appears, as in Dec VI., whenever the word receives any accession. All fem. Infinitives and Participles in n_ or n_, fall under this de- clension. § 391. Changes. The sing, number is declined as in Dec. VI. The plur. absolute is quite anomalous, some- times dropping the original final vowel of the ground-form, and sometimes retaining it. § 392. Notes on the Paradigm, (l) The example a exhibits the manner of Segholates belonging to the A class ; 6, c, those of the E class ; d, e, those of the O class, whose short vowel may be short o or u. (2) The fem. Inf. forms are declined as in/", g. Remark. Some nouns of the E class take Pattahh, in their final syllable before a suffix ; e. g. rip.?. i"» , " , np3 : P ; Inf. form, nn\b. , ^PO - ^ , Ps. 23: 6. Nouns of the Dual number. ft 393. These are exhibited in Par. XXVII. (a) From the Par. it appears, that the const, state of the Dual is the same as that of the plur. masc. in ft" , _ . To this form the grave suffixes are attached, as in the plural; see § 344. (6) The Dual, in general, effects the same contraction of the vowels of the sing, ground-form as the plural ; but in Dec. VI., the contraction is still greater; e. g. *p.a , Dual D^S"»2 ; the plur. would be D^Sna . Note. There are but a few nouns of the dual form. Dec. IX. ex- hibits none. Of those that actually occur, some have no singular \ others have no const, form. The nouns O^b-b and a"«73 , are of the dual form, but are used as plurals. Nouns with Anomalous forms. § 394. Such are at; , mj , lrjt$ , niftM , tt»^ , httt* , ni£>N , rVJ$ . ■JS, rtn , Eah , Or* , *}>3 , Cava , V* , fiQ , ttjrfl ; the peculiar deriv- ative forms of which, the Lexicon exhibits. 140 <§4 896, M(>. noi;ns ; cardinal numrf.rs, BTC. NUMBERS. § 395. Cardinal numbers, (a) From 1 to 10 the forms of cardinal numbers have the distinction of gender, and generally also that of the abs. and const, states. From 3 — 10 however, the primitive forms are of the f em. gender; while the derivate forms (in n_ and n_) are of the masc. gender. {b) From 11 — 19, the cardinal numbers are of a compound form, i.e. they are made up by joining the word "VZ)y in the masc, and nHfcJS in the fem., to the units. These numerals, thus formed, have no const, state, but are put in apposition, or adverbially, with other nouns. Note. The words "liuy and iniDS are found only in the above T » Y f connexions, and are evidently derived from "VJpy (en ; somewhat like the termination teen for ten in thirteen, fourteen, etc. (c) From 20 — 90, the cardinal numbers are the plural forms of the corresponding units ; except that the form for 20, is the plural of the form for 10. All these are of common gender, and have no const, state. Note. When intermediate units are to be expressed, they may either precede or follow the tens; as jpVSgjl so*.:; = ssiih CVTJJ = 77. (d) Hundreds are expressed by the forms of the word nN£ pre- ceded by the nine units ; thousands, by the forms of S)bj* with the same units ; ten thousands in a similar manner by the forms of ~-2"i , T3"! , or Ni3"n ; see in the Par. under D. E. Note. In expressing a sum of hundreds, with intervening tens and units, the smaller numbers may either precede or follow the hundreds; as n:UJ asig 5 ! nzt ^VZl t=rn\i; = 162 years, Gen. 5: 18; or cViO SZTJip 1 ) fia^aSJ msa =372, Ezra 2: 4. The latter mode prevails in the later Hebrew. In expressing thousands, with intervening smaller numbers, the for- mer are placed first ; as Sa^attH nifitJQ ©J0tt3 P^s* nsasi = 8580, Num. 4: 48. § 396. Ordinal numbers. The ordinal numbers extend only from two to ten. Beyond this last number, and some- times also below it, the cardinal numbers are used as or- dinals. The ordinals are derived from the cardinals by annexing to them the termination T. . Most of them likewise insert *«. before the final letter of the ground-form. Note. The ordinals sometimes have a fem. form in rp_ , and some- §§ 397 — 399. nouns — adjectives. 141 times in n*_ . In this shape, they are commonly employed to de- note part ; as Wl'tW , the tenth part. § 397. Notes on the Paradigm, (l) A exhibits the usual forms of the cardinals from one to ten. The fern. nr:N is for rnna . The form 13 ^2. IB is dual, as if from ]'d ; the fem. D*hv (for D^n:^) is also dual, as from an obsolete root, n:d . The Daghesh in 3Tn£J is regarded as Dag. lene, 3 being dropped, but the Dagh. that would follow it be- ing retained. (2) There is a dual form of mase. cardinals, which is used adverbially ; as O'n^tt sevenfold, Gen. 4: 15, 24, etc. t3"^n?2"lN fourfold, 2 Sam. 12:6. (3) The plurals of some of these forms like- wise appear; as 3P"inN , Gen. 27: 44; rn-Upy tens, Ex. 18: 21, 25, etc. (4) A few of these cardinals are also found with suffixes ; t as ^ZIZJ, both ofus; t33ir 1 b; , '

n'=429; ttXSp = 4898 ; nD:^' = 1828. Note. Fifteen is denoted by 1t:= 9+6 = 15 ; never by !"P , be- cause this last is the contraction for the word nin 1 . ADJECTIVES. § 399. Hebrew adjectives have no peculiar and appro- priate forms, but only such as are common to nouns. The fem. form of the adjective is derived from the masoulne in the same manner as the fem. nouns, § 323. The dual number does not occur here. Whatever has been said of the forms of noun*, in the maeftding sections, applies nl«« lo atijer fives ; ko that the InttPr do not need to be treated of separately. 142 §§ 400 4 OH. TAHTICLES — A9VMSS. Note. Comparison in adjectives ig formed by a periphrasis, for which see § 454 seq. The const, state of adjectives appears mo^t fre- quently when they are used as nouns, or with a noun understood ; as Sk"*^ , the upright of heart, Ps. 6: II. PARTICLES. § 400. Under the general appellation of Particles, are comprehended adverbs, prepositions, conjunctions, and inter- jections. § 401. Like nouns, some of these are primitive, but most of them derivates. Of the derivates, some have an ending appropriated solely to the form of particles, as OD'DH truly, from "jftN truth; while most retain the form of verbs, nouns, or pronouns. Note 1. Compound words are more frequent among particles, than among 1 the leading 1 parts of speech. Apocope is also more common ; all the prepositions, etc. which consist of only one letter, being doubtless apocopated words ; as b for bN -M for "jft , etc. Note 2. The older grammarians have, for the most part, consider- ed all the particles as derivative nouns ; but this is hardly probable, as primitives are found in all the other parts of speech. It is, however, very difficult to draw the exact line between the primitive and deri- vative forms, as the etymology is often much obscured, by the chan- ges which the particles have undergone. ADVERBS. § 402. Some derivative adverbs have appropriate endings ; e.g. (a) In &_ ; as =u£N truly, from "J73N truth. (6) In D J ; as a^nc sud- denly, from "nc the wink of an eye. (c) In rP— ; as rP3'.2J , a second time, (d) In "»_. ; as VK , from TN then. § 403. Many derivative adverbs have the forms of other parts of speech ; e. g. (a) Of nouns with a preposition ; as O^cb before, n^ra upwards, etc. (6) Of nouns in the Accusative ; as sing. ftu\ securely, plur. E^-iU^S uprightly. Some of these forms are no longer used as nouns ; as "pi* not. (c) Of adjectives ; as masc. SiVwell, fern. S"HH*3 quickly, plur. rhioiD fearfully. These are used in a neuter sense, §§ 404 — 407. prepositions. 143 like multum, nollu, etc. {d) Of the Inf. absolute, especially in Hiph- il ; a9 *i\9 again, literally redeundo ; H2")n much, lit. multiplicando ; QSJiJr] early. Sometimes with a preposition; as 3i^b abundantly. (c) Of pronouns ; as HT here ; na how etc. § 404. Some adverbs are compounded of other words, (a) Of pre- positions and adverbs ; as "jS-b^. wherefore ; T'J»r^_ how long ? (fc) Of two adverbs; as HCW where, from "W and t"JD , etc. § 405. Several adverbs receive after them verbal suffixes ; in which connexion the suffixes are generally in the Nominative case. E. g. ^I'T'J I am yet, IS^IS he is yet ; 13|*$ he is not ; i'N where is he ? Gen. 3'- 9, flS^.N (for ^p.N) where art thou? The suffixes are usually those with an epenthetic Nun, which belong to the Fut. tense. PREPOSITIONS. § 406. Four prepositions, 3 : , 3 , b , a (•»), consisting of only one letter, are united with the words which they govern. E'robably they are all derivates of roots which were of a more complete form. This is certain as to a (which comes from "ja) ; and probable as to the oth- ers ; see the articles in the Lexicon. For the various vowel pointing of these prepositions, see § 152. b. § 407. Derivative prepositions, making words by themselves, (and most of them are of this kind), have the forms of other parts of speech, viz. (a) Of nouns sing, in the ace. case, or const, state ; as y/l causa, on account of ; "n:.. before ; niin under, etc. {b) Of nouns plural in the const, state ; as b*f , to, for, """rtf poetic ; "j& , ^53 , etc. Several prepositions take suffixes of such a form as are usually attached to the plural, as well as such as are attached to the singular ; as nrtn , 1 rrr. "^"^i Dut a l so w ' tn sing. suff. dnrtn, etc. So bv upon, plur. const. *\9 poetic, with suff. "^y , *p£jP , SS^SJ . (c) Of nouns in the const, state with prefix-prepositions; as TJ3 by; "'SSb before etc. (d) Of ad verbs with prefix-prepositions ; as pN3 , "'fibsb without ; TNtf since, etc. (e) Of adverbs followed by a preposition, so as to denote but one idea; as b 1^30 around; b b?73 above; ]73 yin without, etc. (f) Of a dou- ble preposition ; as £a^a from with ; ^2.12 between ; D^n bx under . like the French aVaupres, de chez etc. (g) Of a paragogic letter or suf- fix, viz. H- toxvards, to ; as fflWo towards Sodom ; "JpN to the ground, etc. So also n_ and n_ , in a few cases ; as n?.\o to Syene, Ezck. 29 : 10; T\fltoNob, 1 Sam' 21: 2. Note. Prepositions take noun-suffixes, (both in the manner of ling. and plur. nouns) ; very seldom are verbal-suffixes appended to them, e. g. as "^nftn , narftn , , :n ^3 . 144 § 40*. I'REI'OSIIID.Vs. § 408. Several prepositions and particles, are united with the pro- nouns in a peculiar way. The following table exhibits a view of these peculiarities. 3 V \a iV W * w « »R « is ft 13*2 D33 cab TO T* D3 T ' *.* T (TO) TO n\ sis-ri&a rnaa WiSaa (D31733) D33 Dns ens ani?23 _5 (osisa) ana TO DN of the Ace. ns Tt'i'^A. Ti'lN , "»rjN =i:nN "** I3n« Ci™) 1 ^ ti&P.fy D3.PIN ft™!) W D3P,K -fnk n^N ■jn« Dn«, Dn.r?s$ ift« DDK T - -nix W "jrjn^ T • Notes on the Paradigm, (l) The suff. ^ sometimes takes the par- ag. "_ ; e. g. "33 = ^3 , nab = ^b , etc. (2) Before suffixes, 3 re- quires the parag. 173 as a union-syllable ; as in the table. (3) "J73 , becomes "paa (= 1?2*a i. e. ]73 doubled), before most of the pronouns; not before all, e.g. 0353 = C3:a , etc. (4) n» , the sign of the Ac- cus., (also standing sometimes before other cases § 427. Note 2.), in union with pronouns, always assumes the form DN , or (as it is often written plene) niN . (5) DN , with, appears to be derived from a root 3>3> , or to stand (as Gesenius supposes) for n*N . It is imitated throughout, in its Daghesh and its mode of taking suffixes, by a? •with ; as **}& , ^as , etc. Note. The parag. forms, nan , Ttlh , take prepositions without change ; as rtaftS , rtsna , nana , etc. §§ 409, 410. CONJUNCTIONS — INTERJECTIONS. 1 16 CONJUNCTIONS. § 409. Of primitive conjunctions, there are only a few ; and most of these are monosyllabic. Derived conjunctions have the forms (n) Of pronouns; as Tiljfit (■*) because, that; like on, quod, etc. (6) Of pronouns preceded by prepositions ; as itN'ir because , "lllN - "? until, etc. (c)Of a double conjunction; as " , ~> C3 although; CX "O but, unless. INTERJECTIONS. § 410. Interjections, being exclamations expressive of joy or sor- row, are for the most part primitive. Derived interjections have the forms, (o) Of verbs in the Impera- tive, both of the sing, and plural forms; as nnrj age ! plur. Ian, from in" 1 ; C~ hush, be still! plur. ISn in Piel, from n"n ; HN~\ idov, ecce ! (6) Of nouns; as " l "V£N O the blessedness of! n'^infar be it from, God forbid! "Q O hear! "2~\ enough, hold! Note. The interjection !"i:ri takes after it verbal suffixes in the Nominative case ; as -, : > 3,ri , "'3*3,71 ecce ego ! ~:ri ecce tu ! etc. 10 PART IV. SYNTAX. I\ tlio Syntax, etymological arrangement is not followed, but that which is most convenient and simple, in the natural order of senten- ces. ARTICLE. §411. Insertion. of the Article. In general, the He- brew article (§ 162), like the in English, is used in speak- ing of a definite, beibre-mentioned, well known, or mona- dic object. E. g. Y- 7 ?^ ( h e king ; Gen. 2: 7, S"1J$~ the man before mentioned ; l£X}i$3 the sun ; V"? : N^ the earth, etc. But in poetry, definite objects are often designated without the article ; as Ps. 48: 3, ' the city in ~:/:. of the great king ? Ps. 72: 1. In a similar manner the earlier Greek poets, particularly Homer, omit the article where the Attic prose wri- ters insert it. § 412. The article is commonly, but not always, used in cases such as the following, viz. (a) Before a noun in the Genitive, when the first noun requires the article ; e.g. "f" 1 .^" "-£■? ^ ie kings of the land ; WBftban " i u3:N the men of war i. e. the warriors, (b) Before a noun of multitude in the singular; e.g. yttj*>!l the wicked, p^l^Jj the righteous, ^:y:3~ the Canaanite. (c) Before generic nouns, when used with a particular, individual signification ; e. g. ~^~}~ the river, i. e. the Eu- phrates; "12"^- the desert, i.e. the Arabian desert; ]"^w*~ the adver- sary, i. e. Satan, 6 diaf/okog. {d) Before the Vocative ; e.g.E3?fo&n O heavens! EL*n O sea ! Note 1. The article is sometimes used as a pronoun, either demon- strative or relative; e.g. Bl'tl this day, ~'r*"r- this night, t3?sri this time. So also Jos. 10: 24, ' the warriors iflN 8M3bnrj who accompani- ed him ? Judg. 13: 8, ' the child n'^'" which is born ;' etc. Note 2. The Hebrews sometimes employed the article with an indefinite signification, like the English a or an; e.g. 1 Sam. 17: 34, s§ 413, 414. syntax: article. 147 ■n»tn a lion ; Num. 11: 27, -\vztj a youth etc. So Is. 7: 14, nftbyn may, in conformity with this rule, be rendered a virgin and not tAe maiden, as Gesenius and othors have translated it. In cases of this kind, however, the article is usually omitted; as Job 1: 1, 'there was w\\ a man ;' Ex. 2: I 5. Note 3. The indefinite article, a or an, is sometimes expressed by IriwNt one; as 1 Sam. 1: 1, 'there was inx E^ a man,'' etc. This construction is usual in Chaldee and Syriac. So in Greek, Matt. 21: 19, Gvxtt ptu, a Jig-tree ; Mark 14: 51, fcTg Tig veuvioxog, a young man, etc. §413. Omission of the article. This takes jilace, (l) Before proper names, especially those of persons, countries, rivers, mountains, and places. To this principle, however, there arc so many exceptions, that it can by no means be regarded as a general rule in the language. Thus rHS Euphrates always omits the article, and 'IW'vrj the Jordan al- most always has it. So ■ , :" , q .Sinai, "p*£ Sion, etc. are always without it; but pzibn Lebanon, rEp^ri Carmel, etc. often with it. (2) Before a noun in the const, state followed l>\ a Genitive. E.g. rrirP *"DT the word of Jehovah, instead of "^-H etc. But ex- ceptions here shew that usage is variable. Thus, when the following Gen. is a proper name, which excludes the article, the frst noun may take it; as Gen. 31: 13, barn^ ran , the Clod of Bethel; Gen. 24: G7, m\U —'rnxri , to the tent of Sarah. So where two Genitives come together; as Ezek. 45: 1G, yi^n D^rj iris , all the people of the land In a few other cases, it is also used by way of emphasis, etc. (.'3) Before a noun which has a sullix pronoun. But here also the article is sometimes used, especially with a Gen- itive, or for the sake of emphasis, etc. ; as Josh. 7: 21, ^nftjn -pM , in the midst of my tent, etc. Note. Hefore Iho predicate of a sentence, it ia mora usually omitted : bul often Inserted » BM definiteness is required. Gmrral Remark. In nil the case-; where tho article is omitted, and in n nich tii'- objeol siill is a'ejEiute, either the nature of the thing itself, or of its adj its, marks thai defniteoM I | in No. 1. above, being a proper name makei the noun iiifimn ,■ in No. •-'. the follow in| Gen. makes it definite; in No. 3, the pi ran doea this ; audio in other caaea of omi n which i*i"in tbeii nature are ilrjimi. §414. (l) Article before adjectives, [n general, where a noun has the article, the adjective or pronoun agreeing with it must also have the article, IIS §§ 414, 4l5i syntax; abtkm: — NOUNS. I. g. Gen. 10: 12, nbiian 1!*97\ the great city; Num. 1 1 : 34, NTnn Zip ;:n , this ; place. But this principle is not uniform; fors O B MP times the noun has ;m article, and the adjective omits it; as Gen. 89l 2, n-ilJI "p.N.rj , the great stone ; 2 Sam. G : 3, ~~~~ riblWt, t/je new waggon. (2) The article: is usually omitted before adjectives, (a) When the noun to which the adjective belongs, omits the article; e. g. "mTN u23, a lame lamb, etc. Note 1. But when the noun omits an article, required hy the sense, merely through the influence of a suffix pronoun, or of a Gen. which follows it, the adjective which helongs to it may still take the article ; as 2 Chr. 6 : 32, ^i"!^ f»ttS , thy great name ; Deut. 11:7, blTiin "Iff HtoTa , the great work of Jehovah. (b) When the adjective is the predicate of a sentence. E.g. to^ifbfijn S^B, God is good; ft-lfr* C3^n "]"~12, the name of Jehovah he blessed. Compare § 413. Note. Note. Practice is not uniform in regard to the article, in any of the cases tinder § 414. Instances are not rare, where the noun omits the article, (without any of the reasons for it assigned in § 41.3. ahove), and the adjective still has it ; e. g. 1 Sam. 19: 22, b'nz- i ; 2, the great cistern ; Jer. 3C : 14. 46: 16. 50: 16, etc. In some cases ap- parently of this nature, the article is to he rendered as a pronoun; e.g. STJirrrn ~l"n, [like] ' a wall which is tottering.' NOUNS. § 415. The case absolute. By this is meant, the case of a noun which stands in the beginning of a sen- tence, without any verb, or predicate, directly belonging to it. The case absolute is more commonly the Nomina- tive. § 416. Mcdcs of construction, {a) When the noun in the case ab- solute, is the real subject of the sentence which follows, a Vav copu- lative succeeds it ; as Job 36: 26, "lJ3rl NlM TIB " , t I ?fc > " :,s ,0 tfie number of his years, surely there is no computation," i. e. his years can- not be computed. (6) The case absolute is sometimes found, where the sense requires an oblique case ; and then the oblique case is most commonly made by a pronoun ; e.g. Ps. 18: 31, i-^" — Van -$~, ' as to God, perfect is the way of him, i. e. the way of God is perfect, §§417—420. syntax of nouns; case. 149 where the Gen. of btin would be required; for the Ace, Ps. 74: 17, &rnSP nnN B)"jrn y"]f3 , ' as to summer and winter, thou hast made them.'' So Jer. 6: 19, rn nosn'T. Vnip, 'as to my law, they have ab- horred tV.' (c) Sometimes a participle is joined with the Nom., like the English case absolute ; as 1 Sam. 2: 13, ttnT ttnT aJ^-^3 , 'any man offering a sacrifice, the servant of the priest came, etc.' Note. Pronouns ate found in the case absolute, as well as nouns. § 417. The case absolute is sometimes made, (a) By the Ace, as Gen. 47: 21, 3CTTIN , l as to the people, he led them from one town to another.' (6) By the Dat. ; as Ps. 16: 3, C^iipb , ' as to the saints, who are in the land, all my delight is in them.' (c) By the Abl. ; as Gen. 2: 17, y^l 3iC2 n;^" V?*?., '"in respect to the tree of knowledge of good and evil, thou shaft not eat of it,' etc. Cases relative. § 418. Declension, In the Latin or Greek sense of the word, the Hebrew has not. The case of a noun is mark- ed, therefore, as in English, cither by the relation which it sustains to the sentence, (as subject, object, etc.) ; or by its relation to sonic specific part of it, (as regimen or const. state) ; or by prepositions connected with it, either ex- pressed or understood. § 419. The J\~o?n. case is known by its being the sub- ject of a sentence. This may be either one noun, or several, either sing, or plural, and the nouns may be of the ground-form, or in the state of regimen, (which belongs also to all cases.) See also, § 426. Note. § 427. Note 2. § 420. The Genitive case is most commonly made, by a noun preceding it in the const, state, § 332 seq. The noun itself, which is in the Genitive, undergoes DO change of form. Note. The Gen. in regimen, is generally placed immediately after the noun, etc. vvbicb causes it to be put in the Genitive ; but in ■ few cases, some word closely connected with the clause Ifl Inserted be- tween the Gen. and its antecedent. Thus, Gen. 7 : 6, a* 73 ^Ti -^-^ i a flood of waters was, Heb. a flood was of waters; Hos. 14: 3, ~,3 "py N'tDPl, thou wilt forgive all transgression, Heb. all thou-wilt-forgive transgression; Is. 40: 12. Job 15: 10. Is. 19: 8. One can scarcely 180 §§421 428. SVNTW Ol' NOUN.S J OKNITIVi: CASE. refrain from believing that Sticfa < uses, so contrary to the common usage of the Hebrews, must have originated from error in transcribing. § 421. The Gen. is often expressed, also, by tin id of the relative pronoun with a preposition; or by prepo- sitions alone; c. g. (o) By b T«pBt , which belongs to, which is to ; as 1 Sam. 21 : 8, ' the overseer of the herdsmen b-lBttS)!? T ^ aine °ff ect i *• e - m ms ^ eet ! P*- 24 : 4, Q1S3 "'jSa i P ure °f hands, i. e. of pure hands ; Prov. 6 : 32, 3b"-™'.0^. deficient of [in] understanding. So in Latin, integer vitae, scelerisquc purus, etc. vji§ 424 427. SYNTAX OF NOUNS ; DATIVE — ACCUSATIVE. l")l § 424. Significations of the Genitive. This case marks a great variety of relations and dependencies in Hebrew, which can be better exhibited by examples, than taught by rule. E. g. Judg. 9: 24, b?2"V ^a 05311, the violence of [towards] thi sons of Jerubbaal. Prov. 20 : 2, *]i:73 n*?^* i '^ e terror of the king, i. e. which he causes. Prov. 1 : 7, riirr ntf-p , the fear of Jehovah, i. e. reverence towards him. 1 Sam. 14: 15, ESTl'bJJ ri~nn, the terror of God, i. e. that which God hath sent. Is. 26 : 11, OJ>~nK3p., jealousy of [for] the people. Lev. 26: 45, OTJttJjfl fl'Ha, covenant o/'[with] the elders. 1 Sam. 16 : 20, D^r "133»?, the ass of bread, i. e. which car- ries bread. Ezek. 35 : 5, y£ flW , the sin of the end, i. e. which brings consummation. Is. 34 : 5, " , ft"")i7 C£ , the people of my curse, i. e. whom I have cursed. Is. 54 : 9, ft: "TO , the waters of Noah, i. e. of the time of Noah. § 425. Sometimes the Genitive, following an adjective, is used as a noun of multitude, and the adjective then de- notes a part of this multitude. E.g. Prov. 15 : 20. 21: 20, DnN ^03 , the foolish of men, i. e. foolish men. 1 Sam. 17 : 40, ' five D^IN "^Vrt smooth of stones,'' i. e. smooth stones ; Job 41: 7, D^raa "•D ,, SJM, the strong of shields, i. e. strong shields. § 426. Dative case. This case is marked bj 7 signi- fying to or for. Note. In a few cases b stands before the Nom. ; as 1 Chron. 3 : 2, ' the third was ci'rcnxr , Absalom? Sometimes before the Ace. ; as Ezra 8 : 16, 'I sent "iTiplrN^, Eliezer, etc.' The latter usage la common in Syriac. § 427. Accusative case. This is sometimes designated by Dtt , Tltt ; otherwise it is without any distinctive sign. Note 1. The use of ntf with the Ace. is limited, (a) To nouns with the article, (b) To nouns having a Gen. or sufiix after them, (c) To proper names. Consequently, it is used only in casea where a definite idea is conveyed by the noun. But in poetry, this usage is not observed with any strictness. Note 2. Sometimes nN is used before the Nom. ; as 2 K. 6 : 5, 7T-)2-nN1 , ' and the iron fell into the water.' Especially before the Nom. of passive verbs ; as Gen. 17:5, £J93J~rtfj , ' thy name shall no more be called Abram.' Sometimes, before the Nom. of neuter verbs ; as 2 Sam. 11:25, ntn -U^n-nat , k this matter, may it not displease thee; 1;V2 §§ 428 — 431. syntax of nouns ; constri n t-hm Ezek. 35 : 10, D^iarj ""r^-nN , ' the two nations arc mine.' See nX in the Lex. § 428. Use of the Accusative case. This commonly, as in other languages, denotes, (l) The objjecl of a transi- tive verb. (2) In a great number of cases, it forms ad- vcrbial designations of time, place, measure, etc. (3) It is also used, in all those cases where the Greeks understand yard, and the Latins, secundum, quoad, etc. E. g. (a) Place whither ; as 2 Chr. 20 : 36, tt^ttJ^R n=>V.b , to go to Tar- shish. (6) Place where; as Gen. 18: 1, brrN~ _ nnE, at the door of the tent, (c) Time when and how long ; as 3~\2 , in the evening; "1^.2, in the morning. So Gen. 27:44, CHnN DV3^ , during certain days, (d) Measure ; as Gen. 7 : 20, ' the waters rose fifteen n*:N cubits. 1 (c) The material from which any thing is made ; as Gen. 2:7,' God formed man *1B5 , of dust from the earth.' See § 511. Note 1. {/) Cases where ymto. would he implied in Greek ; as 1 K. 16 : 23, ' lame "Pra^-Di* as to his feet ,-' Ps. 3:8,' thou hast smitten all thine ene- mies ^n^. , as to [on] the cheek bone.'' (g) Cases where a noun is taken in an adverbial signification ; as Deut. 23: 24, ~3T: , voluntarily ; Ezek. 11 : 19, "ItlN 3b , unanimously ; Ex. 24 : 3, irut J?lp, unanimously, etc. (.3) The Accusative is sometimes put after participles, or verbal nouns with an active signification, and is govern- ed by them. E. g. 2 K. 4 : 1, nir!^-rJ< N^ , fearing Jehovah ; Is. 1 1 : 9, ?!??> yjifPTiN , the knowledge of Jehovah, lit. the state of knowing Jehovah. § 429. Vocative case. This more generally has the article to designate it; but not always. § 430. Ablative case. This takes ]12 .from, out of; 1 . in. by ; U2, with, etc. In other cases, the preposition is mere- ly implied. Construct State. § 431. A noun in this state, usually precedes another noun in the Genitive ; and this without any intervening word, §420. §332 seq. It also, in all cases where the nature of the vowels admits, suf- fers some change in its form, in order to designate this state, § 333. §§ 432 — 434. syntax of nouns; construct state. l.">3 § 432. The form of the const, state, however, is not limited to nouns before a Gen. case ; it often appeari be- fore nouns in other cases, governed by prepositions; and sometimes before adjectives, ")'CN , and 1 copulative ; e.g. (a) Before a noun with 2; as Is. 9: 2, "V^p z n-r:r .//ir joy in [of] harvest; Is. 5: 11, "ip.25 'WS'iJM , who rise early in the morning. (6) Before a noun with b ; as Is. 56 : 10, t3*3b ^"^ , lovers cf slum- ber, (c) With bN; as Is. 14: 20, -nn— '334t^bN *yyf* , going down to the stones of the pit. (d) With ni* ; as Jer. 33: 22, the Levites *-->-': TjN , who served me. (e) With ]H ; as Jer. 23 : 23, 31TDH "TTVK , a God near at hand. (/) With by ; as Judg. 5:10, "J ■}"":? "-'"H 1 w,in go on the way. {g) Sometimes before adjectives; as 2 K. 12: 10, Ihij "JT"?^ , one coffer (§ 440. a); Is. 17: 10, p*3*3*y 'spl , pleasant plants ; see § 445. § 440. (A) Before -i;L\V ; as Lev. 4 : 24, TIN Sipa, //'<• pioM which. So also, even if TwN is only implied, as Is. 29 : 1, ~:~ n'np TIT , the city [*VgM where] Dam'd c/we/f, rp~)p being in the const, form. See also 1 Sam. 3: 13. Jer. 48: 36. Lam. 1 : 14. Ps. 81 : 6. (i) Be- fore I copulative ; as Is. 33 : 6, r>v Ti n^D~ , wisdom and knowledge. So also, Is. 35: 2. Is. 51 : 21. § 433. In a few cases, the const, form is .employed, where we should naturally expect the absolute; but most of these are cases oi such a nature, as shew that some noun, etc. in the Gen. after such const, form, is implied, although not expressed. E. g. 2 K. 9: 17, ' I see nypiB , a multitude, i. e. the multitude of Jehu, as the preceding part of the verse shews. Ps. 74 : 19, ' give not rrnb , to the beasts," 1 i. e. to the beasts of the forest (n '" '''•■ Gen. in regard to 3r , and in the const, as it respects t"_ ; while ~'-l ll in the Gen. with regard to "%'Nn , and in the const ;i- it respects V"^*$n. (c) In the Dat. ; as Job 3 : 20, ic: ""yob , to those who arc grievod m 20 154 §§ VVt, W). SYNTAX Of MilNS j APPOSITION. spirit, where the former word is in the const, state and Dative, (d) In the Ace. ; as 1 8am. 9 : 27, t that I may show thee D 1 -';^ " i ;--nx, the word of God, ,' where -iSi is in the const, state Accusative. (<•) In the Voc; as 2 K. 1 : 13, DVjbtfH tttyt , O man of Cod. (f) In the Aid. ; as Ps. 17 : 4, *pljBiB 1313 , by the word of thy lips, where the first noun is in the const, state Ablative. Apposition. § 435. In Hebrew, two nouns designating the same thing, are not only placed in apposition (as is usual in oth- er languages), but apposition is frequently employed, where the Gen. might be used and would naturally be expected. E. g. Prov. 22:21, n»K C""lEN ;, n-ords [which are] truth, i.e. words of truth; Zech.'l : 13, b^aha S" , " , .2' : : , words [which are] con- solations, i. e. words of consolation; Ex. 24: 5, E3*/9b3J az" , ~n" , of- ferings [which are] peace-offerings. Note. Of two nouns thus placed, one is frequently used as an adjective ; as in the examples above, we may render, true icords, consolatory words, etc. See $ 440 seq. § 435. a. Nouns are usually put in apposition, which designate weight, measures, time, etc. E. g. 2 K. 7 : 1, ft\b M«D , a seah [of] fine meal ; ,2 K. 5 : 23, 51C.3 tS^SS, two talents [of] silver; Gen. 41 : 1, D"^* ^"X'-'^ • tZi:0 years [of] time ; 1 K. 7 : 42, D^fa"! a^lD ^}.p , two rows [of] pome- granates ; Ezek. 22: 18, >\Z3 D^aO , dross [of] silver. Comp. § 463. These last instances may be explained, also, by supposing the latter noun to be in the Accusa- tive and used adverbially, as it is in the Arabic ; or (which amounts to the same thing) we may pay that the latter noun is in an oblique case, and governed by a preposition understood, e. g. talents [in] silver, etc. Comp. § 428. Note 1. Sometimes nouns are put in apposition, where the latter noun designates a whole or genus, of which the former designates only a part or species ; e. g. Judg. 5 : 13, Z? S^-P^N , the nobles [of, among] the people. Note 2. Some examples occur of apparent apposition, in which the latter noun is probably in the Gen., by reason of a word implied ; e. g. rriNSS ["'"Vn] Si 1 }}"!?, Jehovah [God of] hosts. So probably, Is. 30:20, yrjb [i»j a^a , water [water of ] trouble; ISN [WSt£] !TOn, the glow [the glow of] his anger. §§ 436, 437. syntax of nouns ; gender — number. 155 Gender and Number of Nouns. §436. Gender. The Hebrew, having do neuter gen- der, commonly employs the fem. to express it: but some- times the masculine, § 321. Note 1. E. g. Ps. 27:4, ' I have asked nrjK , one thing ;' Ps. 12 : 4, nV;'-;: . great things ; Gen. 42 : 30, nViJS , hard things, etc. Less often, the masculine ; as Prov. 8 : 6, D" 1 "! 1 ^? , noble things. Note. The fem. is sometimes used, also, in a collective sense, for objects which are properly masculine ; as Mic. 1:11, 12, n^ttJV , 1 in- habitress, i.e. inhabitants; Mic. 7:8, 10, n^'j* , enemies. So yv a tree, T"t±y a grove of trees, etc. So in Arabic, the pluralisfractus, which is used as a collective, very often has a fem. form. § 437. Number, (l) The Hebrews often employ nouns sing, in a collective sense, especially national denomi- nations; e. g. *^"2~n, the Cauaanitc, i. e. the inhabitants oi' Canaan, etc. (2) For the sake of emphasis, the Hebrews commonly employed most of the words which signify Lord. (>< Z-V, my Maker ;' Ecc. 12: I, VT^i thy Creator. See also Is. 22 : 11. 42 : 5. Ps. 149 : 2. Comp. § 404. ' (.3) The plural, especially in poetry, is not unfrequen> ly used where we might expect the singular. E. g. Job G : 3, ' the sand EF122 , of the seas,' i. e. of the sea. Even where only one can po88ibly be meant, is this the case : a> Judg. I -' 7, ' he was buried " 1 "P"2 , in the towns of Gilead," i. e. in a town ; Gen. 8 : 4, c the ark rested "*~}.~)~ 3, on the mountains of Ararat, i. e. on the mountain ; Job 21 : 32, rri*ttUt , the graves, i. e. the grave. |.">(» §§438 — 440. SYNTNX OF NOUNS ? PECULIAR -M. M I Peculiar tignificancy attached to certain modes of empfoi/iinj nouns. ^ 438. Repetition of nouns. The Hebrews frequently repeated nouns without the copula 1 between them, lot various purposes ; viz. {a) To denote multitude; e. g. Gen. 14 : 10, "nrn rvnN2 hVltt^, pits pits of bitumen, i. e. many pits, etc. (6) To denote distribution ; e. g\ Gen. 32 : 17, Tfyalfc -r.r -»•$» ,/ZorA: y?oc& 6y ifse//", i. e. each flock by itself, (c) To denote all, every; e.g. Deut. 14:22, rtW hfltj, y«/r year, i. e. every year. Sometimes also with a copula ; as Deut. 32: 7, hlli "H" , generation and generation, i. e. all generations, (a*) To denote intensity ; e. g. Ecc. 7 : 21, pto£ pfoj . deep deep, i. e. very deep. So earnestness in warning or threatening, in grief, joy, etc. is usually expressed by repetition. Note. In order to denote intensity, it is not always necessary that the same word should be repeated ; but a synonymous word, or a word of similar sound and signification, is often substituted with the same effect ; as Ps. 40: 3, "p.'rr t^u , clay of mire, i. e. the miry clay ; Job 30 : 3, PWt'tDXJl ttNitti, wasting and destruction, i. e. great wasting, etc. § 430. Repetition with the copula 1 , usually denotes diversity. E. g. Deut. 25 : 13, 13.&J1 *2N , stone and stone, i. e. different stones or weights ; Ps. 12 : 3, 3b] 3^3 , with a heart and a heart, i. e. with different hearts, with deceit. § 440. JYoitns employed ets Adjectives. Of two nouns in regimen, one is frequently employed as an adjective, in order to qualify the other. This principle is regulated thus : (a) The second or Gen. noun commonly qualifies the first; e. g. PCD , :3, vessels of silver, i.e. silver vessels ; ub" 1 " riThN , possession of eternity, i. e. everlasting possession ; Is. 24 : 10, WPlTi^np , city nf desolation, i. e. desolate city ; Gen. 34 : 30, ™l£073 yjto , men of number, i. e. which can be numbered, few men. Note. This construction is a very common one in all languages; and the Hebrew not unfrequently adopts it. when adjectives might be employed; as wNl" "j~3, priest of the head, i. e. high priest, instead (6) Sometimes the first noun qualifies the second ; e. g. rt/3ip "PT'nN: , the tallness of his cedars, i. e. his tall cedars ; hw2 ftt'itf 2 , the §§441 — 444. SYNTAX OP NODNS J PECULIAR SIGNIF. UR fatness ofhisjlesh, i. e. his fat flesh ; DT:UJ ?3?3 , possessor of hair, i. e. hairy ; tr^lS *?? j J"' s - sessors of a covenant, i. e. bound together by covenant, (d) 72 ton, ami n2 daughter ; as b^—ja, son of strength, i. e. a hero ; ni.TZ-p. son of death, i. e. condemned, worthy of death ; Mlt; "jS , son of a ymr. i. <\ a yearling. So *VtfJn rn33 , the daughters of song, i. e. singing women, Ecc. 12: 4. See Lex. Note. The first noun in constructions of this kind is somelinir- omitted, and can be supplied only from the sense of the passage ; a- Job 31 : 32, H-}N way, for rn& "}3 , son of tin- w?y, i. e. a tra\ill< 1 Prov. 17: 4, *tp*j falsehood, for a man qf falsehood, i. <\ a liar. So Gen. 15: 2, pi£72Q, for son of Damascus, i. e. a native of Dauia-> ;tU 1.3N §§ I I"> — 147. >vm.\\; u.ji.i i n i.> ADJECTIVKS. Cs 115. The Hebrew, like other languages, often su|>- plies the place of nouns by adjectives taken in an abstract or neuter sense. E. g. Jos. 24: 14, D^EP , integrity, lit. upright, innocent; Job 20: 22, ^53$, trouble, lit. troublesome, etc. Ps. 10: 10. So "n rvi'N , a woman of evil, i- e. an evil woman, where v~\ is constructed as a noun in the Gen. ; N? # 73 "'» , waters of fulness, i. e. full streams, instead of D^btt W]12 . Comp. in Greek, to y.ulov, to notfov, etc. Note. In this way some adjectives are constantly used as epithets of persons or things ; as "i^N strong, for l God ;' ""P3K strong, for ' bull, horse, hero ;' rrarr hot, for ' the sun ;' Tfcdb while, for i the moon' etc. So for God, we say in English, the Almighty, the Omnipo- tent, etc. in French, PEternel, etc. This is called the epitheton ornans. §446. Adjectives as predicates of a sentence, (a) When an adjective is the predicate of a sentence, and the verb of existence (JITi) is omitted, the adjective stands regular- ly before the noun, and is usually without the article. E. g. Gen. 4:13, *lh9 V'na , great [is] my iniquity. In a very few cases, the adjective stands after the noun; as in Gen. 19: 20. 1 Sam. 12: 17. (b) Such adjective generally agrees, in number and gender, with the noun to which it relates; but there are manv apparent exceptions. Note. These exceptions may be explained, on the principle that when adjectives are used as predicates, they are often to be taken in. an abstract sense, as nouns of the neuter gender. Thus Ps. 73 : 28, 5TD "*\ DTrbfl r>3"!R approach to God [is] to me delightful, lit. a plea- sant or delightful thing, the noun being in the fern, and the adj. in the masc, and used as a neuter noun, § 445. So Gen. 27: 29, n'HJJ Tj"n~)X, the cursers of thee [are] cursed, lit. an accursed thing; Is. 21 : 2, n"Tr flUTp , the vision [is] a cruel thing. So Virgil, Aen. iv. 569, varium et mutabile semper femina ; Statius, Theb. n. 399, blandum potestas ; Acbill. Tat., iiovtifjov f.uv yvftj. So to nuv, tu navru, the universe, rational or material. § 447. Article before an adjective used as a predicate. When this happens, the verb of existence rPH , or its equivalent the pronoun fc^n , is usually inserted. $§448 — 453. syntax; adjectives. 168 E. g. 1 Sam. 17 : 14, ]Bj5rt 8Mfi -,'-, David was the smallest, i. e. the youngest. In cases of this kind, the adjective is placed after the noun to which it relates. Note. In like manner, participles used for the Pres. tense of verbs, sometimes stand as predicates after the noun, and take the article ; e. g. Deut. 3:21, rri iort Sp3^5 , thine eyes see. § 448. Adjectives qualifying nouns. Adjectives used as epithets, or simply qualifying nouns, (so also participles and pronominal adjectives), generally agree with the noun in gender and number. § 449. Exceptions, (a) The pluralis excellentiae, commonly but not always, takes an adjective singular, § 437. 2. E. g. Is. 19 : 4, tP3 I lM JT^jP a hard master; on the contrary, Jos. 24 : 19, Ea^hs OVrtK , a holy God. {b) Nouns of multitude in the singular, commonly but not always, require a plural adjective ;* e. g. Jer. 50: 6, n'nis "jX^: , a wandering flock. § 450. Dual nouns take plural adjectives ; e. g. ^' , * ,, DID") , weak hands. § 451. Nouns of common gender, having more than one adjective, admit both the masc. and fern, forms in the ad- jectives. E. g. 1 K. 19: 1 1, pJHI fTlp"n ftVl , « great and strong -wind. § 452. Position of Adjectives. When they qualify noun«, thov are usually put after them. The number of apparent exceptions to this rule is so very small, and some of them so equivocal, that it appears dubious whether real exceptions are to be admitted. See howevpr Ps. 89 : 51, CD^JSy S" , 2"n~V3 , all the numerous people ; also Is. 53: 11: Jer. 3: 7, 10. 16: 1G. Note. The pronominal adjective tt| this, not unfrequently pre- cedes the noun with which it agrees. § 453. When an adjective serves to qualify two or mon- coons, it is usually put after them ; and the gender of it may be either masc, as the more worthy, or the same a-; the getider of the last noun. F.. g. Neh. 9: 13, CP3TU rilXS 5 ! Q\$h , good laws and statu/,- . Ezek. I: II, rnT^D dffE'Di Cn' 1 :!: , their faces and wings were separated. Here niTnS , a part, adjective, is fern. ; as is the noun also, which oexl precedes it. * Note. When the Mncord is directed by the u »"•, as in a. b, rather ihu l>y Ibe gri cat form of tlic noun, it \i called Oonstrttttio nil sensum. 100 §§454,465. syntax; adjectives — compari-'n Comparison of adjectives. § 4/34. (l) Comparative decree, (a) The comparative degree it) adjectives is made by using "\12 (prae,in tomparu son of) after the adjective, and before the noun with which the comparison is made. E.g. Judg. 14: 18, Un^'a p^nTj, sweeter than honey ; Ps. 19: 11. Note. In the same manner also ]£ is used, to make a comparison after nouns or verbs signifying condition or quality. E. g. Is. 52: 14, 4 his visage UTtfE n^u;73 was marred more than any man's ; Gen. 41: 40, ^'373 b^N , / will be greater than thou. (A) But ]E before the Inf. mood, implies a negative* In this case, it may be translated, so that not, or, than that, accord- ing as the sentence is constructed ; e. g. Gen. 4: 13, RliBSB ^9 H*W , my iniquity is great so that it cannot be pardoned, or, greater than that it can be pardoned. (c) Sometimes the adjective necessary to make out the comparison is omitted ; as Is. 10: 10, ' their gods Dr'^ITE , [were more powerful] than those of Jerusalem.'* Note. In the Rabbinic, comparison is made by 6 — 4"59. syntax; mmerals. I'll (e) Some nouns necessarily imply a superlative ; viz. (1) tBtll head, as Ps. 137: 6, "fihaig -Xi , the head of my joy, i. e. my h ii^t 1 « - 1 joy. (2) ^DZjirst born, ns Is. 1 1: 30, 2 , r - ! "■"TDS , first born of the wretch- ed, i.e. most wretched; Job 18: 13, rPE "lis:-; , the Jirst born of death, i.e. the most terrible death. § 456. Besides the above modes of expressing a super- lative, the Hebrew exhibits a variety of n:< thbds b\ which intensity of meaning is denoted. E. g. (a) By "tN'O very, or "UN - : 14*53 very very ; as Gen. 7: 19, ' the waters increased *Wa 1J*H very exceedingly, etc.' (b) By repeating the same word ; see § 438. (c) By two synonymous words, see § 438. f/, Note, {d) By repeating the same word and putting it in the Gen. when repeated ; as Hos. 10: 15, D3n?l flJPH , the evil of your evil i. e. your base wickedness. Sometimes a synonyme is used in the Gen. instead of the same word being repeated, § 438. d, Note, (e) The name of God placed after a noun is intensive ; as Jonah 3: 3, j a great city tZPrrrwYT;, before GodS i.e. really or truly very great; Gen. 10: 9, ' Nimrod was a mighty hunter fiirP ?£Bb , before Jehovah,' 1 i. e. exceedingly expert in hunting. So Acts 7: 20, ' Moses was uarfloj u<> 0to>,fair to God," 1 i. e. very fair; Luke 1: 6, 'righteous tvomtOV tov 0iov, before God," 1 i. e. really or eminently pious. NUMERALS. § 457. The cardinal numbers 2 — 10, are commonly joined with plural nouns, and follow the same gender. They may 1)0 put, (n) In the const, state with nouns to which they relate ; e.g. r:"":* P - : '- three days, lit. a threeness of days. (6) In apposition, or perhaps ad- verbially, with the nouns to which they relate, and cither before or af- ter them ; e. g. C , :3 niyViU three sons; ujlVii fiiSJja three daughters. The position of the cardinal after the noun, is less common, and be- longs rather to the later Hebrew. §458. The cardinal numbers 11 — 19, are put in apposition, or rath- er adverbially, with nouns plural (sometimes singular), and common- ly stand before the noun, but sometimes after it. The gender is us- ually the same as that of the. noun. E. g. Num. 1: 1 1, r\\; "\i05 S^V), twelve men; 2 Sam. 9: 10, tb^S IfcJS rVigan fifteen sons, etc. § 459. The tens (20—90), are of common gender j arc put in ap- position with nouns either sing, or plural ; and may -land either be- fore or after the noun. E. g. Judg. 11: 33, T* CS^tDJg twenty nisei Gen. 32: 15, Ca^toJgl D v r\Nt, twenty rams. 21 109 §§400 — 466. syntax; NUMXRAL8, § 460. Numbers composed of tens and units, (e. g. 26, 34, 48, etc.), when standing before a noun, require it to be in the singular : but when the noun precedes, it is in the plural. In both r,a-<-. th<- gender of the smaller numeral is the same as that of the noun. E.g. Deut. 2: 14, r>2'U ttjfa;^ tZ^rr - ^ , thitty and eight years ; Jos. 19:30, "Zl'^v tZPr'wT O'HtoP , cities twenty and two, etc. § 401. The numerals nN s a hundred, and t)r.N a thousand, may be put in either the abs. or const, state with nouns either sing or plural, and may stand either before or after the noun. E.g. Gen. 17: 17, !-?3'£-:-;NE , a hundred years ; 25: 7: 17, ni'iJ DN73 , a hundred of years; 2 Chr. 3: 1G, n«J3 Q'aijsn , 100 pomegranates ; Is. 7: 23, ]^3 q';.N , a thousand of vines ; Ezra 8: 27, fj^JJ ^"^"ijN , 1000 Dorics. § 462. Numbers composed of thousands and smaller numbers, fol- low the same rule as composite numerals in § 460. § 463. In many cases, the numerals are used alone to designate weights and measures in common use, the noun being omitted ; § 543. E.g. Gen. 20: 16, S)C3 P]Vn , a thousand [shekels] of silver; Ruth 3: 15, d' , -]i' ,; 4) EC, six Lmeasures] of barley ; 1 Sam. 10: 4, En': _, r;': , two [loaves] of bread. The word n^N cubit, commonly takes the preposition a after the numeral; as Ex. 27: 18, J"P2N2 "NE , one hun- dred in cubits, i.e. 100 cubits. § 464. The cardinal numbers beyond ten, are also used as ordinals ; and are either put before the noun and in ap- position with it, or are put in the Gen. after the noun. E. g. Gen. 7: 11, tpV' *y& rtWTBS , on the seventeenth day ; 1 K. 16: 10, JfS'ih D" 1 -)"^?. nr^a , in the year of 27, i. e. the 27th year. For the ordinal numbers below 10, see §396. § 465. The cardinal numbers below ten, are also used as ordinals, in designating years, and days of the month. E. g. 2 K. 18: 10, CC riZV? , the sixth year, lit. the year of six j Gen. 8: 5, tti^hS? T^Na on the first Lday] of the month; Lev. 23: 32, i-jy&na *i"tnb , on the ninth of the month, etc. as in English. § 466. The cardinal numbers are used distributivehj, when repeated without a copula. E. g. Gen. 7: 8, tP3iO ta^iTD, two and two, or, two by two ; Gen. 7: 3, Way !"!i"2w , seven aiid seven, or, by sevens. §§407 — 47(1. syntax; pronouns. 1 1 •: £ PRONOUNS. § 467. Use of the Primitive Pronouns. They arc more usually omitted, before verbs; but when employed, they seem to give more energy to the < xpression; and commonly they are found only in the Nominative, § 468. When a pronoun of any form is to be repeated, for the sake of emphasis, it is done by using the primitive form ; and this may be in any case required by the na- ture of the sentence. E. g. (a) In the Nom. ; as Ps. 9: 7, fTEiri D"n5T "3N , the memory of them of them has perished, i.e. the very memory of them, etc. (b) In the Gen. ; as 1 K. 21: 19, ' the dogs shall lick nr.tt S£ ^:--ns , the blood of thee even of thee. ? (c) In the Dat. ; as Hag. 1: I, tSFjM — ~r tVgT} . it it a time for you yourselves ? (, naked [am] f. Note. Personal pronouns of the third person, sometimes Btand riav ply in the place of the verb of existence; e.g. Gen. 9: 3, 'every thing which moves *r\ enfl IttiK, which is alive ; 1 Ps. 16: 3, ' the saints -rx Man V"nN2 , who are in the land ;' Zech. I: 9, -?X -:- rTC , what arc these? Plainer still is this principle in such cases as follow ; flz. Zeph. 2: 12, 'ye Cushites, victims of mj BWOfd rtBtjj C31$| , are ye? 2 Sam. 7: 28, trrrrbN.rj JMn-'nnK ,thou art Had ,' Ezra 6: 11,' the Benraots ol God nan SMriaN, are we? (Chaldaic), answering to Heb. tTBJTj '3n2« In Syriac and Arabic, this use of the personal pronoun is very common. §470. Suffix Pronouns. In general, tlio pronouns bu£ Kit I7J — I* I. syntax; BUIWtt-MONOUNS. Ii\ I to verbs arc in the Ace. case : those suffixed to nouns, are in (Ik: Gen. case. § 171. Exceptions as to verbal suffixes. Those are sometime, {a) In the I );it i vo ; as Jos. 15: 10, "'Tn: , thou hast given to the; /.<•< h. 7: ~>, *:N TSFlDSJFl , have ye fasted for me for me, i. e. on my account. Job 10: 14, ' ifl sin Vr"^^ , then thou wafchest it for me, i. e. on my ac- count; Frov. 13: 20, "10=173 INITIO , he seeks for him correction ; Ps. 94: 20, ^afi' 1 , is it bound to thee ? (6) To denote relation- which are usually expressed by particles; as \s. 65: 5, "Trinp , / am more holy than thou ; 1 K. 21: 10, ?ir!~>" , 'i , and caused them to t estify AGAIHST him ; Ps. 42: 5, STiN, / moved along with them, etc. This usage is more frequent in Arabic. § 472. Exceptions as to the suffixes of nouns. These are sometimes, (a) In the Dative ; as Ps. 1 1 5: 7, Dr,*~7 — Wf\ : : ~\ , they have hands — they have feet, for Qnb ^■H 1 , hands are to them, etc. (6) Instead of the preposition ?v ; as Ex. 15: 7, "^"j , those ischo rise up against thee, in- stead of -<-:; a"?»;5 . So Ps. 53: 6, ^3n. Note. The suffixes of nouns may have either an active or a pas- sive sense; e. g. (a) Active ; as " l 053ri, my violence, i.e. that which I do ; ^BO , my book, i.e. that which 1 possess. This sense of the suf- fixes is the common one. {b) Passive ; as Jer. 51: 35, "'St" . my vio- lence, i. e. that done upon me ; Ex. 20: 20, ^nN"}* , his fear, i. e. which he inspires; Is. 56: 7, ^nVcn, my prayer, i.e. offered to me; Ps. 56: 13, ^"H: ) thy vows, i. e made to thee ; Is. 21: 2, nnrr:x , her sighing, i. e. the sighing over her. Comp. § 424. Note. For the pleonasm and ellipsis of personal pronouns, sec § 543 seq. § 544 seq. § 473. Position of pronouns suffixed to nouns, (a) W lien a noun in the Gen. is used merely to qualify a preceding noun, the suffix pronoun, (which as to the sense belongs to the first noun), is usually placed after the second. E.g. Dan. 9: 24, *J*n|? *P9 , thy holy city, lit. the city of thy holi- ness ; Is. 2: 20, T50O " , V." 1 "^. •> *" silver idols, lit. the idols of his silver; Zeph. 3: 11, ^183 T?i', thy proud cxulters, lit. the exultcrs of thy pride, etc. (6) In a very few cases, the suffix is attached to the frst noun ; as Ps. 71: 7, "'?— '0^73 , my strong refuge, lit. my refuge of strength. Ezek. 16: 27. Lev. 6: 3. But this construction is not altogether certain. § 471. Position of pronouns in a sentence. Usually they stand etftcr the noun to which they relate. §§475, 470. syntax; substitutes for pfcoNOl kb. Mi But sometimes this noun is not mentioned until after the pronoun, either immediately, or perhaps at the distance of several sentences; and sometimes it is to be supplied only from the general sense of the passage, e.g. Ps. 87: I. ©nj? "'Tin3 irVlID*, Us foundation [is] tn the holy mountain, i.e. Ziou's, as appears from v. 2; Is. 8: 21, P13 "13J . he passes through it, i.e. the land, see v. 22; Ps. 9: 13. k when he taketh vengeance for blood "OT srrx, he remembereth them,' i e. the afflict- ed, as in the second part of the parallelism ; Ps. G5: 10. 68: 15. 18: 15. comp. v. 18. Job 37: 4. Note. Sometimes, although (he pronoun is immediately preceded by a noun, it does not refer to that noun, but to one which SBQSt he supplied from the sense ; as Ps. 44: 3, t by thy hand thou didst drive out the nations, QJJBFn and didst plant THEM,' i.e. the Israelites, as appears from v. 2. So Ps. 81: 1G, comp. v. 14. Ps. 105: 37. Gen. 10: 12, where N1~ probably refers to Nineveh in v. 11. §475. Place of pronouns supplied by nouns, (l) In addressing a superior, the Hebrews commonly employed words descriptive of the relation which the speaker, or the person addressed, sustained, in- stead of using pronouns; e.g. Gen. 44: 16, 'what shall we say to my lord?" 1 i.e. to thee; ' lo, we are servants to my lord,'' i.e. to thee. Verse 19, ' my lord asked his servants,'' etc. i. c. thou didst enquire of us. (2) The place of the personal pronouns especially in a reflexive sense, is often supplied, by the nmsl distinguish- ed and essential parts of either the external or internal num. E. g. (a) By tfi^J soul, most frequently ; as Job 0: 2t, ''SJDJ f"N N : 'r, / know not myself ; Ps. 7: 3, L lest like a lion ^03 ^|~ , w - ; . he rend mr .■ , Ps. 3 : 3, "•a;S5>. , to me ; Ps. 11:1. 1G: 10. 35:3: Amos 1:8, * Jehovah hath sworn veers, by himself {b) By O^B person . as ProV. 7: 15, "rfZB -\TW"b , to seek th.ee; Ezck. C: 9, OrPJM "<-'-'- 1 they abhor them- selves, etc. (c) By 33 heart; as Ex. 9 : 1 1, "]zb , thyself; V<. 1G : 9, ^r , / myself etc. {d) Occasionally by several other words ; Bfl Pi. 7: 6. 16: 9, EP*»rj life, and 1133 heart or soul ; Is. 26: 9, "p-* spirit ; Ps. 6. 8, ]*% eye • Ps. 16: 9, "liUS flesh ; Ps. 17: 11, yc-_ belly : I '- DlC.y bone, etc. The same usage prevails very extensh elj ha Ara- maean and Arabic. § 476. Anomalies of Pronouns. Depastures from concord, in re- spect to gender, number, etc. are called anomalies here. These are somewhat frequent, and may be ranked under Beveral head-, comp. §§484—496. E. g. (a) In regard to number ; for a pronoun sing, not unlVeipient- ly relates to a noun plural, i.e. it is osed in a collective tense, l^ 1 ' :I IflG ^§477 — !"'.•. SYNTAX OF PROftOUlfM J LNOMAUE0, ETC. noun of multitude ; as Deut. 21: 10, ' when thou goest against ~"-"N thine enemies, and God i:n: gives him (sing.) into thine band,' etc Josh. 2:4, 'and the women took the two spies, 13BXni and hid him So Deut. 28: 48. Ps. 5: 10. Mai. 2: 2. Jer. 31: 15.' Ecc. 10: 15. Is. 5 23, et saepe. Note. Pronouns singular are very often employed in a generic or collective sense, in the same way as nouns of multitude ; and they ex- hibit the like appearances in regard to concord with verbs, adjectives, etc. {b) In regard to gender, (l) The masc. is used for the fern. ; as arN for -jriwX , Ezek. 13: 20. nan for -:n , Ruth 1: 22. Cant. 6: 8. Zach. 5: 10. So the suff. E33 for }=> , Ruth 1: 8, 1 1, 13. Cnfor}-, Ruth 1: 19. Ex. 1: 21. Is. 3: 16. Dan. 8: 9, 2. Ezek. 1: 6, 7, 8 saepe. 0_ for ]_ , Judg. 19 : 24. D_ for }_ , 2 K. 18 : 16. 2 Chron. 29 : 3. (2) The fern, for the masc. ; as ftMl instead of n"2~ , 2 Sam. 4: 6. Jer. 50: 5. DK for nniN , Deut. 5: 24. Ezek. 28: 14. In Arabic and Rab- binic such anomalies are very frequent. (c) In respect both to number and gender ; e. g. Job 14: 19, WrTMDD , where the antecedent of n_ is c^Q plur. masc. Is. 35: 7, n£!2-} [in] the layer of her, i. e. of the D^Fi, plur. masc. § 477. Relative Pronouns. The relative 1QX (also m" and ^T when used as relatives § 169) is used in respect to antecedents of all persons, numbers, and genders, § 168. § 478. The relative TsIJN is often used with other words, merely to give them a relative sense; e.g. (a) With nouns and pronouns ; as Gen. 13: 16, ""ir^-ntt ndN , which dust ; Vr nuia: , to whom ; ink T#Nf , -whom ; Deut. 28: 49, Svtik "T^tf , whose language; Ps. 1: 4, rVT\ 'liS'THi n'£tf , which the wind scatters, etc. (6) With adverbs ; as C.IJ "YBBt , where ; S^ ittJN , whence, etc. Note. The word n'^N is commonly, but not always, separated from the word which it qualifies, by another intervening word. The word qualified, moreover, is often omitted; as Ezek. 21: 35, 'in the place [i2] riNHlD "Y£N , where thou wast created ; Ex. 32: 34, *VBR~bM . [Oipa], to what [place]; Is. 43: 4, [ns] 'I^JNJQ, from what [time]. etc. For the ellipsis of this pronoun, see § 545. VERBS. § 479. Usual principles of concord. In general a verb agrees with its Norn, case in number, gender, and person. §§480 485. SYNTAX OF VERBS ; ANOMALIES. Hu § 480. Nouns of multitude in the singular often take a verb in the plural. E.g. Gen. 33: 13, ]Ni:n-rD IMgi, then all the Jiock -will die. Comp. § 449. b. Sometimes verbs in the singular only are employed after nouns of multitude ; in other cases, a sentence begins with a verb sing., and proceeds with plur. verbs ; as Ex. 1 : 20. 33: 4. Is. 2: 20. Ps. 14 : 1, etc. See further, on nouns of multitude 5 500. § 481. Several connected Nominatives, either all masc. or of different genders, usually take a verb in the plur. masculine. E. g. Ex. 17: 10, ' and Moses and Aaron and Hur 1?y ascended;'' Ps. 85 : 1 1, IttJaW r)73{0~1Di! ;, mercy and truth are met together ; Gen. 8 : 22, etc. Note. Exceptions. Cases occur rarely where a verb sing, is used, after a composite Nom. ; e. g. Ex. 21 : 4, rrnn !"P*lbM "'f^n, the ■woman and her children shall be, (verb sing.) § 482. When the subject and predicate of a sentence are connected by the verb of existence (»Tn), this \ often agrees with the latter. E. g. Gen. 27 : 39, SjUjttftJB iiyt] Y"1Nn "fciattJH , rich countries shall be thine abode ; Gen. 31 : 8. Lev. 25 : 33. Ezek. 35 : 15, etc. § 483. Dual nouns take verbs like nouns plural. Anomalies in the concord of verbs. § 484. I. As to number. The pluralis excellentiat com- monly, but not always, takes a verb in the singular, § 437. b. E. g. Gen. 1:1, DTpN fins , God created ; Ex. 21 : 29, r\m* V*r:;2 . his owner shall be put to death. But, in a few cases, the pluralis ercel- lentiae takes a verb in the plural; e. g. Gen. 20: 13. 31:53. 35: 7. Ex. 32 : 4, 8. 2 Sam. 7 : 23. § 485. Plural Nominatives of the fern, gender, (which relate to beasts or things, and not to persons), frequently take a verb singular, whether it precede or follow them." E. g. Ezek. 26 : 2, rrinbn rr-jS'iJa , broken is [are] the gatfs , Joel 1: 20, :hyn niaro the beasts cry [cries] ; Gen. 49 : 28. Jer. 1:14. 48 : 41. 51 ; 29, 56. Ps. 1 19 : 98. 87 : 3. Job 27 : 20, etc. * Note. This construction of tlio feminiii" [ >1 n r;i I wit li a rarfa lingular, ii t.i-linioilly called tho pluralis inhumanis. Compare, in Greek, tlio neulor plural* Joined with vrrbs lingular. 1G8 §§480 — 490. syntax of veriis ; anovmii- in CONCORD 8 486* Vice rcrsa, the plur. fem. of refefa h some- times used, where the usual concord would demand the singular. E. g. Ex. 1 : 10, WfllrfljJB fWK^pn"^ , when there shall happen war ; Judg. 5: 26. Job 17: 16. Is. 28: 3L Obad. 13. § 487. When a Norn, plural is used in a distributive sense, viz. 1o denote each or every one of the subjects in question, it often takes a verb m the singular. E. g. Ex. 31 : 14, ntt'P n^brjJa , they who profane it, i. e. evpry one who profanes it [the Sabbath], shall be put to death ; Prov. 27: 16. 3:18. 28 : 1. Gen. 47 : 3. Ex. 31 : 14. § 489. When the verb precedes a phir. Nominative, it is not unfrcqucntly put in the singular; and sometimes when it follows one. E. g. 1 Sam. 1 : 2, C^V"! •"^"r^ V7?2 i an d there was to Ptninnah children, i. e. Peninnah had children ; Is. 13: 22, C-'N ~'.'J , the jackals shall howl; Deut. 5: 7. Judg. 13: 12. 2 Sam. 21: 6. Ps. 124: 5. In all such cases, the verb is used in a kind of impersonal way, like the French il vient des homines, there comes some men. So occasionally, ev- en when the verb follows a plur. Nom. ; as Ecc. 2: 7, v r rvn n"a V2 , there were slaves to me, i. e. I had slaves ; Gen. 46: 22, ' these were the sons of Rachel 1.^ ""lltfN which were [lit. was] born to Jacob ;' Gen. 35: 26. Dan. 9: 24. Is. 64: 10. Note. Sentences not unfrequently begin with a verb singular, and then proceed with a verb plural; as Gen. I: 14, nWtfO., "TV, Wei there be lights, .. . spffl and let them be for signs, etc-' Num.9: 6. Ezek. 14: 1. Esth. 9: 23. § 490. II. As to gender. Fcm. Nominatives, either sing. or plural, sometimes take a verb masc. whether it pre- cedes or follows them. E. g. 1 Sam. 25: 27, ^ntlBUJ JTaiTT , thine handmaid brought ; 1 Chr. 2: 48, 1^ ttJi^i the concubine bore ; Judg. 21 : 21, ni:n INST DN , if the daughters go out; Ruth 1:8,' even as ye [Ruth and Orpah] Orpi^' have done to the dead ;' Is. 57 : 8, 5p~rVDni and thou hast made a covenant for thyself, where the subject of the verb is fem. So Lev. 2:8. 1 1 : 32. 1 K. 22 : 36. Ecc. 7:7. 12:5. Jer. 3 : 5. Cant. 3 : 5. 5: 8. 8:4. 2 K. 3 : 26. Gen. 15: 17. Note. In a very few cases, a masc. Nominative sing, is followed by a verb fem. ; e. g. Ecc. 7 : 27, nVnp nnaN saith the Preacher, §§ 491 494. SYNTAX OP VERBS ; ANOMALIES. 1GI> where the verb follows the grammatical form of the Nom., rather than the sense of it; Judg. 1 I : 39, ^-^rT~i , and it became a custom, where the verb is employed in an impersonal mariner. § 401. Nouns of common gender take either a masc. or fern, verb; and sometimes both, in the same coii-tnic- tion. E. g. Is. 33 : 9, ynN rtbbWS bZH , the land mourns and is withered ; 14: 9. Job 20: 26. Lev. s\'i. 5: l.etc. Nolo. There ire more noun? of the common gender in Hebrew, than has been generally itip- posed, (Ges. Lehrgeb. p. 472) ; which accounts for many supposed anomalies of gender. § 402. Nouns of multitude, (among which the names of nations may be ranked), frequently take a verb femi- nine: and in some cases they admit no other. Comp. §480. E. g. Ex. 5: 16, ^12V riNan, thy people have sinned. So the name of a nation, as Ps. 114: 2. This construction resembles that of the pluralis fractus in Arabic, which often takes a verb feminine, whatev- er the sense of the noun may be. Note. The names of nations, countries, and towns are of the maac. gender, when they are used to denote the inhabitants ; but they are f»m., when they only denominate place. Comp. $ IfcJO. § 493. When several Nominatives of different genders are connected, the verb sometimes agrees with a masc. noun as the most worthy ; and sometimes it conforms to the noun which stands nearest to it ; e. g. (a) With a masc. noun ; as Prov. 27: 9, 3:r rt$TD^ rr^DJtt V$ , ointment and perfume make [makes] glad the heart ; Hos. 9 : 2, etc. (6) With the nearest noun; as Num. 12: 1, J'Hty!] D^1*3 "Hinj, then spake Miriam and Aaron ; Num. 20 : 11, D"YWM ~"}"~ RtfW , and the assembly and their cattle drank; Gen. 7'- 7. 1 K. 17: 15. Esth. 9 : 29. 2 Sam. 3: 22. Comp. § 481. For the 'jrnrral rule respecting composite Nominatives, seo $ 481. Note. Where there are several Nominatives connected, and the. sentence begins with a verb singular, it commonly proceeds with a verb plural; as Gen. 21 : 32. 24 : 61. 31 : 14. 33: 7. Comp. S S 489. Note. § 480. § 494. III. As to both number and gender. Feminine nouns of multitude in the singular, often take a verb in the plur. masculine. E. g. 1 Sam. 2: 33, l all iVanS the increase of thy house HMEP . shall die ;' Jer. 44 i 12, rVnNO ' the remainder of Judah who t&$ set 22'" 170 ,r / 195 — 198. sv.VT.w OF WEBBS.; \\o\r. — IMPEE80NAL. lluir faces ;' Zeph. 2: 9. Geii. 48 : 6. This is constructio ad sensum, § 149. 6. Note*. ^ 495. (a) Plural Nominatives of the f, rrrr z~~ was not yet, or before it was. But sometimes the MOM ifl futun ali'i these particles; as Ex. 12: 48. Job 10: 21. (2) Sometimes (not ?Cf] 174 §504. BTNTAI OP \ K it lis ; ri ii hi: TBIfBS. frequently) it Indicates the past time of narration, it the historic tense \ as Gen.' 2: 6, 'and a mi^t ~:"' went "/>. etc' 2: 10, ' ami tbence "7^", it was divided, etc.' 2: 25, n&UJisrr tkbl , and they were, not ashamed. Is not this occasioned by the Vav which precedes? Comp. § 50.i. e. 2. Note 1. {d) With Vav conversive, the Fnt. forms a common historic tense. (e) Without such Vav, it is sometimes employed to denote habitual or continued action ; as 1 K. 5: 25, ' thus much Solomon ]Pl\ gave to Hiram yearly ;' Job 1: 5, ' thus nvV^ did Job continually ; 2 Sam. 12: 31. 2Chr. 25: 14. (J") For the Imp.; viz. (l) Always where the first or third person of the Imp. is needed ; as Gen. 1: 2G, C^N ~rot'Z , let us make man ; 1: 3, ~nN~\-!'] , let there be light, etc. Where excitement, urging, entrea- ty, etc. is to be expressed, the parag. Fut. is usually employed ; as STlb^AM , let me rejoice now ; IlftTpN , let me arise now. (2) In prohibi- tions ; because the Hebrew Imp. is not used with negatives ; e. g. Ex. 20: 15, i33n Nr, steal not, lit. thou shalt not steal. {g) For the Optative ; especially when the particle N: is subjoin- ed; e. g. Ps. 7: 10, WITM*) O that it might come to an end! Cant. 7: 9, N:-^rt": ° may they be! 1 K. 17: 21. Is. 19: 12. 47: 13. For the Optative use of the parag. and apoc. Fut., see § 203. seq. {h) For the Subjunctive ; especially after particles signifying that, so that, in order that, etc. E.g. after -)tt?N that, "14393 that, 1 that, "3 that, b that, T«2?N ]?»b in order that, ?ii that not, i>3 that not, "j? that not. But the Fut. often follows particles such as the above, when a Subj. sense is not required, but a Fut. one. (f) The Fut. designates all those shades of meaning, which we ex- press in English by the auxiliaries, may, can, must, might, could, should, ■would, etc. E. g. Gen. 3: 2, b-K: , we may eat ; 30: 31, iV—^MTTO , ■what 7mist [shall] / give thee ? Judg. 14: 16, T'ijiJ fbl , and should I tell thee? Prov. 20: 9, -|»&r-^3 , who can [will] say ? So Job 10: 18, 9^iSt , / should have died ; Gen. 31: 37, "~V^ kNf .2 s ^ l(lt ' m ig nt ia ^ e m y leave of thee ; 28: 8, ' until that all IBOK* shall have been gathered; eomp. § 503. g. 4. (j) The Fut. with Vav conversive, (which commonly indicates past time), is sometimes used as a proper Future ; the Vav being ren- dered merely as a conjunction ; e. g. Is. 9:5,' to us a son shall be given, and the government Vjrfl shall be upon his shoulder, etc.' Is. 9: 10, 13, 15, 17. 51: 12, 13. (k) The Fut. with Vav is sometimes also used, (l) For the Pres- ent Iodic; as 2 Sam. 19: 2, ' behold the king weeps, 72Nn«2 and mourns; Ps. 102: 5, 123*1 , and is dried up. (2) For the present Subj. ; §§ 505 507. SYNTAX OF VERHS ; IMI'KK. MOOD ETC. ]',.', us Jos. 9: 21, ' let them live, IVl*] and let them be, or may they 6e, etc.' Job 14: 10. But such uses of the Fut. with Vav conversive, are not frequent. Note. In respect to the forms etc. of the Fut., compare § 203. seq. Imperative mood. § 505. The Imp. mood and the Fut. tense are nearly related to each other ; and often they are used almost in- discriminately. Comp. § 504. f. §201. The Imp., besides its proper sense, is employed for the Future. (o) When two Imperatives immediately succeed each other; in which case the latter often has a Fut. sense, and the former a conri- tional one ; e. g. Gen. 42: 18, nTii liD* , do this and live, i. e. do th.s, and ye shall live ; Pro?. 3: 3, 4, 7. 4: 4.' 7: 2. 9:6. Is. 8:9. 36: 16. 45: 22. 55: 2. (6) When an Imp. is connected with a Fut. in the same construc- tion, it often has a Fut. meaning; e. g. (a) Sometimes when it stands before the Fut. ; as Is. 45: 11, "^rNlli will ye enquire of me — anc/ ^iCR will ye prescribe to me? 6: 9. (2) When it stands after the Fut. ; as Gen. 45: 18, ~:PN") and I will give you .... 1^34*1 and ye shall eat, lit. eat ye. Gen. 20:' 7." Is. 54: 14. Ruth 1: 9. f '.* with dust Lout of dust] from the earth, where ?VBS is the Ace. of the material, as grammarians speak. § 512. But the insertion of appropriate prepositions, such as 2 , r , *}E , V? , etc. before the latter noun in cases like the above, is not un- frequent; so that the Hebrews practised both methods of constructing a sentence. Many of the cases above may bo construed as having a preposition implied, before the second noun in the Accusative. Passive verbs. § 513. The passive forms of verbs which govern two Accusatives, retain but one of them; the other being u>u- ally made a Nominative. E. g. Ps. 80: 11, fTri Q^l-l 1B3, the mountains were centered with the shadow of it. Ex. 25: 40. *28: 1*1. Note. Sometimes verbs of a passive form have an active sense ; and in this case they may govern an Ace, like active verba ; e.g. Job 7: 3, iHVii "'fr'V "Vkllin , / have inherited months of vanity, where the verb is'in Hophal;Ex.20: 5. Deut. 13= 3. Infinitive absaluti . § 514. This is usually put before a finite tense of the same verb, and serves to qualify its meaning in various ways ; viz. (a) It marks intensity of various degrees; as 1 Sam. 2$ 22, dSv Mirr D"]y?, very subtilely will he deal ; 20: 6, !>£«fa bWa , he fias ur- gently requested; Amos 9: 8, T*3M>K T"?;pH N- > ' •»H not utterly de- stroy. Gen. 31: 30. 43: 3, 7, 3H: snVH , could wc indeed know ? 37: 8, 23 ITS §§ 514 — 517. syntax of VKRns ; wf. ausoi.itk. ftajPI iVlj!?'", shall thou indeed reign? 19:9, UiD^ C2 b»^»], and now he would join act even as a judge. (6) It denotes assurance, certainty ; as Gen. 2: 17, n"":r r":, thou shall surely (He ; 3: 4. 37: 33, 5]"}U Ep£3 , /<<• ?'s surely torn in pieces ; Judg 15: 2, tpTl&tt ~i73N , surely I thought, or said. (c) It marks continuance of action; as Is. 30: 19, !T~3n Nr ; :z thou shall not always weep ; Ex. 34: 7. Jer. 23: 17. Especially i« con- tinuance denoted, where two Infinitives abs. are used; as 2 Sam- 15: 30, nb^T fib? they went up continually weeping ; Gen. 8: 7, ttS£1 3iu;i NTH"' , and it continued going and returning ; Jer. 7:13. 11:7. 25: 3. 26: 5. In such cases, a participle is sometimes used for the second Inf., as in 2 Sam. 16: 5 ; or a noun, as Is. 29: 1 1. (r/) In general, it gives intensity, energy, animation, vivacity, or some coloring of this nature, to the expression; although it is difficult always to express it in an English version. So tho intensive particles of the Groek, German, etc. cannot be well expressed in a translation. Note 1. The Inf. abs. is commonly of the same conjugation as the finite verb with which it is joined, but sometimes of a different one ; as Job 6: 1, $$81 ^p® -, with Inf. abs. in Kal, finite verb in Niphal ; Ezek. 16: 4, rfcnri fi& Jflrfn , Inf. in Hophal, and finite verb in Pual. Note 2. The Inf. abs. is sometimes taken from a kindred synony- mous verb ; as Is. 28: 28, qsaSlT ffii*W , he will thoroughly thresh him, roots ■Jj'lfij and "STT, both signifying to thresh. Note 3. The Inf. abs. may be placed before or after the finite verb. Particles, such as sTr, D3 , etc. sometimes intervene. §515. The Inf. abs. is sometimes used adverbially. E.g. i^pTj! benefaciendo, for bene ; 1 Sam. 3: 12, n?D1 ~rrn , in- cipiendo et Jiniendo, i. e. utterly. § 516. In a few cases, the Inf. const, is used as the Inf. absolute. (a) Adverbially; as Is. 60: 14, hlrTJJ incurvando, for fri iT.L ; ; Hab. 2: 10, ni5Sj3 for risp . (b) With a finite verb; as Num. 23: 25, ip , ^2^n Nb thou shall not curse at all, for aiajj ; Ruth 2: 16, S>»Rr^B , for i'ikti ; Ps. 50: 21, n*"i<-ni\T, for rrn , etc. § 517. The Inf. abs. is sometimes found in the place of a finite verb. E. g. Deut. 5: 12, ^ifcRS simply, instead of 'pnaian TlEHJ , as it is in Deut. 6: 17; Ex. 20: 8, "nDTfor -OTFi -lb J , as in Deut. 7: 18; Job 40: 2, n-ir; an conlendendo ? for 5*1 31" , as in Judg. 1 1: 25. So Dan. 9: 5, -no") =i:-"V: , we have rebelled and apostatized ; Est. 9: 6. Jer. 11: >§§ 517 — 520. syntax of verbs; inf. construct. 170 5. Gen. 41: 43. Judg. 7: 19. Ecc. 8: 9. 9: 11. Ezek. 1: 14, ' the living creatures Sritfl N"'^n ran and returned ;' Ecc. 4: 2. Jer. 32: 44, ' fields shall they buy, SirDI and they shall write bills of sale, "Bjm — Dinm and they shall seul them — and take witnesses," 1 etc. Num. 15: 35. Deut. 14: 21. Is. 5: 5. Ezek. 11: 7, k you N\iin will J bring out,' etc. 1 K. 22: 30. 2 Chr. 18: 29. Eor the Irnper. ; Deut. 5: 12, liad keep ; 1: 16. Jer. 2: 2, fiVrr go ; 13: 1, etc. Num. 25: 17. See the first examples above. Note. The Inf. abs. is, in some cases, to be translated in a passive sense ; as Prov. 12: 7, ' the wicked *p cr 7 ) are *° oe destroyed.' 1 This is elliptical; the full phrase would be 338^ *pBri . So "^on, Prov. 15: 22. § 518. The Inf. abs. is also employed as a mere namm actionis, denoting the practice of doing what the verb de- signates. E.g. 12IH3 dill nill -^l?? riVM, cursing, and dissembling, and murdering, and stealing, break out, Hos. 4: 2. Oen. Remark. The Inf. abs. baa generally mi intetuku sense, whether employed with o finite vsrh, ur standing alone. It may bi; colled the cnergic form of verbs. Infinitive construct. §519. The Inf. const, being a sort of verbal noun, is used like one, in respect to construction, position, govern- ment, and even form; the plural forms excepted, which it has not. § 520. Like nouns, the Inf. const, is used in the various cases ; viz. («) In the Norn, case ; e. g. Gen. 2: 18, C>N-J ni-'n ;, ' the being of (he man alone is not good ;' 29: 19, ■'Pin (Inf. of ]n:) l my giving N good ; ? 11: (5. 30: 15. (6) In the Gen. ; e. g. Gen. 29: 7, f|D6t?1 n". ,

-:{. SYNTAX O] \KKItS J INC. CONBTBUCT. § 52i. Like nouns, it takes prepositions before it, and suffixes after it. In translating such Infinitives we must generally give them a finite sense ; e. g. (a) With a ; as Gen. 2: 4, 0tpa~3 , when 'they were cre- ated, lit. in the being created of them; Ex. 16- 7, SynaJa because he heard ; Is. 1: 15. (6) With 3 ; as Gen. 44: 30, \S ; a3 , when I come ; 39: 18, "•fii-jr©, when I lifted up. (c) With b ; Gen. 2: 3, PPtoyV , when he made it ; Is. 7: 15, ipyYr, until he know ; 1 K. 16: 7, ' to provoke him by his doings, rPVtb in that he was, or, in respect to his being. In like manner, with ]» , "W, by , ]r»b , nhn , ihN , etc. Note. The preposition 'J73 has often a negative sense, in such ca- ses ; e.g. Gen. 27: I,* his eyes were dim ftfft^Q , so that he could not see, lit. from seeing ; 16: 2. Ex. 14: 5. For ]72 before the Inf. in com- parisons, see § 454. 6. N. B. For the use of the Inf. const, for the Inf. abs., see § 516. § 522. The Inf. const, with 7 , in many cases, answers to the English Inf. preceded by the particle to. E. g. Gen. 2: 5, ' and there was no man "i'ayb , to till the ground ;' v. 10, ' and a river went out from Eden nipifcrrb , to water the ground f 11: 6, 'all vvhich they may purpose nito£^ to do,'' etc. When "Tib 2 {nut) comes before an Inf., the b is put before it ; as Gen. 3: 11,' which I commanded thee bbtt "^bab not to eat ;' i. e. the Inf. is used as a noun in regimen with Tib 2 . § 523. The Inf. const, with 7 , and with the verb of ex- istence (nTl) expressed or implied, constitutes a peri- phrasis, expressing the meaning of several forms of the fin- ite verb, viz. (a) Of the Praeter; as 2 Chr. 26: 5, CribN S-n? T£2, and he sought God, lit. and he was in seeking God; Gen. 15: 12, 'the sun Niar Ti^ was about to go downf lit. was in going down ; 2 Chr. 1 1: 22. Ezra 3: 12. (6) Of the Present; as Is. 44: 14, ib""rn~ob [.fiP , n] 1 he hews down for himself, lit. [he is] in hewing down. Prov. 19: 8, ' he that is wise, aiU NUEb [~l~],findeth prosperity,'' lit. is in finding; Is. 21: 1. (c) Of the Future ; as Is. 38: 20, ''^'BJinr [rtVT)] rrifT, Jehovah will deliver trie, lit. will be for the delivering of me ; Ps. 25: 14, ' Jeho- vah Ci'-'-prrb L~".n"!] wl ^ t€ac ^ them," 1 lit. will be for the teaching of them; 49: 15. 62: 10. Ecc. 3: 14. So Ps. 101: 8, 'soon n*»2H| will I destroy the wicked of the land, rpnanb / will cut ojfr ;' etc. §§524 — 521 yiNi rrirp nViDSJ D^z in the day of Jeho- vah's making the earth and heavens, i. e. in the day when Jehovah made, etc. 1 K. 13: 4, ttJV* -q--riw\ ~r;- jkip^wAen the king heard the word of the man, etc. Is. 58: 5, ' a day ittJBS C~N m;r , when a man will afflict his soul? etc. So with the subject ami two Ac- cusatives; as Gen. 41: 39, nNT-r3-nN "jniw\* D"»nT?« TnSn "**^h*] i since God's showing you all this, i. e. '-" — 531« syntax :; i» aim n ii-i.i.-. PARTICIPLES. vj 527. Active Participles are often used in the place of finite verbs; viz. (a) For the present tense ; e. g. Ecc. !'• 4, l one generation *|^fl passeth away, and another generation N3 cometh ;' 1: 7, 8. Ps. 1: 6. 3 - - 2. 4: 7. Is. 1:7. In this manner, participles are used with pronouns of any person instead of verbs, in order to express the present tense ; as ■'Dbfij N"V , I fear ; nnN N*V , thou fear est ; 13rl5« iPK'y , we fear ; etc. In intrans. verbs, this use is very common. (6) For the past tense in all its gradations; e. g. Gen. 2: 10, ' and a river Njp issued from Eden ;' Deut. 4: 3, ' your eyes ntotTfl have seen;' Gen. 41: 17 18, 19. (c) For the Fut. in all its varieties; e.g. Gen. 17: 19, 'Sarah rH.V. 11 shall bear a son,' etc. 19: 13, DTl^rTtJjg 'we are about to destroy the city ;' 6: 17, ' behold I fiOSXI will cause to come a flood ;' 48: 4. Ex. 9: 18. 1 K. 11: 31. 14: in. § 528. Participles, when used as verbs, are subject to all the anomalies of concord which are found in verbs. E. g. Gen. 4: 10, D^fJ^S *pr]N V2& b^p, the voice of thy brother's blood cries, [cry]. § 529. The two Hebrew participles, active and pas- sive, often have the sense of the Latin participles in -rus and -dus. E. g. Gen. 19: 14, TWl fJirP hfrTOB , Jehovah is about to destroy the city ; Ps. 7G: 8, K~}i:, metuendus ; Ps. 18: 4, *rV~^ , laudandus, etc. § 530. The verb of existence (fPFT) added to the par- ticiple, makes an Imperf. tense, descriptive of continued action or condition. E. g. Job 1: 14, 'the cattle rn©*lh IVj , were ploughing ;' Neh. 1: 4, b^BrtQI CiC "flSTl , / was fasting and praying ; 2 : 1 , 15. 2 Chr. 24: 14. 36: 16. Gen. 4: 17. Deut. 9: 22, 24. Note. In like manner tti^ there is, and "";Sf there is not, either with or without suffixes, are often connected with participles, and form a periphrasis for the Pres. tense of the finite verb : e. g. Judg. 6: 36, ' if 5T»fa T^j; thou savest ,-' Gen. 24: 49. 43: 5, k if rifrti'B t|S"W , thou dost not send away ;' Lx. 5: 16, c straw ]PC ]M is not given;" 1 Lev. 26: 6. 531. Active Participles may govern the same cases as §§532 — 534. syntax; participles — adverbs. 183 their verbs; but it is a more common construction, to put them in regimen with the noun that follow-. E.g. Ps. 84: 5, ^n^3 ^a^iV, inhabiten of thy house; Ps. 28: i, TlS "H") : >'\ the descenders qf[\. e. those who go down into] the pit; 5- 12, *173w " , 3P?jK, the lovers of thy name; 10: 8. Prov. 2: 10. Such a Gen. is capable of all the varieties of rendering which belong to the Gen. after nouns, § 424. It also admits intervening prepositions, like nouns, § 432. § .032. Passive participles are constructed with c in various ways ; viz. {a) With an Ace; as Ezek. 0: 2, D" , -2 SJtob, c/o//ierf[with] linen gar- ments ; 1 Sam. 2. 18, TlSiJ Tlift, girded [with] an cphod. So in Greek avatdeiqv tintipivog, \l. u. 140. {b) With the Gen. ; as Ezek. 0"- 11, D*!j3n ttilSb , clothed [of] linen garments ; Joel 1: 8, p'3~n^;rT girded [of] sackcloth; Ps. 32: 1, yttJB^^feja , pardoned [of] sin, etc. Note. When there is but one form of the participle, as r.7t_ (from nTO to die), this is capable of all the meanings and constructions of both the act. and pass, participles. Verbs used as adverbs. §533. When two verbs immediately follow each other, either with or without the copula between them, 1 lie fust of them often serves merely to Qualify the second, and must be rendered adverbially. E. g. 1 Sam. 2: 3, I'TSTTj ^S") 3 ! 1 rN , do not make much [and] speak i.e. do not say much: Job 10-' 3, ^If^SSrTB ? ':':n N ; b , ye are not ashamed ye stun mc, i. e. in a shameless manner' ye stun me ; Gen. 26 18, iEfri ai25»5 , and he returned and dug, i. e. he again dug ; I'.' 27: 20. 30: 31. 31: 28. Hos. 1: 6. Ps. 51: 4. 71: 20. So SFU^Tj is us- ed for well, skilfully, Ps. 33: 3. FpOif! for again, once more. Gen. I 2. 8: 12. rtfcs) for ad Jincm, entirely, Gen. 24: 15. nrr?3 for hastily, quickly, Gen. 27- 20. Ex. 2: 18. naifl for much, often, 2 K. 21 6 ft 51: 4. ai'ij for again, 1 K. 10: 6. Job 7: 7. The same i- true I fttHDC other verbs. In some cases the second verb i> the Inf. U < ien, J7 20k Ex. 2: 18, etc. ADVERBS. § f)'M. Adverbs in Hebrew are often used m the [ :l.ir< of nou i is. 184 §§ r >3. r > — 539. syntax ; Anvr.Rns — prepositions. (a) In apposition with the nouns which they qualify. a« Gen. 18: 4, B?)3"t:5» , a little water ; Nch. 2: 12, X3TO O^rN , few persons ; Is. 30: 33, !T3pS3 B^S •> much wood, etc. {b) In the Gen. after nouns ; as 1 K. 2: 31, D2n ■»»*! , innocent blood; Ezek. 30: 16, oav "^X , daily ■persecutors ; Deut. 26: 5, CJ[E *tYB ,fcw men, etc. § 535. Adverbs standing in place of nouns, sometimes take prepositions before them. E. g. Ezek. 6: 10, D3T1 bN, gratis ; 2 Chr. 29: 36, DNflOa , suddenly ; 1 K. 22: 20, ITIP3, so, [lit. in the so] ; Esth. 4= 16, ]DZ ', so ; Neh. 9: 19, D 531 - , 3, tfVn'/y. § 536. The repetition of adverbs marks intensity. E. g. Gen. 7: 19, "IMS "imj , very much ; Deut. 28: 43, ttbJHH !"&*», higher and higher ; HEE J1B73, deeper and deeper; 1 K. 20: 40, run Sisni , hither and hither, i. e. here and there, all around. § 537. Two negatives in Hebrew strengthen the nega- tion. E. g. 1 K. 10: 21, sitjh: Nb 5]D3 -pat, sr'toer was not at all regarded. In the parallel verse, 2 Chr. 9: 20, Nb is omitted. Ex. 14: 11, ^fiHfl ED^ip pN , because there were no graves at all. Zeph. 2- 2. etc. § 538. A negative particle is often joined with nouns and adjectives, to qualify the sense of them. E. g. Deut. 32:6, D^n Nr, not wise, i. e. foolish : Ps. 43: J, -port w xb, unmerciful; Job. 30: 8, DTji "VrS, disgraced; Deut. 32:21, rN"*Nb, not God ; Qy~Nb , not a nation, i. e. not worthy of this appellation ; Is. 31: 8, w\^~Nb , not a mortal ; 10: 15, fg-flfij , no wood at all, etc. This mode of expression is called liroryg. Note. A negative is frequently implied in an interrogative sen- tence ; e. g. 2 Sam. 7: 5, flRNH, wilt thou build me an house? i. e. thou shalt not; as in the parallel verse, 1 Chr. 17: 4. So Is. 27: 7. Prov. 24: 28. Ezek. 18: 23, comp. v. 32. 1 K. 8: 27. Gen. 30: 20. Job 16: 6, ' if I keep silence !f»rp "372TSE , what quits me ? i. e. I am not re- lieved ; Cant. 8: 4. Prov. 20: 21. Dan. 1: 10. PREPOSITIONS. § 539. Prepositions, both simple and composite, govern the oblique cases of nouns, pronouns, etc. For the pleonasm and ellipsis of them, see § 547. § 551. §§ 540 — 544. syntax ; conjunctions — intcrji:ctions. 185 CONJUNCTIONS. § 540. As the Hebrew language possesses but very few conjunctions, some of them are necessarily employed in a great variety of significations. Tins is particularly the case with the copulative 1. But the various uses of this and others, are best learned from the Lexicons and from practice. For some peculiar uses of Vav, see § 558. Note. For the ellipsis of conjunctions, see § 561. INTERJECTIONS. § 541. Interjections simply expressive of calamity or imprecation, often take a Dative after them. E. g. 1 Sam. 4: 8, n:b "»}« , wo tons ! Ezek. 30: 2, tD)+\ nn , wo for the day! § 542. Interjections which have the forms of other parts of speech, take after them the cases required by those forms. E. g. Ps. 1: I, ^«J« with a Gen. after it ; 29: 1, 2, T3H , with an Ace, etc. PLEONASM. 543. I. Of personal pronouns. Verbal suffixes are not (infrequently pleonastic, being immediately followed by the noun to which they have relation. E. g. Ex. 2: 6, 'Vr'.n-njj inqpFj] i sne saty ^' n tne cWM; l Sun. 21: 14, iayC-DN 'IS*?*] he changed it his understanding ; Job 33: 20, Q^J?. Sh'rj 1 Plant , his soul abhors it bread; Ps. 83: 1 2. Such is the predominant construction in the Chaldee and Syriac. § 544. The suffixes of nouns are sometimes pleonastic. E. g. Is. 17: G, ny)t rt^rDS, in the twigs of it the fruit tret . Pf n 14: 13, nri"2y nr^-jru*, the end of it joy ■ Cant I: 6, "'-- - ,- -^- , »»y vineyard which [is] to me. Such also is the general usage of the (,'ImI- dee and Syriac. 1\ 1^0 545—548. syntax; PLEONASM — BLLfFNS, § 545. The Dative case of pronouns alter verb-;, and especially verbs oi' motion, is often pleonastic. E. g. Gen. 12: 1, lb~T^. i 8° f or &V* e lf\ '• e - &° 5 Cant - 2: 1 1, SjHl ^ , it has gone for itself, i. e. has gone ; Gen. 27: 43, ^»"tl^> ,flecf>r thyself^ i. e. flee ; Is. 31: 8, ^i 0: , he has Jied for himself, i. e. he has fled ; Joh 39: 4, 17:b lattJ^Jtb , they turned not back for themselves, i. c. turned not back; Cant. 2: 17, ft£ HJB?, compare for thyself i. e. com- pare ; Joh 12: 11, ' the palate hbtiaStr , relishes for itself i. e. relish- es; 15 : 28, ' houses which hlsb ISU^-Kb, they do not inhabit for ihem- selvesf i.e. which no one inhabits; Frov. 13: 13, it blJrTJi he shall per- ish for himself i. e. shall perish ; Job 19: 29, Q31: ^"lW , fear for your- selves, i. e. fear ye. The Arabic has the same idiom ; and it is also very common in Syriac. § 546. The Dative pleonastic also occurs after parti- ciples and adjectives ; but more seldom than after verbs. E. g. Hos. 8: 9, 'a wild ass it 1"is , lonely for itself i. e. alone, or lonely; Amos 2: 13, nV rrNba i, full for itself i. e. full; Ps. 144: 2, ,, b~' , t3^Ba , my deliverer for me, i. e. my deliverer. § 547. II. Of Propositions. The prepositions 2 and "j/G are sometimes pleonastic. {a) 2 ; as Ex. 32: 22, 'thou knowest this people that N^n 2^2 , they are evil,'' lit. that they are in evil ; Hos. 13: 9, T"l??2 ,, 2-" , 2 ,for my help is in thee, lit. in respect to me [1 am] in thy help; Ps. 29: 4. Prov. 3: 26. is. 2G: 4. 45: 14, tN "J2 ^N , only thou [art] God, or, only in thee [is] God ; Job 18: 8. Ezra 3: 3. In the three last examples, it stands even before the subject of a sentence. This is technically call- ed Beth essentiae. Note. The name of Beth essentiae, is also extended to 2 used in cases like the following; as Ps. 118: 7, ^Ti;2 ~^~"! i Jehovah is among my helpers, i. e. Jehovah is my helper. Ps. 54: 6. 99: 6. Job 24: 13. Judg. 11: 35. (6) \n ; as Dent. 15: 7, ' a poor man 5prj« IrfNO , one of thy breth- ren," lit. of one of thy brethren; Lev. 4: 2. 5: 13. Ezek. 18: 10. This idiom is common in Arabic. ELLIPSIS. § 548. I. Of nouns. The Norn, case is sometimes omit- ted before verbs. (a) Before verbs used in an intrans. way, in order to denote condition <§§ 549 — 552. sxntax ; ellipsis op pronouns. 1-7 or state of feeling ; e. g. Gen. 31: 36, ib ~\~"Z it was hot to him, viz. E|fig anger, i. e. his anger burned; Gen. 34: 7. comp. Gen. 30: -'. Kx. 1: 14, etc., where S)N is expressed. So 1 Sam. 21: 11, "^'zv DrTPl] . and it pitied thee, i. e. mine eye ( , : , ? > ) pitied; comp. Gen. 1~>. 20. Iieut 7: 16, etc. where 'ps is expressed. (6) Words such aa the mind of the reader will spontaneously supply, are sometimes omitted; viz. such as nnrr 1 ; , EaVrbfit * etc. e. g. Prov. 10: 24, the desire of the righteoui ffP he will grant, i. e. Jehovah will grant ; 12: 12. 13: 21. 21: \o. Job 3: 20. Ecc. 9: 9. Ps. 10: 4, comp. v. 13, and see below in § 555. § 549. The Ace. case, after several verbs which arc in frequent use, is often omitted, as being unnecessary to n n- der the language intelligible. E. g. mb^ she bore, i. e. children; n"J3 he concluded, i. e. rr""C an agreement ; !~lto: he inclined or spread, i. e. ]TN the ear, or b~S the tent ; NTU3 he lifted up, i. e. bip the voice; *|"^" he arranged, i. e. C:" word) in prayer, etc. These omissions are sometimes supplied ; but more generally the noun is omitted. § 550. When the subject of a proposition is required, by the sense, to be repeated in the predicate with some addition, the actual repetition of it rarely takes place. E. g. Cant. 1: 15, W2V ^p? thine eyes [are the eyes] of doves ; Ps. 18: 34. 48: 7. 55: 7. Is. 52: 14. § 551. In the designation of weights and measures, the ordinary words which express the standard of them, are commonly omitted. E. g. C]03 ClV.N,a thousand [shekels] of silver ; ITTl -^v, ten [shekels] of gold ; V*~\TU 'CiJ six [ephahs] of barley ; C~~. *tjW fWO [loaves] of bread ; comp. § 463. Note. In expressing the day of the month, the word BV day is commonly omitted ; comp. § 465. §552. II. Of Pronouns. The personal pronouns are of- ten omitted ; e. g. (a) In the Norn, most commonly, as in Greek and Latin. (/') In the Gen. after the Inf. nominascens, or after a DOUD ; <■. ir Gen. I 1 '. rn"'ttnV, to preserve [them] alive, etc. instead of En^nn: ;: l.\ Ifi -'. 1 Jehovah is my strength, rnJBTP , and [my] long,'' for ''^";" :T ■ , I P* '" 10, 11. 66: 6, etc. (c) In the Ace. after verbs; as Ex. 2: 26, 'and God 9*1*\ observed them, 1 for B?"^] ; Ps. 137: 5, Met my right band hSaJni forget [me] ;' 139: 1.17: 11. Gen. 9: 22, etc. 188 §§559 — 556. syntax; itLiFtta or p k ow o o w — rzuu § 55:5. Tlic relative pronoun "TON is often omitted in various constructions; viz. {a) In the Norn.; as Gen. 15: 13, ' in a land an: Nr , [which] is not theirs;' Is. 40: 20. 51: 2. 54: 1. 55: 5. 61: 1U, etc. (6) In the Gen. after a noun in the const, state ; as Ex. 4: 13, ' send f^ttn ["VjJJtJ "T3. by the hand [of him whom] thou will send.'' See § 433. (c) In the Ace. ; Frov. 9: 5, 'as wine [which] "TOD?: I have mingled ;' Gen. 3: 13, nNT~~E n^lpy , what is this [which] thou hast done ? {d) When used to qualify pronouns, adverbs, etc. (§ 478); as Ex 18: 20, 'the way P73 %&* [in which] they go ;' Job 3: 3, ' perish the day 13 nb^ h"^], T [in which] / was bom ;' Ps. 32: 2. Is. 1: 30. 23: 7, etc. Ecc. 1: 5, ta*0 NTn ~"VT [*Y£fijt], [whence] he arose, (e) Sometimes even the pronoun which itN would qualify, is also omitted; as Is. 29: 1, * the city [jla] TH H3>1 [t~n] in which David dwelt .' Ps. 4: 8, 'more than in the time [*3] *aS E3tt»T , ni Em*! [">¥»], [in which] their corn and new wine increase,'' etc. Comp. § 478. Note. (f) Htf-'J* , in the sense of that which, he who, those who, etc. is often omitted ; e. g. Job 24: 19, ' Sheol takes away TNt2^ [those who] have sinned;" 1 Ps. 12: 6, 'I will place in safety ib IJpS^ [him whom] one puffs at," 1 i. e. who is contemned, {g) In an adverbial sense; as 1 Chr. 15: 12, V? Vnaon bN to [the place which] / have prepared for it ; comp. § 478. Note. Note. The omission of ^«PN ' s much more common in poetry than in prose. In prose, it is generally inserted after a definite noun, and omitted after an indefinite one, as in Arabic. (De Sacy, Gramm. Arabe II. § 363.) § 554. III. Of Verbs. The verb of existence (5VH) is commonly omitted between a subject and its predicate, especially when the predicate stands first ; see § 446. E. g. Gen. 3: 11, \2:N ai-p*-"'3, for naked [am] /; 4: 13,ri"U *315 , great [is] my iniquity, etc. § 555. When the words of any one are repeated, the verb H^X (which marks quotation) is very often emit- ted, and must be supplied from the sense of the passage. E. g. Ps. 8: 4, ' when I behold the heavens, [■»:» -»£& I exclaim], Lord, what is man P 10: 4, ' the wicked in his pride [""i^N has said], W-lV-Sa [Jehovah] will not punish * comp. v. 13, where the ellipsis is supplied; Ps. 52: 8, 9. 59: 8. Job 8: 18. Ecc. 8: 2, ■•:«*, i. e. [*$£*) § 556. When a finite verb would be preceded by an <§§ 557 — 559. svntax; ellipsis op ADfttus-raBFMirioifs. 189 Inf. abs. of the same verb, the former e sometimes oijut- ted : comp. § 517. Note. Besides the above common cases of ellipsis in respect to the verb, there are many others, especially in poetry, which cannot be made the subject of rules, but must be supplied in conformity with the context ; e. g. in Job 39: 24. Is. 66: 6. Ps. 3: 9. 4: 3. 6: 4. 7: 9. Jer. 11: 15. 2 Sam. 23: 17, comp. 1 Chr. 11: 19. 1 K. 11: 25. 2 K. 6: 33. Hos. 8: 1. Prov. 6: 26. § 5.57. IV. Of Adverbs. The interrogative Pi is often omitted. E. g. Gen. 27: 24, ''32 flj JlP.N , art thou my very son, for nPNrt ; 3: 1, *2 t\» , is it so then that, for ^ E|gn ; 1 Sam. 16: 4.30: 8. 2 Sam. 9: 6. 18: 29. Job 40: 25. Such ellipsis often takes place in a negative interrogation, before N^ ; as Jon. 4: 11, DlttJJ fit? ^fttn , and should not I spare Nineveh ? instead of «bn ; Lam. 1: 12. 3: 36. Ex. 8: 22. J K 5: 26. Job 14: 16, "iQTlin Nil , arid wilt thou not keep watch over my sins? So also before bN , 1 Sam. 27: 10. § 558. When two negative propositions follow each other in the same construction, especially in poetic paral- lelism, the negative adverb is sometimes omitted in the sec- ond proposition, and must be supplied. E. g. 1 Sam. 2: 3. 'speak not proudly, pni> NX."] , let [not] any rash thing proceed from your mouth;" Ps. 9: 19, 'for he will not always forget the poor, the expectation of the afflicted "i-Nr , shall [not] al- ways perish ; Ps. 75: 6. Job 28: 17. 30: 20. Is. 23: 4". 38: 18. Note. When a negative is expressed in the first member of a par- allelism, and the second has a Vav prefixed to it, that Yav should be rendered disjunctively, viz. nor, but, etc. E. g. Ps. 44: 19, 'our heart has not turned back from thee, IsSttJM DP}] , nor our steps declined ; Is. 41: 28, ! )2 ,, U^") nor did any answer, or, hit none gave answer; Job 3: 10. Is. 28: 27.' Deut. 33: 6. § 559. V. Of Prepositions. The prepositions -. ? . etc. are not upfrequentiy omitted, where the sense requires them. («) The prefix 2 ; a* Ps. 66: 17, \-iN-jf_— 'E VrN, / tried to km [with] my mouth, for ^M ; 12: 3. 17: 10, \.\ 14. 00:7, k help DM -:*"-" [with] thy right hand ; 108: 7. 109: 2, etc. Note, also, thai the pniix 5, used as a conjunction, usually excludes 3; as Am. 9: 11, ttb** "" , -, as [in] the days of old, for "•EpSS . (^) The prefix b ; as Prov. 87: 7, J'.M) §§560 — SO'2. syntax; ellipsis of conjunctions, i;t< . rTSJH ^" c .b» D?3ffl two [or] three eunuchs ; 1 Sam. 20: 12. Is. 17. 6. (c) The sign of comparison S , "»8?R5 , as ; Is. 21: 8, rPnN K"1j5*2 /ie wiM roar [as] a Zion ; Ps. 11: 1, IISX DD"1H n"nr ^^2/ to your mountain [as] a bird; Is. 51: 12, ' who shall be made "Pim [as] grass ; Job 24: 5. Ps. 40: 8. Nah. 3: 12, 13. Especially when the second member of a sentence has ]3 so, the first member often omits 3 ; as Is. 55: 9, ' for ! as] the heavens are higher than the earth, ^3 so are his ways,' etc. Ps. 48: 6. Job 7: 9. Judg. 5:1 5. {d) The particles "Vd , "lUJN, that; as Ps. 9: 21, 'the nations shall know fran £i:N , [that] they are mere men;'' 50: 21. 71: 8. Job 19: 25. Lam. 1:21. § 562. VII. Ellipsis in poetic parallelism. In poetry, a noun, pronoun, verb, adverb, or preposition, expressed in the first member of a parallelism, is frequently omitted in the second member ; and vice versa. In the second member, (a) A noun; as Ps. 24: 1, ilirp'r ''Jehovah's is the earth and all that is in it, [Jehovah's is] the world and thej who dwell therein.' (6) A pronoun ; Ps. 22: 6, "23N ' I am a worm and no man, [/ am] the scorn of men ;' so nr\X , in v. 10. (c) A verb ; as * In technical language, that part of the senteuce, which in cases like the above preceJes Vav, is called protasis ; that which follows, apodoais. t This is called the coiustructio asyndctica, or asundic construction i. e. without the OtvotO- fiQg or conjunction. §§ 5G2 — 5Gj. syntax; chanor or construction. 19| Ps. 22: 3,'Oray God, injMJ / call all the day, and all the night [do I call] ;' 13: 3, fl^lfaj -'.it *Vf , l /joa; long shall I have anxiety in my soul, [how long shall I have] sorrow in my heart? 1 Is. 19: 7, ' kings WV shall behold and rise up, princes [shall behold] and do reverence, etc. (d) An adverb; as Ps. 10: 5, Fjtfb , c why, Jehovah, standest thou afar off, [why] hidest thou thyself; 1 13:3. 22: 2, etc. For the omis- sion of Nb , see § 558. (c) A preposition; as Job 12: 12, EF8nb'*a , with the aged is wisdom, IftK'] and [with] length of days is nndentand- ing;' 15:3. Is. 28: 7. 44: 28, ' saying to Jerusalem— rDVp and [to] the temple, 1 for bs^nbl; 28: 6. Job 34: 10. Gen. 49: 25, bija 'from the God of thy father — ^VO nJO and [from] the Almighty, 1 for rx 1 : ; Ps. 22: 2, ' why art thou distant *~\1~ [from] the words of my cry, 1 for "nn-Ttt ; Job 30: 5. Is. 48: 9. 49: 7. 61:7. In the first member ; e. g. Is. 48: 11, ' for how shall [my glory] be profaned, for I will not give "H23 , my glory to another? 1 And so of- ten. Remark. A multitude of obscurities in the English translation of the Old Testament, might be removed by the aid of these principles, and much light diffused over the sacred writings. CHANGE OF CONSTRUCTION. § 56.3. When a sentence begins with a verb in the Inf.. preceded by a preposition and used in a finite sense, it of- ten proceeds with a finite verb. E.g. Ps. 60: 2, a*jj»1 — irnxrj^tt'/ien he strove — and returned : Gen. 39: 18, N-JpN") "'b/ip W^nS , when I raised my voice and cried . Is. 18: 5. 30: 12. 49: 5 Qeri. Amos. 1: 11. 2: 4. Gen. 27: 45. Job 28: 25. 29: 6. 38: 7. § 564. Sentences often begin with a participle, and pro- ceed with a finite verb. E. g. Prov. 19: 26, ESN rY*Pl ^N-nTl-2 , he who abuses his father, [and] chases away his mother; 2: 14. Is. 5: 11. 48: 1. 57: 3. Gen. 27: 33. Ps. 15: 2, 3, etc. § 56.5. Sentences often exhibit a change of person, es- pecially in poetry ; viz. (a) A transition from the third person to the second ; ami MNMim E. g. Is. 1: 29, ' for they shall be ashamed of the groves, whi< -h n have loved ;' Gen. 49: 4, ' thou wentest up to thy father's bed — n went up to my couch;' Mic. 7: 18. Mai. 2: 15. IM \\ .")(>(;_ "ids. syntax; construotio prae»;nans— /.i.i all of them, i. e. all of you ; Job 18: 4. Is. 22: 16, etc. CONSTRUCTIO PRAEO'AXS. § 566. The name of constructio praegnans is applied to phrases, which imply more than the words literally ex- press although there is no direct ellipsis. E. g. Ps. 22: 22, "W^Xf CO"! ""IH^S , hear [and deliver] me from the horns of the wild bulls, comp. v. 13 ; Ps. 74: 7, ~7?«p JSOaib^ri Yy$> to the earth have they [cast down and] defied thy duelling ; 1 Sam. 10: 9, "iftN ab DVfbN ^-"l^rpi , and God changed [his heart and gave] to him another heart ; 1 Chr. 12: 17, n ^Sb ^rjia^i: , but if to deceive [and betray] me to my enemies; Ps. 118:5. Is. 38: 17. Jos. 4: 18. 2 Sam. 18: 19. Hos. 1: 2, etc. •ZEUGMA. § 567. The name Zeugma is applied to a construction, where two subjects have a verb in common, but this verb expresses action, etc. which can with propriety be predicated of only one of the subjects ; e. g. Job 4: 10, ' the voice of the lion, and the teeth of the young lions, are broken out,"* i. e. the roaring of the lion [is made to cease], and the teeth, etc. Gen. 47: 19, ' wherefore should we die, we and our land? i. e. we die, and our land [become desolate] ; Is. 55: 3. Hos. 1: 2. Jer. 15: 8. Est. 4: 1. § 568. The figure Zeugma also includes those cases where nouns are grammatically connected with preceding nouns, when in respect to sense such connexion cannot be admitted; e. g. Ps. 65: 9, ' thou makest "'Nitia , the outgoings of the morning and the evening to re- joice,' where outgoings cannot be predicated of evening; Gen. 2: 1, ' the heavens, and the earth, and all CN3£ the host of them, i. e. the host of the heavens, viz. the stars. Compare Neb. 9: 6. §§569 — 571. syntax; henoiauys — paronomasia. 193 HENDIADYS. § 569. The name Ilcndiadys is applied to a construc- tion, in which two nouns are put in the same case, and connected by a copula, while in respect to sense one of them must be taken as a Gen. following the other, or as an adjective qualifying the other, § 443. E. g. Gen. 1: 14, 'and they shall be for signs, D , "i3'v:'rn and for seasons,'' i. e. they shall be for signs of seasons, etc. 3: 16, / will multi- ply thy sorrow and thy conception, i. e. 1 will multiply the pains of thy conception ; Job 10: 17, misfortunes and a host, i. e. a host of misfor- tunes ; 4: 16, stillness and a voice, i. e. a low voice, comp. 1 K. 19: 12. 2 Chr. 16: 14. Jer. 29: 11. The origin of the word is, ep did dvoTv. PARONOMASIA. § 570. The name Paronomasia is given to an expres- sion, which contains two or more words selected in such a manner, that they may resemble each other in sound, while in sense they may differ. Paronomasia is a very fai-orite figure of rhetoric among the Hebrews, and is common in all the oriental languages, [t differs from OUT rhyme, inasmuch as, the words which constitute it do not necessarily stand at the end of parallelisms or strophes, but may be placed together in any part of a sentence, and are found in prose as well as port n.' § 571. There are various modes of constructing Paronomasia, of which the following are the principal. (a) By placing together like sounding words; as Gen. 1: 2, ^rrn Iria", desolate and empty ; 4: 12, 1:t 3>: , a fugitive and a vagabond ; 18: 27, n$M1 "icy, dust and ashes ; Job 30: 19. Is. 28: 10, 13, IS 13B^ 12 ^p T \ *>£ ^R^ 1J2 '^ i baw nere a »^ l (lw th ere > precept here void precept there ; 24: 17, J1C1 nnci 1t]S , terror and a snare and a sling , Vs. 18: 8. Lam. 3: 47. 3er. 48: 43. Is. 24: 3, 4. (6) By using like sounding words in different parts of a sentence , as Hos. 8: 2, nax the stalk yields no n^|5 meal ; Is. 5: 7, ' and In- looked DDflSnb for equity, and lo notoH shedding qf blood, for llgTO righteousness, and lo Mpttt the cry of the oppressed ;' 7: 9, ' if JO ITOMg ye will not believe, then laSMg «b ye shall not be a,tubli>hcd ,■ * Besides the name n-aQovopaola, the (ire< k rhetorician! also called tut* flg* ure TWjtjxifl 1 * an ^ nuQtmifila ; and the Latioi ugnumtnatiu. '2.3 (94 571. syntax; paronomasia. 61: 3, ' he shall appoint "1E.N nrjn "\NC , hcauty instead of ashes ? Ps. '10: 4. 62: 8. G8: 3. Zech. 9: 5. Gen. 42: 35. Amos 5: 26. (c) By changing sometimes the ordinary forms of words, in order to produce similarity of sound; as Ezek. 43: 11, TW^ni TOSto, where Bpsta stands for 8*^553; Ps. 32: 1, rWDh"**03 9lif "*%|JJ , where ^-liu: stands for BMtoa . See Mic. 1:8. Ezek. 7:11. Amos 5: 26. {(I) By employing, in some cases, a word sounding in some degree like another; as Joel I: 15, ' it shall come *T212 T©3, as destruction from the Almighty ,' Jer. 61: 2, ' I will send against Babylon D^^J 6«r- barians, fflin cmd //H N2 N2 fg, /Ae end is como com-e m ress w/wn him ; Ruth 1: 20. Neh. 9: 24. Num. 18: 2. Is. 21: 2. Jer. 6: 1. 48: 2. Ezek. 25: 16. Hos. 2: 25. Amos 5: 5, 6. Note. Paronomasia is very common in the New Testament ; as Matt. 8: 22, uq?ig xovg vmgovg ftuipui zovg iuvtiov vexgovg let the dead bury their own dead ; see above in e. In Latin are found capia- tur Capua, cremetur Cremona ; and Cicero exclaims {in Verrem IV. 24) quod nunquam hujasmodi everriculvm in provincia ullafuit. In the writ- ings of the monks of the middle ages, and of the older English divines. Paronomasia abounds to excess. 3M3BAM&2LS OF VERBS AND NOUNS. 100 Par. I. Regular Verb transitive. §§212 — 219. Kul. Kal. Niphal. IVI. Praet. 3 m. (sing.) 7Dp nsn Vop: bvji 3i: nVop ms-i nVjp] rhpji 2 m. nVbp nnbn r'-ap: nVap 2£ nVop nnsi nVop] r^.p 1 *. ^nrop TDD1 m^bpa ^rb;jp 3 c. (plnr.) V^LDp :'it in:n ^ j}3 ^jp 2 m. cn^-Jp DTDS"! nnrjp] zrb;jp 2f. K$3R jMiyi ?f?>.PK i^E 1 ^Vjj? nanibn ^rjp] ^y^p int: abs. const. ^"jp b,-2)V"jpn A' ^apri ^p. htap Fut. 3 m. (sing.) PtSp^ 33T* ^BK !*BK 3f. Sofn nsin tei?! ^8*1 2 m. V'jpn nsin ^ttjjri Vjp.n 2f. ^•jpn ^znn h V J .i; n . ^.P-*! 1 ^pa 33i« ^KS ^?£K 3 m. [ptarO ^ap" 1 ttST •'It • 3f. naVapn rcnann MDrjpn n:r^r 2 m. "irapn W3in $&£?] ¥oj?sj 2f. n:Vjpn naainm nA&jjn 1 V"jp: MH3 b"OJ?3 ^£ 3 . /uf. apoc. Imp. 2 m. (sing.) Vt^P 35") ropn Vjp_ 2f. ^P.P. ^Dl ^•jp- *'|T T^p- 2 m. (I'lur.) ^I3P ran •'|T • irjp 2f. ■rABp. n ?-.^l nAbpn n&tbj? Parte, act. yj.ip tti-i tew pass Mbg SMI T ^?R? Par. I. Regular Verb transitive. §§212—219. 107 Pual. HiphiL Iloplial. Hitbpael. CnR)Vag ^optn (:q ( -n)Vjpn (^Rnn)^pr- etc. rffVp n^^upn ° ,c - n^pn '■•••• nrjpr - T)bb% rbbpn ntepn rVjprn r :V J P nb'jpn rrjpn rrjpnn ^nrjp TiVapn ^P&bpn ^fepnn ^Bfs Vr-jpn *tepn ^epnn cfi .V j p' cnVjpn crVjpn Drt>Bpnn ■jn'rjp ■jn^/jpn irtepn ■jrr^pnn *ttV6)? lAajyi labopn iDVbpnn ^bj? ^?.?P- ^oprt Vjp' ^bpn irapn '—.r^H (bop.:) 5B£1 ^F2 C^p;)^ C?«B«:)bE)gni wo. paprj VfcRft etc. ^Hj" n •»•■ ptapnri ^agn ^*»qj?ri ^?pP bts)jprirj ^iqp'n ^/bpn ^qp.n ^ORW Hp* ^Dp* i>»pK v?£n* ^Mag-i ^'PR- ^pi "T'jp^ raVfepfi nabbpit n ?V J r. r T n:yjp_nn *tapfl i^bpn ^■jpn ^Bj?nn nabbpn n&bpn nabbptf hafcbpnn £&pj! ^qpj ,<::: r. : '--."H -".p! Vopn (Hir^i) ^Bj?nn tybpft ••c-rjpr- ^*?n ■-^-r- *?V-.~~ n&tbpnn ^»Bpti tepnn r,*s (bBPtt)^Bpa Ci>BP»)VDPt] 198 Par. II. Reg. Verbs intransitive. §§ 220—232. Kal. Kal. Kal. Kal. Praet. 3 m. ( B ing.) pSZ) !?N12J *« ■if 3f. nhs® rfta© rn£ ma 1 ' 2 m. nVba tt&m (M w*n?! rriJ 2f. ntetti nba© W ?9*ri?! m3r» 1 "^BID vfpM ( ■WjS :W?! ^n-i5^ 3 :piur.) *i^BEJ ^Nti in^ w 2ra. crted cnbtftri wro* amy 2f. I^Bffl v&*$ jmV* jrrjj* 1 l&Dtfl wHkd m^ 1 " man Mi Li,w»m Li,v>1»i (The other forms in these two word* aDS. 7"S(I3 7l"UJ belong to the irregular verbs.) const. ^B© ^«ttj Fut. 3 m. («ing.) tetti/] ^KtD 1 ] 3 f. isizjn ^wjri 2 m. ^Bfflfi bwtBfi 2 f. ^Bttfl ^PP. 1 tefflM *?tftttf 3-m.cptaro ^B«n ^M?! 3 f. rq^.ltBjn M^tata 2 m. ^BttF] ^ftton 2 f. nAsmn nab&iDn i Vstia i>«tD3 Imp. 2 m. ("ins-) ^B© ^*MD 2 f. ^BB "VNO 2m.(pi«'-) I^Bti ^Ntt) 2 f. na^ffl rcftati PartT act. ^BO fclfltj pass. 7 IN tt) Par. III. Verbs D Gutt., smooth enunciation. §224. 199 Kal. Nlphal. Hiphil. Hophal. Praet. Ifi* ^3 Tayn TO ^imay Tib?: WBjn Wnjn Piur. may to wfcgn wn way ways wa*n wwn Inf. abs. lin? T|B*3 Twn const. "jay 1B;n twn Tttpl Fut. -jar ptit "Tttg l^ar lay na?n pTnn ittyn .twp wn TOWi pTnn ■ffiyn Tayn ■na^n mayn n pmn mayn ■^"•feypi ma*n TOW* ptnaj WH TW* iny« Plur. may ipim may m^ay may nmayn njptnFi wioajn rtjnwn nnayn mayn iptnn mfc*n m'wn ir;r nj-i&n nsjfmn nmayn nrtawi nj^rj nay? jpirg law iwa iaja imp. ia? pin tojsj iwn may , »pm mayn m*ay- Plur. may ^ipm mayn m'wn nmSy "?pm. naijbyn nnbyn Part. act. laiy T£" - pass. Hay TOM TBJHJ 200 Par. IV. Verbs £ Gutt., rough eouBC. §§225. K;il. K:il. Niplial. Bopbal. HiphU. Praot. OiS-Vin -ian "-"?. ■sjEnn totki 3f. 2 m. T : n rbhn rn:n * : It etc. elr. n5Bnn etc. nTonn etc. 2f. riVin 1. 3 (p'«' ■•> nVrrj lawia to&nn i-rcnn 2 m. tsn^n etc. 2f. wj?.in 1. wSftn Inf. abs. b'TiTl ■vian T»cnn const. p*in nan. ijsnn ITSi n I ■venn Fut. 3 m. ^nj n'arp 1611 ■SpWP Ton; 3 f. ^nn -iann ^ann TjE_nn Term 2 m. ^rrri nanri etc. etc. etc. 2 f. ^rpn ■nann i 5>to« ■Jian* 3m. (pi) ^Vyp nw 3f. naV-nm nanJnn 2 m. ^iVnn *nann 2 f. na'rtnn naiann i Jqro nam Imp. 2 m. ^*in ■inn Tj&nn icnn 2 f. ^nn nan ■osnn etc 2 m.(pi-) iVin *nan *iDBnn 2 f. njVin wn5n napfcnn Part. act. ^n "lain TOnM n if mi . . - pass. *TJ£i13 ^EHE Par. V. Verb g Guttural. §§229—232. 201 Kal. Niphal. Piel. Pual. HithpaeL pi p*w (aw) '•pa tan) TO ■sjnann np^T 't ~;t TtfTO •*• naia tic - r.z^'z nzizrn V0\ *9™ nana nz^z naSann • 1 . — T vifm Wna rpn'a nziznn **&?! TtpJta "TOT* ^nzpi ^PDnann 5jpyj lp_3?TD irja izn'z Wiann WiRSt enpyra cnz-D nnrp.i i znz^znn •jnpn inpyn I 1 ?.?!?. 1&TO jnanann ^-! njftro WIS MSnla Wnann pin P"I TO 1"* ^nzrn few p££ F?.£(»e;) ~nz? (r*T : ) >r n-'! TO 1 ?! B?33J?i pgTin ppp] *■ "izri <*c. '•pari "spanR timn pnn pg-jn Ipan TO n . tpann ^n:n ^n ^Jpjn wato ^l- n . ''TO 11 *! tina* pgt« pgiwv spaa TO? "TOna tiftrs* ipjt'i ip;;r tona* wb"! tonarv; ra&Twi rtjphn napiyn fiji^an n:zizn naananri *iB_nan «ipytpi *p??a nsnsri lanin ^"jann •Tjtinaf] n:p>;»n napijft n:-nzn njaitin waiann tinai wm pm *paa TOa *pana P^t jtfja (--.;) jia TO n # ^P3?t w*n wia *TO n .n napgT napJtti 'naana ^J-n??! pyit (*2»)TO9 115°,^ P^» P"t: i TOB 202 Par. VI. Verb $ Guttural. §§283—236. K»l. Niphal. Pie!. Prael 1. 3 m. ( flin s-) ynin n«D3 (?::-) >'~d 3f. T : It rMtba ctc - rtyao 2m. njao nraoa rjwaiD 2f. rnPM nyotba s&EB 1 wlatti wboa ■w!hd 3 tpi«o ^tJUJ ^Bffla 17EO 2 m. cn?£d okflaca DFISHDID 2f. jphpot in^d: inajati 1 ^vbm wlftja 13J^&tD Inf. abs. T\121D const. ynm yaan *?.? Fut. 3 m. ( sin s-) ?KW y^p^ (573^) ysd' 1 3f. watin yafflpi ^c yattin 2 m. j>a©Pi ^wn aiart 2f. wtbn ^aisn • ; it • ■>jp$on 1 ?131DX PBijja pass 3 m. (p'"'-) ^ftttP 12a ah ; fT • 13HD0* 3f: si»btDn fiwaapn n:^dn 2 m. w»n lanafrj *i2PBJpP» 2f. ration naajbttn naspfevto 1 *StD3 paraa yaaia Ful. apoc. Imp. 2 m. ( sin go pari /JUI 1 feauj) yao 2f. OTtd won etc. ^^?!2 i3 2 m. (p' ur o *9&n ijpa»sn liWDtti 2f. W2PBID inayaan nayaai Part. act. (sn «0 ??.*> (r^ra) 732)3 pass. naia ~ T .pads Par. VI. Verb *> Guttural. §§ 233—236. 203 Pual. Hiphil. Hophal. Hithpael. ?^P a^aton won (5ig*n) JPHRlDn nyauj t]TmpX\ np^Dn •*. riorum n^ao rvhion njaion nyantbn nyati frjpaifti Twhm n?sndr; wad wattin watin wantrin VJ121D «iy*ba5n wnan i-rndn DftJHaffl DP!^!Dtt>n an^aon Dn*an«n ni?ao watin jnyanvin tta&ntEin ?aip ^fctin pasift ?w«h *atth ynaEP ynD n (ssb* :) JBIjjtifj ynwn mjpi yawn etc- yan yaan (Strain) yantin wbttti etc tattntDSi wanton v&nor; aymtDn iwanen 9 ; "" ! • raca (S73nu;73) yaniDa yasa 3?aEa 204 1 *i\i. VII. Verbs wND. §§240. 241. Kal. Kal. Niphal. Hipliil. Hnphal. Praet. 3 m. 3f. bis -ftj» b^: ^s«n teari (regular) (regular) (as D Gutt.) (asD Gutt.) as d Gutt. Inf. abs. const. biffin b*5j*T± fcawi Fut. 3 m. i>5*5 na«i >:>«£ ^Offi $M£ sf. tean n^«n ^an ■*■ ««• 2 m. ^5«'n -jttNPi 5>jwj 2f. (j»5jprfn ^B«n ^a»n i £$« -flak bsf** Plur. 3 m. n!?5^ *H£^ \b*N* 3 f. naVsan ronasiFi njbSjbjB 2 m. *te*fe nfctfn ^biawg 2 f. mijbete runjban rn^an i 5?Sfifcj ^tiw ^3452 Fu<. a/>oc. -SNri imp. 2m.(^go^^ *a» &wjn ^3«n 2f. ^^j n»« 2 m.(plarO ^3tf VTQ* 2 f. naVBej mD-ien Part. act. ^Oitf ?^.-- pass. btoa few te»fl The derivative conjugations of verbs ND are declined in the same manner as those of B Guttural ; N being treated (out of Kal) as a Guttural, and not as a Quiescent; see Niphal, etc. in the Paradigm. In like manner, Piel r2N , Pual *2N , Hithp. r2Nri!"7 ; compare verbs 2 Guttural, *\J22 and pTti , for the mode of inflection. Par. VIII. Verbs orig. ID ; I. Class ■*©. §§ 243—247. 205 Kal. Kal. Niphal. Hiphil. Hophal. Praet. nth ST apia n^pin 30to 3f. (regular' I (regular) napia n3ip*in nap^n 2 m. rjnlfta wpin ropvi 2f. rbpti napkin rqpin ]. irpofa inrithn tropin Plur. 3. wpti nip^n mphn 2 m. DfiMfta cnnpin DMOin 2f. l^/oia ]napin IMp^n 1. *l33ffh3 rcaSftn *i33pin In£ abs. H\& BftT const . rop (aj^inon ashn aipta achn Fut. SEJ1 ^T)fflT! 3DY; 31031 3p1i 3f. aoij BTn 3p>n rjipiri anftn 2 m. 3p"n tfiTFI now 3"»p*|FI sain 2f. i3pri vj^n •»ao*iri • : it • ■qipto lapvi 1 a pa BTa 305» iip'i« 301** 3 m. (p'uf-J bri; ^B»Ti topjl wp^ 130^ 3£ n»to napTn siaapnjn TOO**! rwapin 2 m. in S .) ^Q (\ci) OT apnrj spin f. •OT ipT i3«hn • ; it * ■oipta m.( pi.) WW TAT : It • i3ip*in £ rt»o njtfv; nftpjii n:zbi- Part, act . aoV» onV" ypta pass. ZML1 BIT T 315*13 3pnia 206 Par. IX. Verbs ^D. II. Class. ~~'Kal. H iphil. Praet. 3 m. (»>"g-) 3D 1 * (aw) S'Wl 3 f. (regular) FO^Tl 3 (pior.) la^n Inf. abs. const. n^n Fut. 3 m.^- 1 XJ^ (a*£) X'J^ 3f. 2 m. 2f. 1 atyn 3 m. (pi) *D"J^ 3 f. mab^sn 2 m. teBf»R 2 f. hjaenn 1 DD^ F«(. apoc. nir*i ntr Imp. m. ( s ing) 2"^ imp f. ^ m. (pi«r.) , ^Dt2' ,, f. nDnb-» inaabin Part. act. ITO/P pass XiX XiTB Remarks. Niphal, in verbs of this spe- cies, does not occur. The Daghesh'd con- jugations are regular throughout; e.g. Piel SEP , Pual !lfi£ , Hithpael 5g£lin . Hophal conforms to the model in Par.VII ; e. g. nOT' , etc. Only Hiphil, therefore, distinguishes the II. class of verbs "D, from those of the I. class. Par.X. fe. III. Class. Kal. PI* (regular.) ni:r rsn nsn nansn ronsn ns3 Kal. p=e pis; ftp — •- — pSFI ps» 1p3£ ipsri P^ 1 pis' 1 Remarks. The conj. Niphal, Hiphil, and Ho- phal, are declined in the same manner as these conjugations are in verbs Pe Nun, Par. XI. E. g. Niph. nx: , Hiph. THEft , Hoph. nsH , etc. Par. XL Verbs ]D. 207 Kal. Kal. Niphal. Hiphil. Hophal. Praet. 3 m. , feg 033 033 chan oan 3£ [regular] [regular] SIOM no^an noan 2 m. npas frpari npan 2f. np33 noan npari 1 in a 5_3 nnoain vjpSn 3 m. (ply.) neaa wan loan 2 m. DF1033 bptdah DFipan 2f: prJBM ^np.yi Iffpan i ijbBd *i3pan ^3pan Inf. abs. ^B3 otoj oasn o^an consi t. Vbs no I o^an oah Fut. ft* oa* 033? o^a^ D^ 3 f. Vsn oari oasin i^an dan 2 m. Ven dari daan wm oan 2f. ^sn "ifflajn ifejaam win *oan 1 £&M aaa 0338 chaa oa« 3 m. (pUr.) *b& TtfrP loas* yew raa? 3f. ro&sn naoan wosjri njoan rwpan 2 m. j&ef] loan 1033fl wan loan 2f. riDVfn njoan fispasn njoan njoan 1 *W toy 0333 ©•»33 033 Fut. apoc. ^ Imp. m. Ve3 oa 05351 D -*.~ f. [regular] •aaion ^2020_n ■oqaon aqik 2210>* aaioa aoaoK 2C20N Mby 12210^ t : laaio 1 ; 12020^ 12020 1 ; nratnn njaaion naaaion njaqaqn naaqaon 1201:1 12210F1 122'ion 12020_n I202pn nrawn njaaion -322'icn naaqaon -320_20n 2013 22103 aaioa 20203 20203 2210 2020 ^2210 ^2020 12210 12020 "22210 naabaq 22102 2020tt 201ft 22102 20202 27 210 Par. XIII. Verbal?. §§207— 271. Kal. Kal. Niphal. If .phi! Praet. 3 m. (» in go °P, nri trtja cpn 8f. nbg nnb rrarb rrc/pn 2 m. fibj? nnb rjib'^pa rmrpn if. nog. pfc rhfiipa nta^pn i wj h ^_ T^aips viwpn. 3 (plur.) rap. inb ittipa wpn 2 m. &fl$R. BM Difiinpa Dnwpn 2i: WJB ina ■jni^ipq ■jn'wpn i ^t)p_ ttna ^itJip: isisrpn Inf. abs. const. Dip ma m» mpn Fut. 3 m. (sing.) nnp*i 3f. Dipn 2 m. tnpn 2f. ^ipn 1 ffipit 3 m. W«.) I^ip^ 3f. wwpn 2 m. wpn 2f. wfnpfl 1 a^pa nw nip 1 ; Dipt] Diprj ••tfipn Dipa oc. cp k; n»" Imp. 2 m. (sing-) D^p (n^rfttl npn 2£ nnp 2 m. (plur.; i iaip 2 f. nrqp Part. act. a P, pass. Cip nD nan ■»nipn npfjii ^ipn nation tnpa wpn Par. XIII. Verbs fo. §§267—271. Hophal. Polel. Polal. DjPin Lttip DB'lp napw naa'ip naa*ip nap-in naaip naahp rnqpin naaip RBB'lp *r»Bj?in ''Fjttb'ip ■toarnp sbrvi *lBBip toaip Dr^jpin an.^ip BBBB'lp ina^n JFlBBip ■jnBBip wa^n laabhp ttaaip Opjlfi aahp BBip ay ^^Pl BBJlp 1 ] bj&w oaipn DB*»pn npjin BEftpB DBipn rapin ^aaHpfca ''BBipPI BJ31H BB/lpa BB'lp* tojjii SBB'lp* siBB'lp'; njBjpin Fijabipn naBBipn *iBpi5i laa'ipfl IBBlpPl njBjpto wajrtptn njaaipn d^a aaips DBlp3 BBIp ■■BBlp *iamp rwarhp P. XIV. v p. 211 Kal. n:| r,:z ■©33 *33 DPI.33 *I33 DB1PB DP^lB DB1PB 112 ■pan ■pa* _J5 to 212 Par. XV. Verbs K*?. §J 276— 27!». Kal. Niphal. PieT Pratt . 3 rn. ( H '"s-) MXQ kxbj KXtJ 3 1. rifttt) h'fcx&a tlKXtJ 2 in. n&ia niis&a haxa 2f. hitaa riftx&a h*xa 1 ■tfittaj s 5naxt» VJWStj 3 (P>ur-J r it 1«XS3 n*sn 2 ni. prffRBRa $n$X&3 Bnaxa 2f. !pi«sa •pnfcxas fnaxa 1 tti&& ti&tu ttKXfi Inf. abs. ansa »xa const. K2££ «x;a?j KXE Fiit. 3 m. ( ain ?o «&*£ rxb; KSB 1 ] 3£ k'iaFi R2BR Ksan 2 m. ftS&Pj Msari axon 2f. ■»*iwn • ; n • ■wxan 1 »2£« KXQtt »xaa 3 m Cplur.) ^^*! J IT ■ ^--' 3f. wfciwi tt3«2BF) nsaxan 2 m. ttitjn ? IT • ^stsn 2£ hb«2:ari raksan naa&ari 1 8ti&3 N2B3 KXEj Fut. apoc. Imp. 2 m. (sing.) «sa Ksan ttXQ 2f. ■wxta • : it • ■»aX£ 2 m. tph»0 ixse ttMMKl laXtl 2f. ii^sa ftj&xa Part. act. ^jiB k?b? pass* RTS53 «Xfi3 Par. XV. Verbs N 2 ?. §§ 276—279. 213 Pual. Hiphil. Hophal. Hithpael. (*»») «aca tttctin (bwoi) »oan fcsaann «■ n»sa •nfian •*• rajxan ratsann naxa rjw&tTi haian nitsaiin nasa nMsan rattan nnsann Tl&XB viktori ^nasan ^jnakann *I»2STI ^arifcan iBEsan laatann Dnaia anasan anetan ksnaaann T™¥5 ]n«tgDn jnietan jraaann ^ka ^actea *»iari ^»sanri tctan K5B arcttm Msean Msann (n^) «xa^ »w» (ksb*) as-; asan? ^. KSOFJ tfian etc. j^^r* Nsann «spri arsan Msan Ksara ^ttOTl w&an ■Sctapi raann M2&R tfia* ifctBM itsanii ^kxjt; wisa* ftaaj* ^atan 1 ; njasan njKian naSian naakanri i&opn wTkan *iaxan toxanpi hjaian Mja&ftrt naaiari nbaiann KS&a N^iab atsaa Nsana n£*?2 wxan Rsann wian ■wxarin in'Stan **atann naiian rtjasarin Hixaa Ksana (Jw^a) KXBa («»aa) fefc aa 214 Par. XVI. Verbs ffe. §§280-292. Kal. Niplial. Piel. I'l.al. Praet. 3 m. (n'ra) nb3 rfo: nVa nVa 3f. nnVa nn^D nnVa rwfea 2 m. ry^a (n v ? 2 f. n*»Va ctc - nrrro etc. rrtjj ry»Va rvVa i Tp5a irtffta vn?a la^a 3 (pi-)(r^ T )^a 2 m. on^a Drrt»J3 DivVa Drrta 2 f. ]n^a i w5a w5m jryVa Inf. abs. n^S nb] riVa riV* const. rh 1 ?!! rftari n*iVa riVa Fut. 3 m. ftW r&a* 1 rfep nhy* 3 f. rfran r&an nV>»] nVan 2 m. rtean 2 f. ^an Aan nVan ■■Van •'Van 3in.(pi»'0 *??yi — — - v» 3 f. w*?an rra^Suh rn^fan w?an 2 m. ^n *A:.n iVan fyjri 2 f. w^an n^fari na^an nVaa F«t. OjOOC. is£ . ba: tf»3 ^1 Imp. 2 m. <««*•) tlVd 2 1 Aa 2 m. fpi*«o Aa 2 f. W»$S Aan Aan njfan Cba) rtVa ■•ft ^a_ Part. act. n^i5 pass. ^,?3 fl^B n^AB nVaa Par. XVI. Verbs jflfr. 280—292. 215 Hiphil. Hophal. Hilhpacl. llitlipalel. r£an pfcan rfs>anfl mnrrcn hnVari rirtan nnVanri itfim) iy»5»rt m?an rvVansi rrnnwaSn •*• rriwi rrtan rrtann w5ari Ti^an ifci'fl&nn VPinndn «&#! «6an iVann ninntbn bn^an on^an DrhVann an^nr-cn jn^an ■jn^arj ]n;bnn safari w5an ^r'fann nb5n rt>an riVanrj rfran rfran riVann hinrdn nb" 1 nba^ rteam mnnffl 1 ' rftan rftan nVann r.inrbn rfcn r&an rfonfl mnncin ■•ban ^an ^ann nbaa n^a« inban* mnntDH ^ «a< i.Van} mnnirh m^an na^'an na^anfi 6an ^an ib?nn iwphdpi nD^an na^an na^ann n^a n ^? nVana ninrnsa tft tan* - . ■ &&) rf?.VI rftann ^in ■fyarin ■nitron i^in Hariri •nnn-^n na^aq sia^ann n^ja rftarra mnnorj rftao 210 Far. XVII. fo6-fft. Kal. Hiphil. Praet PIT min 3 i: nnT T • IT nmin 2 m. nn 1 nnin 2 1: rT'T rvrfifi i M^T wiin 3 (pi'"--) IT iTn 2 m. DrT'T tofpTfa 2f. Wll "jrvnin 1 • T irnin Inf. abs. JIT const. PIT Fut. 3£ 2 m. 2£ 1 3 (p'ur-; 3f. 2ra. 2f. 1 nrn it? iTn rrr»a /«*. apoc. Imp. 2£ 2 m. (plur-) 2f. TJ IT rmn rrrtn rnim nin rn*i* rff nrn/in T1TPI na'nw mia Pat. XVIII . Verbs ] z & fa. Kal. NiphaJ. II, -,,1 WD] bttsa ' srz- rwfca • • It i N w. i X Bm (as Nr) naifia nwy : cn natma nagrj ■tmmm viaiBn WGj wwi Bnaisa ufx:" in*®? jriMOti "ox'c: "N'cn kVtds Mtesn won OfitfB »©"« »to!P irv 11 Nun ▼ • (as &) not •»jwpn 1T1 Part, act filY! pass. ^IT 1 rntfi ■nin 1TH nan/in mia KfflK wfal nfiT'TD^ riDwXOT *Swin WTOf n:wVDn Ntea ris 4tiD UtiD nattti rigs aftpa * From nu;: (not Ktoa). ' Par. XIX. IS & hi. Kal. Iliphil. Praet. HDD nan 3f. nna: nnan 2 m. (as hb) nvjn 2£ n^rj 1 wan 3 (Plur.) ran 2 m. an/ran 2f. jrpian 1 iran Inf. abs. Him const. n'K22 Fut. apoc. 0"« man Fut. na 1 ' na^ 3f. nan nan 2 m. nan nan 2£ hen i&& 1 na« naa 3 (Plur.j 1t0"» ia^ 3f. ns^an nybn 2ra. nan nan 2f. nran nran 1 naD na: Imp. naq (on) nan 2 f. (as h) ^an 2 m. (pte.) ^t^n 2 f. nran Part. act. nai3 naa pass. ^as 28 Par. XX. Verb *03. 217 Kal. Hiphil. ilophal. **2 x^n amn naa n«a naa nit*an rain naan nnaan viaa Twcn (uta) i«a won IwXZin onaa finnan UV3 ttfran M13 (N2)wNlS a^an K^ ^J nw «izn K^an Khan rwi \vizn wVlZtf a^aa Wo; naaan *iaan T njwan wan ahaa tfM N3»1 tfiz tfan ■wia wan 1^12 wan Ma irqa T 218 Par. XXI. Participles. §301. Mane. Kal. Fem. Faiti. Bogb. Verbs final Pattahh act. ^P Ctivqjp) nbqj? n ^.^P pass. bvjp T n^bp # — Tseri act. ]W Wtb'' 1^ — H hoi err l act. mi'' P gutt. act. pH npj?t ngii b gutt. act. ^Bti ?W«i n?s'u" act. OR rttijj nV act. fftS Qi«Yft) nij! pass . <&i pp*fta regular liphil. nVopD rfcbpa n D gutt. 15373 man man ns: n^D3 n Dhp3 nxDipD regular Piel. ri$88S a -is Tja roiaa ro-ma V V ▼ z rb nViq a^ai POEL Of h nniD£ maiott narrtWQ regular Pual. baps rtepa rtbpn regular D gutt. 13? Hiphil. ^ttfjB nb v Jp^ nog haoti rnsya regular Hophal. regular Hithpael. Vtppnti ^Bpntt rifcfcra Par. XXI. Participles. § 301. 219 Plur. masc. Kal. Plur. Fern. Masc. Fem. trtqp niVjp Dec. VII. b. Dec. X. XIII. a^rjp nibrop III. c. X. tnaj* hham 1 ; V. e. XI. XIII. trni 1 ; ni-iip III. c. X. tpfgi nip^T VII. X. XIII. d^m nitfaiD VII. X. XIII. a ^B ntej? I. X. (ti>i nfta IX. a. X. D^ba rfinVa III. c. X. D^>qj>a Niphal. n^tjp.3 11. XI. XIII. D*Tft« rh^jy. II. XI. XIII. D^aoi ntaDa VIII. X. trftipi ni^ipD III. c. X. Piel. D^BpjD n^apa VII. c. X. XIII. D^IM nha-ind VII. X. XIII. B^Sj n'ftaB IX. X. cqaiori ninntoB VII. b. X. XIII. Pual. SrtBgfc ni^pa II. XI. XIII. O^BpB iiiphii. I. X. XIII. O^TEJB nvrojps I. X. XIII- B^awa ntaoa VIII. X. mpjjb nha^pa III. X. D^ttpB Hophal. Pl^tDptS II. XI. XIII. a^apna ni^Bpnfc Hitlipael. VII. c. X. XIII 220 Par. XXII. Verbs with suffix-pronouns. §§303—312. Snlliv -. Stag. I. 9 DUC. •j fern. 3 mane. Kal. ) Pract.} ^S"d? I : n i : iPtSP 3 r. m. 2 f. ^nV;j_p *3&5>ttp ■oriVjp ari5op im^DP 3 Cplor.) WDp 2 m. "•ttpfcop 1 — inV'up 1 innrop, WiVtapf in'rjp 1 wnVopJ sj*VbR T^Jffi wftBfj rjV^-jp ipbtsp w5tfp x — — ^irnnr-R spj?jp. "^Vop wlftop. R» nnV fc ap nnVup rprtop rrrrop rriVop rprfcoj; Ti'TJP 1 Inf. Onnn) ^0R Fut. ^J&p.l 3m. with) hi^nn^i epenth. 3 $ i'. .)'. . 3 (p'O ^"JP 1 tf}py* *$pjjfc ^Pp!i Vop^ tfi5>Bpi ^niVjp^ n>Dp'' naSop 1 ; ( % »VBR3 OinAqp;;) Imp. ^'f'jp wbtd — — w5t38 nrjp TV ; 1 t Piel ^?Bp sfrffi frqp i^-jp -rjp Hiph. fut.^D^qp^ ^Dp; ^tap.! "^.r^F.! f^BR Par. XXII. Verbs with suffix-pronouns. §§303—312. 221 Plur. I. 2 masc. 2 fern. 3 masc. 3 fern. "urjp PSpvp. P-.^P. nrjp # ipt:p> .^«i n:rv?ap DDroBp pr.rjp Enrjp "jnrjp w£a? — Wft>Bp. iDnrjpS — oyntef; i^nrjp W^Bp D51$Bp p^BP — ffiM&DP wAbp nrrjp cnrjp npnrjp n-Trjp n^nrjp WW ■prirjp ■pnrjp iijrjp (town) Brfrtjp. WDg C ^.P T ] *?P- (Banat) :^-JP I^Bp* 1 BAttp*» tAw Batty; j ftBp* ifiVop") t&btfy* 1,?*«jp; cirop 1 ] t^BR — — D :PJ5 — 13PDp 1 /)ers. Fut Br&JBJj $»R a^cqp i'r-p. W^Bp^ Dp.^Pp! P.^BpJ B^Bp^ iV^f- 222 Par. XXIIT. Verbs T\b with suffixes. § 313. BuflxM. Hng.l. 2 maic. 3 mate. 1*1 n r . 3 maic. Kal. Praet. ■tfB* *!' ^inipy C27 3 f. wrv-to) ^nti* in 1 -'©* ) — ' -r T 2 m. ^rMD*) TOT-to) civw 1 — ^rv-toj nnwtosp ) wpto 3 (p 1u '-) wSj* rp's? im&| mis? Inf. iniOJ jjntt* into* -into* nn'E? Fut. 3 m. ^S^ 3 m. with ) IJ-fWy-) epenth. a ) • -.•-;- 3m.(p'«o '•3-foy'- Imp. m. ^33? Piel. Praet. 3 m. '■SVS Fut. 3 m. ta^Sg 3 m. with ) ^t^i, epenth. 3 S ■ •'• -• ^37 •urns ■aw Hiph. Praet. Fut. with ) epenth. 5 > ■■330 Slfc -insn dtojn C3P T • D3n Par. XXIV. Nouns with suffixes. § 334—340. 223 Abs. ("« n 6 No. L Noun masc. •) DID a horse. ending with a consonant. (piur.) 0^010 horses. Sufi: i ''CIO m?/ /tor^e, 11 010 my horses. 2 m. 2f. 3 m. ■36*10 % — 1010 his — rppio % — ^010 thy — VD"0 his — 3f. MOID /ier — •"PCID /ier — 1 (plur.) 1301 o?scq. Btiif • ahs. Const. Light Suir lir.ivp Huff. Dec, , I. Singular. § 843. GO Pl8 DID ^CID S3C1D (*) W6ii -1135 niaa triiia GO tj«iBti BiSffii ^Dirq DitsiBiD (rf) irfcaj niVa Tjfta Mnftii Dec, , II. Singular. §347. GO DS &1 nw (once) CpBS (*) Mis 3D1S ^D13 D?njiB (0 ynis ynis ^3i3 u2>;3i3 (rf) "rtl Ttf *"$ &?# Dec. III. Singular . § 350. GO i'^ ■hs ■»fj?B D ?TW (*) r^ "T^ ir»^ fiiartn (•) 5?rop T ^dj> ^°fe MVtoj; (<0 ■jl-lST V 1 "^.! WDt D^rtiai (0 ■jr-jn &ta5») I'^tn tfy»m cp.^Tn (/) dub o*i«a trt» KrtMats Of) wsq &VD» ^s* fipDina (h) 9n "^ Dec. IV. Singular. § 353. GO ■oN W "T?! oygi (*) *$ M •cdV dsmV (•) ton wn niaq MR3J (rf) nyto ")?to ^nsip &?")$? (•) P?? pay ••pas £-?"_?. (/) US t|33 ^33 &?fi33 Or) tfZS Par. XXV. Nouns Masculine. §§ 345 seq. 225 Plural aba. Light null". Const. Grave »utl'. Dec ;. I. Plural. nntno WD •»DiD B^&to D*niaa •nhaa ■nhaa 23:1133 tPEnBtD WBO ■»tt*ifao oyenra a^riVx ■»pf^ ■»*£>« Da^rft* Dec . II. Plural c^- ■OT w Dyw D^aaia ^33/13 ^3313 pyaaia 0^313 ■wato wa D37313 a*no •Wo no oyirti Dec . III. Plurai PTffi Vpffc n^B D yrrt DwVti >x*fyq 1£^E a^r^ti D^Vdj? ^VOj? ^p" D3;bVJp # nwat ■tfnai wat Dyjrnaj ^niainujh) nij'TTn (as i Dec. X.) tMKbB W3B W3B oyoiati DW3&* -: ^2S wa* 03;0/13K Dec ■. IV. Plural. 0^15^ ■nyi ■na'n D3n3'l D"»aa$ *i23*i *sS oyaaij n^3n naaft iriari oytiari wyfa ■»13j0 t-ipc ar-^'p Dfl^ igw Da"»poj D"»B33 ■*J? ■»ws aywa riiaax n%X3S (oniwaat) 29 226 Par. XXV. Nouns Masculine. §§ :V>6 seq. Hing. (lbs. < 'llllHl . Light iufr. Grave nufT. (A) )W (]u5y) Jti* (0 ^?. tefy sp%jk ^2 Dec. V. Singular. § 356. («) IS.! n "■3JJT D53fcl (*) Tsft ■nxft D ?T?H (0 wg tifi§ w opens (d) 1?9 {•tfito ins T$| DDinD Dec . VI. Singular. 4 class. § 359. («) (iv » ii% i?b "B^ft o*j!jg (6) etc ■ T?3 tfi h 1?.3 C?">?3 (0 2!J. to!) *!$ £ class i. wni GO -1DD 1BD •nig tansD (0 "*& na| ■nag Drag (/) pVh j£n ^MJ tfcf&sj (g) 1& tWj wjfej D ?WJ (h) ns5 class ■TOH Ddiixj (»•) TgS "$» ■npa ■ f • -r D^p-2 0) Y*P y»>' ■CB&P KpS23p «o ^iD V?s O^s) ^ajp Data (0 onjp »$ VR D21231P v ; ;'t Par. XXV. Nouns Masculine. §§ 356 seq. 227 Plur. abs. Light fluff. Count. Grave lufT. &*jMBf "J-JB^ *3W fia^B? bvSx *j&3 *2P&> cr-pVs Dec. V. Plural. Mft •♦apt it* B3-»3pt a-nxrj ■nsn nsn aa-nxn niDris (as Dec. XI.) fl-HM ^l?. 3 . *P& Ba-naa Dec. VI. Plural. A class. B^B ■Ob-fl ^B BMfc-q D"»1M ■»V3 •n?: aa* 1 "^ avnt £ class. TO! D r.7.1I B-nDB vjw> •nBB aa-nra anag •nap ■nap aa-najj n^p>Vn ^n fnR*) ca^n c-nbn i tc - ^l^n. ■nVn as^bn B-*nx3 t j •TOD O class. ■»rpu aa^rcu a-njtt "TW ■npa B^lpS B'ttBJJ ■•wp. ■»XBJ} aa-^xap B^B ty* •^JSWD Ba^3?S a^unp • f'ri 41 "DIP aa^tti-Tg 228 Par. XXV. Nouns Masculine. §§371 scq. Segholatcs of roots 13> and "*9. (£* Nlffl ^JSj KfcBgD (<*) riattj natti w?n oanatB (0 5>l!fi fcpi "ty* oa^a (/) TOBia ronsg — — Or) V? T? 15* Dec. VIII. Singular . §374. («) n T (»:) tr ■»b; =-r" (A) *§ R» 'BR DajSM (0 to t& TO ttrw (<*) ab (-n ? ) ab ^ (0 pn C-W>pn ^n (/) fa (-?*) fj> ft*) TO na?? Or) ^52 (ft) Iffi ■»3M3 • ■ T oaaitj (0 "■n 13 (i) nto ■Nfl i-iiB Da-fo (*) nb nfe "* Dec IX. Singular. §377. («) riTpj n»r» nn u2"m (») ■ » - -T'u — — — •■ ■ Par. XXV. Nouns Masculine. §§ 371 scq. 229 Seglwlates of Tib continued. Inf. Segholatcs. («) ^h ( v rn), const. *h, suff. Vrn (x) tnv , const, Bin , suff. ^:* 0>) v 1 2 . > plnr. B"»tj3| [pLff^brt (y) ess — spip — S«wJ (w) *nx , — fi^^ (^) ->N2 — ^N2 , pi. n^.\2 (yy) 5pp. , i':Up r . (zz) &VB , ^J3» Dec. VII. Plural. Plural abs. Light bu(T. Const. Grave guff". nia? •^ni^u rhaq nyiViB© B^K W« "¥!** Dyyhij B^tejpa ^W ^'A?- 12 . tD^agD tfinarn irvinara ninaTB Dyn/inattj ntepjq (as Dec. XIII.) aww d*>£? h *?. ■*? Kf»» Dec. VIII. Plural. CB! ^ ■*c By*E d^bk •»B* *D» &??* D*«pa ■HjQ •TO d^to rrta^ into*? neb DyrnaS> n^n v_n *n arj>n t^Vm ■•tei ^oa d^b-j D^Jtt ■»3tti — * T ^b np^iti D^n ^n •\*n £ -:' n - nn'ui •ntg ntn d?;nto ovfc Dec. IX. Plural. nn'n nn •Ci Dyjn d*itb vfts •"b c-:7P 230 Par. XXVI. Nouns Feminine. §§ 3fi0— .392. Sing. al>H. OOUti I.l^lll nufT. Crave nuff. Dec. X. Singular. § 380. («) rnin rnin Ti-nn CDnii n (A) hVifia riwia TiVina carina Dec. XI. Singular. §383. (a) njtf n3ffl wis Danatt (t>) 51 1'4 naja ■»nao cpnari («) r\jfl% nps ■^nx Daqpx (rf) oaari naan to canaan (0 rhw rfeg *ftw Dprta* (/) nabaa na?aa voVaa (as Dec. XIII.) Or) nnstoa nnEiDt; TinEiba (as Dec. XIII.) Dec. XII. Singular. §387. («) nsij? naVa "na^a MP.?!?! (A) r&ato nVato VjiaiD bannab («) wirj r»©nn TjE-in aanenn (d) nsnn nann "nann aana-in (•) "!?. 3 _ ^1^3 ^■va Darnn Dec. XIII. Singular . §390. («) rnSpa o"iSoa *rnaoa aarnaoa (A) maa nnaa •»n-iaa spnaa (•) nsft nirjx •WDM c ^ton) ^rjo» 00 nana nana inana r|n:np M nana nana ■tttbna qmrira (/) n ?? n ?? TO^* sjnaii to nao rolp •»natD sjnao Pa r. XXVI. No u ns Feminin e. §§38 0—392. 231 Buff, plut. Const. Suffix sing. Dec. X. Plural. ninin rn-nn "rn-nn nrrn-hn nibina ni^na ■n'ftvia wn*6ina Dec. XI. Plural. ni3123 rftwi ••nhatD trr;rq rnatp rhara nVlMD trria© rrtpns nipns inipTS byrrtpix ntaDn niasn •^niEsn wntaan rn^y nto* vnirt? nmni^? Dec. XII. Plural. rnsbft rtote *rtch$ eynteMj nii?M pftfilD iJl&sto DShrifctfn niDin Tie-in cmrns-in nhmn nimn • T Tiimn rh"va nViya **vn?3 DOTIiTA Dec. XIII. Plural. : : • rrna&jq toVwa ayninatfe mans mana ■mans cmmanD 232 Par. XXVII. NoiltM Dual. § S93. Bing. nlm. Duul at* • 'on. i. Hing. aim. Dual alia. Const i. irvi • — r; t uv n^bv 1* n ?l7. •• •■ n'isn btoiish ii. VII. V D ft rj D?3Wta 'WKB D^np^t). VIII. in. 51? d^a ^£3 ~ T DWtD IV. 39 X. '9B m 0^33 ■■sin ttB* XL V. rate DTtSta TSID VI. ■op? XII. IJM® A •$ E^.l 1^1 Pt3T tPnST ^1- E Ti! D?zna w h&p/i Q^p.i O ' V V oranE ijnfi XIII. tei D^3>3 •£ya nana D^tona Par. XXVIII. Numerals, etc. §§.395—398. 233 (A) Cardinals etc. from I to 10. No. Signs. Masc. abs. Const. Fern. ul>s. Const. Ordinals. 1 X (iw) in» m« rna nn» 2 3 tr;q •oq trnm iffe *m 3 3 npVttj ntp?m aba aftm tj^o 4 1 '?9 • • -: (B) Cardinals from 11 to 15. if Masculine. 11 tf -fey inBJp 12 ■fey d.^ti ■fe* lain 13 ^ V -fey rrafrffl 14 15 T IB ■fey nya-M* ■fey raan 16 V ■fey naa 17 P ■fey nyso 18 II rr ■fey natoo 19 •fey Hytrin Feminine. n*$jy nryt nnto B^nti trio* T.ti Hntoy albffl H-itoy yap* rrfey ©tin rrfey eo rrjto yavj rrfey natotD nito? ran 30 234 Par. XXVFII. Numerals. SS395-^398. (C) Cardinals from -Ml to 90. 20 D Z^Xl'J 60 tPtBTD 30 ^ D^ttJbffl 70 7 E™d 40 52 fi^3"i« 80 b d^aatD 50 3 c^nn 90 x awn (D) Hundreds. ioo p rw? 200 n tnnafc 300 to nto oVo 400 n nWn ?2p8 500 pn (*■{) into »5jn 6oo nn (c) ntefc dd 700 Or ( ") rTlMB JP3ID boo rin (cj)rviaB n:nd ooo prin (y) niafc yon (E) Thousands. 1,000 & 2,000 n 3,000 5 4,000 i' 5,000 fi 6,000 i' 7.000 V t\hh 10,000 nan"), ten,*nsn 20,000 nn2"i into 30,000 nia-j dbd 40,000 aisn ww ,120,000 Ssn rnto dw or 12 times 10,000 600,000 fcfei dine do CORRECTIONS AXD ADDITIONS (a) p. 11. Table of (he vowels No. IV., by mistake, 'Qibbatfl medial'' is printed in the third class of vowels, instead of ' (^ilihuts long? In § 33. and § 35, the student will see that Qjbbuts is treated agreeably to this corrected view. The proper division of Qjbbut- ifl into, (l) Qibbuts vicarious ; § 41. (2) Daghesh'd long Qibbuts; § 33. (3) Short Qibbuts; § 31. (6) p. 24. § 49. The statement respecting the use of the compo- site Shevas is not strictly correct and intelligible. It is true that when Gutturals end a mixed syllable, and therefore take a Sheva, that She- va must be a simple one ; as is stated in § 50. But in such cases a9 i>"in* , this form may be exchanged for b~^. ; so "tttl* > s equivalent to "liltv ; and in such cases, the Guttural may be said to come in the room of a silent Sheva simple, for such the analogical pointing would be. The most that can be said then, is, (l) That the Gutturals, much more frequently than any other letters, take a composite Sheva, instead of admitting a simple one either vocal or silent. I 2) That whenever they, or any other letters do so, they are placed of course at the be- ginning of a syllable, § 50. (c) p. 34. § 80. Instead of after a simple syllable, 1 read, ' after a vowel'. (d) p. 50. § 101. e. After e. add,' {/) Pause accents frequently oc- casion the tone to be shifted; see § 100. Z. 1 The repetition here of this principle, is needed only for the completeness of the view. (e) p. 52. § 108. b. At the close, a reference should be added to § 118., where is a fuller developement of the rationale of the princi- ple stated in § 108. (/) P- 5 5- § 118. After the word ntiant, add, in another sentence, ' in also is subject to the same peculiarity, when it stands for the article, § 1G2, or is employed as a prolix characteristic of CODJagB* tion, etc. § 174.' Then, after etc. under E. g., Bubjoin, * In respect to M, rf$%\ for "fb?? inr , D?3 for Dy-3 , b^qpb for b^DjSrji Hipb. Inf., Vtgj^. for tuprr Put. Niphal, etc.V 199. comp. K>8. 6, also §§ 1 19 — 121.' ' INDEX. PART I. ORTHOGIIAI'HV AND ORTHOKPV. ALPHABETS Ancient number of letters Arrangement of letters Age ot their names Significance of the same Pronunciation of the same Later Hebrew alphabet Final forms of letters Sounds of letters Dilated letters . . Unusual letters Similar letters . . Classification of the letters Aspirates, tumescents, Gutturals, Liquids VOWELS .... Not original Vowel-letters Ground of classification Quality and quantity of Vowels Pure and impure vowels Long, short, and medial Long by nature, and by position Pure long vowels Protracted impure vowels Doubtful appearances of them Daghesh'd impure long vowels Vowels long by position Proper short vowels Medial vowels Kind of syllables in which the VI els may stand Qibhuts vicarious SHEVA .... Design of it ... Whon employed . Shcva vocal Sheva silent Composite Shevos When employed Used out of the common course General principle in regard l" BheVU Not employed under Ouicscents COALESCENCE OF VOWELS ANDQI'I ESCENTS Table exhibiting i bra Bound of coalescing QoieaoeBts not lost The Bhevi, when they retain a consonant power Otium of the Bhevi .... COALESCENCEof vowels and Dagh. letters 57 Vowels affected by omitted Gutturals and Resh ..... .27 Vowel affected by tho omission of oilier Dag- hesh'd letters 28 ORTHOGRAPHY OF THE VOWELS . 28 Proper place of i he Vowels . . .28 Diacritical point over Shin and Sin . . 29 Vav with Hholem over it . . .29 Orthography of the vowels as connected with tin- Uuieso.ents 29 Words written ;;/cn< and (/V/cctire . 29 No certain rule for them . ... 30 ORTHOGB iPYOFOAMBTS BHATEPB 30 In a mixed syllable .... 30 In i simple syllable 31 PATTAHH FURTIVE .... 31 DAGHESH 32 Daghesh forte 32 Orthograpin of it 39 Omission ot it . . . . ■ 39 Division of Daghesh forte . . . .33 Euphonic Daghesh and its kinds . . ;t3 DAGBESB LENE ..... 33 General rule for the insertion of it . . 34 Ear the r ej e ction of it . . 34 Exceptions to the rules . . . . 35 Peculiar exceptions to the same . . . :0 RAPIIK 36 MAIM'IU 88 METBEGB 37 Distinguished from Sillmi . . . .37 Cases in which it ia either uniformly or usu- ally employed . . ... 37 Casee in which uaafo is varioni . Ifethegh before ttaqqeph . • • • :|s Ute "I -im ml Metbegna on the same ■rare' I sc ofConjunctivea instead ef Uethafh MAOaEPH 39 Effects of it on the vowel and t ■ 89 End answered by it ... . i;i i.r.s i hi: READING HEBREW . 40 Exemplification 41 \< IT. NTS. till. I "tliem . . . 19 \ .i s alleged uses of than . .44 Proper place of writing them . . .46 TONE-SYLLABLE . M General rale for il ; and sxeeptiaas "■ Shifting ofthe tone ivllable . . 19 Critical murks, and Maaoretic notes • • M 238 INDKX. PART M. I II \M.l - AM' I'F.( UI.IAIU HIS (.1 < DNSONANTS AND VOWI.I.-. Letters of t lie same organ easily commuted Assimilation of Consonant! Consonants rust away or dropped < 'nnsonants added .... Transposition of Consonants PECI LIABITIE8 OF THE GUTTUR AI.S AND RUSH Daghesh forte omitted in them, and com|>cn satiou for it Gutturals prono to the A sound Commonly take a composite Sheva PECULIARITIES OF QUIESCENTS General principles regulating it . Other ways in which quiescence is effected, besides those involved in the general prin- ciple Peculiar usago of Aleph, Vav, Yodh, when they would have a vowel, and be preced- ed by a Sheva Peculiarites of Aleph , Peculiarities of Vav and Yodh . . " . Peculiarities of He Commutation of the Quiescents foreach other Quiescents used as PARAGOGIC letters CHANGES OF THE VOWELS Vowels mutable and immutable Composite Shevas commuted Proper mutable vowels .... Changes of vowels limited to their respec- tive classes ...... Corresponding long and short vowels lluli:s of exchanging long vowels for -hurt When abort vowels beeome long . . 60 I'm-. ,n T< -hi. Iiii-i Ii.ii short vowels 'J Falling away of Vowels . . . .01 when the tone is moved forward one syllable i I moved forward (WO syllables . . 61 Changes in rowels by reason of const, stall I I by reason of accession at the end . 62 Rise of new vowels . . . . .62 Uli.it i Insc usually are ... .63 What they aro before composite Shevas . 63 New vowels when two Shevas come togeth- er, of which the first is composite . 63 Rise of furtive vowels . . . . 63 Euphonic changes of the vowels . . 64 Vowels changed by Accents . . .65 Accents sometimes lengthen short vowels . 65 They shorten long ones . . . . 65 They restore vowels that had been dropr» They turn simple Sheva into Seghol . . 66 composite Sheva into the correspond- ing long vowel 66 Effect of pause accents not uniform . . 66 Vowels changed by accession and transpo- sition . 66 Vowels changed by the position of certain letters and words . . . . .66 Changes in the vowel-points of the article . 66 of the particles . . . .67 of the conjunc. Vav . . .67 of the interrog. 5. . . . .67 PART III. GRAMMATICAL STRUCTURE OF WORDS. Radical words .... Conformity to their principles Hilneral roots .... Q.uadriliteral and Quinqueliteral roots Parts of speech .... Grammatical structure of words Various ways of expressing case, number gender, person, etc. Composite words Mode of writing particles and oblique nouns ARTICLE . Assimilation of it PRONOUNS Pronouns personal (Nom.) Oblique cases of them Pronouns demonstrative relative interrogative VERBS Classification Inflection Conjugation Usual conjugations Peculiar conjugations TO Unusual conjugations . . . .73 Conjugations of pluri literal verbs . . 74 All conjugations do not belong to any one verb . 74 Names of the conjugations . . .74 Root of verbs 74 Forms of the root 74 Niphal and its significations . . 75 Piel 75 Pual, Hiphil, Hophal, Hilhpael . . . 76 Transposition of the letters prefixed to 1 1 it li- pael ..... .76 Significations of this conjugation . . 77 Unusual conjugations . . . .77 Mood, tense, number, person and gender of verbs 77 Ground-forms of verbs . . . .77 Formation of the Praeterite tense . . 78 Inf. const, and absolute . . . .78 Formation of the Fut. tense . . .78 The praeformative letters of the Fut. tense, expel the praeformatives of the derived conjugations 79 Final vowels of the Future . . .79 Imper. mood 80 Participles of transitive verbs . . .80 of intransitive verbs . . .80 Subj. and Opt. moods . . • .80 INDEX. 239 Paragogic and apoc. Futures . . .81 1 in [.<-r. parag. and npoc. . . . .8] Future with Vav conversive . . . 83 Praeter with Vnv ..... 82 General remarks on paradigms of verbs . 83 Paragogic letter* suffixed to verbs . . S3 Verbs with Uuiescents defectively written 83 REGULAR TRANSITIVE VERBS; notes and explanations 83 REGULAR VERBS INTRANSITIVE; notes 86 VERBS WITH GUTTURALS . -. Verbs Pe Guttural ; characteristics etc. . HT Notes on Paradigm 38 Verbs Ayin Guttural ; characteristics etc. . 89 Notes on the Paradigm . . . .89 Verbs Lamedh Guttural; characteristic, etc 90 IRREGULAR VERBS; definition . . 90 First Class ,■ HE ALEPH, characteristics . 91 Notes on the Paradigm . . . .91 PE VODH ; characteristics ... 91 First Class of verbs Pe Yodb ; characteris- tics 92 Notes on the Paradigm . . . .92 Second Class of verbs Pe Vodh; characteris- tics 93 Notes on the Paradigm . . . .93 Third Class of verbs Pe Yodh ; characteris- tics . 94 VERBS PE NUN, characteristics . . 94 Notes on the Paradigm . . . .95 Second Class 95 VERBS AYIN DOUBLED; characteristics etc . 96 Notes on the Paradigm . . . .98 Peculiar anomaly of these verbs . . 99 VERBS AYIN VAV; characteristics, etc. 100 Notes on the Paradigm .... 101 VERBS AYIN YODH . . . .103 Third Class 104 VERBS LAMEDH ALEPH ; characteris- tics, etc. 104 Notes on the Paradigm .... 105 Interchange of forms between these Verbs, and Verbs Lamedh Ho. . . . 105 VERBS LAMEDH HE; characteristics, etc 106 Notes on the Paradigm .... 107 Apocopate Future ofKal .... 107 oflliphil . . .109 Peculiar Anomalies 109 Imitations of Verbs Lamedh Aleph . . 109 General Remarks on these .... 109 VERBS LAMEDH TAV . .110 VERBS DOUBLY \ NOMA LOUS Relation of irreg. verb* to each other I'lurilitenil Verba 110 HI 119 PARTICIPLES 112 \ ERRS with SI ill K-PRONl II KB . 113 Table of the Forms ol such suffixes . . 114 Notes on the Table of them . . . 114 Nol i the Par. of them aa attached to the vi'rli . . . . . . .116 Verbs Lamedh He with suffixes . . . 117 V ii \s : derivation ami declension . . 117 Nouns primitive, derivative, and denomina- tive 118 < Sompoeite and propel . . . .119 Gender of Noons 119 of the plural 190 Formation of Fom. nouns, with Table, . 190 Formation of the plural, masr. and fern. . ISO Heteroclites 198 Formation and uso of the Dual . . lit DECLENSION OF Nol \S ; const, state . 124 Su Hi v -State 195 Table of suffix pronouns .... 198 Bales for suffixes 187 Vowel^cbanges in nouns on account of de- clension 127 Laws of such Vowel-change*. . . . 128 Suffixes attached to the plural . . . 129 JVowu masc. Dec. I. II 198 Dec. Ill i:H» Dec. IV. V 1 :< I Dec. VI 132 Notes on the A. E. O class . . 133 Segholates of verbs Ayin Vav, etc. 134 Segholates of Verbs Lamed li He 134 Infinitive Segholates . . 194 Anomalous Plurals of Segholates 135 Dec. Vll |35 Dec. VIII i;(6 Dec IX. 1H7 JVoimu /em. Dee. X Kt7 Dec. \l. Ml 198 Dec. XIII 189 Dual Number of nouns .... 139 Hoteruclites or anomalous nouns . . 139 NUMBERS; cardinal and ordinal . .140 Notes on the Paradigm .... 141 Met hod of notation 141 ADJECTIVES 141 PARTICLES ..:... 142 Adverbs 142 Prepositions 143 Table oft hem with pronouns, etc. . . Ill Conjunctions and Interject ions . . . 145 PART IV. ARTICLE Insertion of it Omission Article before Adjectives NOUNS ; case absolute Cases relative ; Nom. Gen. 1 16 i 16 1 1; 1 i; 1 1- 149 Gen, expressed by a relative pronoun . 150 stands « here apposition would natu- rally stand 150 sometimes follows adj , 150 various meanings of il . . 151 I ... . i.'l Vurious uses of tho Accusative 5540 INDBX. Aooni. pal after Participial and Verbal! . 189 \ 01 md iVL on km ..... i.vj CoDStrUCl Slam I...' Porn "in not confined to position before a Qenitive 198 Refers solely to the relation of two nouns to each oilier 193 Apposition ...... i.m Gender and Number of nouns . . . 169 Pluratia Excellentioe 155 Use of tin' plural in poetry .... 195 Repetition of nouns 196 with tin; copula .... 156 Nouns employed us adjectives . . . l. r >7 Whon employed as adjectives . . . 157 Circumlocutory phrases used in the room of adjectives 157 ADJECTIVES; often used as DOOM used as predicates of a sentence article before them in this case Adjectives qualifying nouns Plur. adjectives with Dual Nouns Adj. with nouns of common gender Comparative degree of adjectives Superlative .... Various methods of making a superlative NUMERALS Cardinal numbers used for Ordinals PRONOUNS; use of the primitive ones used for the verb of existence Case of suffix-pronouns Exceptions .... Position of noun-suffixes Position of pronouns in a sentence Place of reflexive pronouns supplied by vari- ous nouns .... . Anomalies of pronouns . Relative pronouns VERBS; general principle of concord Concord with nouns of multitude 158 159 l> 159 199 159 160 ltiO 161 161 162 163 163 163 164 164 165 165 165 166 166 167 Verbs with leveral oooneeted Nominatives Id ( loneord of nouns « ■ t *• i in ■. Anomalies in concord of rerba; nniabei u io render ns to both iiicniIht tad [imrlei Peculiar Anomaly .... Impersonal Verba .... Verbs with indefinite Nominatives TENSES; various meaning of the Praeter of the Future IMPERATIVE MOOD I Ige of J lomposite Verb* governed by Verbs Verbs governing two Accusatives Passive Verba . . . . INF. ABSOLUTE, and its various uses Inf. const, and its various uses . PARTICLES; adverbs Prepositions Conjunctions and Interjections PLEONASM ELLIPSIS .... of nouns of pronouns of the verb of existence of adverbs of prepositions . of conjunctions . in poetic parallelism Change of construction Const ructio praegnans Zeugma » HendiadyB - Paronomasia « Paradigms of verbs, nouns, etc. 167 166 169 176 170 I VI 172 r,3 175 176 176 17ii 177 177 179 PARTICIPLES 182 Verbs used as adverbs . . . . 1-J 1-:: 184 185 185 . 186 . 186 . Ic7 . 188 . LSI . 189 . 190 - 190 - 191 - 192 - 192 - 193 - 193 196 seq. UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY Los Angeles I liis book is DUE on the last l •Vr PJ4563 .S932g 1 82 8 vr L 009 604 357 5 r&jt mm MM fflm